Samsung IP Phone DS 5000 User Guide

Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
TABLE OF CONTENTS APRIL 2007  
T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S  
USER INSTRUCTIONS SECTION  
PART DESCRIPTION  
PAGE  
1
ENHANCED DISPLAY PROGRAMMING  
1.1  
OVERVIEW........................................................................................... 1.1  
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET................................................................... 1.4  
CHANGING YOUR PASSCODE ......................................................... 1.5  
CALL FORWARDING .......................................................................... 1.6  
SETTING YOUR ANSWER MODE ..................................................... 1.8  
PROGRAMMING YOUR STATION’S NAME....................................... 1.9  
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS .............. 1.11  
NAMING YOUR PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LOCATIONS ................ 1.12  
ADDING EXTENDERS TO KEYS ..................................................... 1.13  
CHECKING STATION STATUS ........................................................ 1.14  
CHANGING YOUR TIME AND DATE DISPLAY ............................... 1.15  
SETTING STATION ON/OFF OPTIONS .......................................... 1.16  
SELECTING A RING TONE .............................................................. 1.19  
ALARM REMINDER ........................................................................... 1.20  
STATION VOLUME ............................................................................ 1.21  
SETTING A PROGRAMMED MESSAGE.......................................... 1.23  
ALARM REMINDER WITH MESSAGE ............................................. 1.24  
CALLER ID DISPLAY ......................................................................... 1.25  
1.2  
1.3  
1.4  
1.5  
1.6  
1.7  
1.8  
1.9  
1.10  
1.11  
1.12  
1.13  
1.14  
1.15  
1.16  
1.17  
1.18  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
ITP-5112L USER GUIDE  
ITP-5121D USER GUIDE  
ITP-5107S USER GUIDE  
DS 5000 SERIES USER GUIDE  
iDCS KEYSET USER GUIDE  
STANDARD TELEPHONE USER GUIDE  
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION AND SPECIAL FEATURES GUIDE  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
This diagram illustrates the keys on a iDCS 8  
BUTTON keyset that have special functions  
during programming. When required, these keys  
will be referred to by the names described in the  
diagram.  
ITP and DS 5000 Series Keysets  
This diagram illustrates the keys on an ITP 5021-D keyset. The ITP and DS 5000  
keysets have keys that have special functions during programming. When required,  
these keys will be referred to by the names described in the diagram.  
A BC D E F  
1.2  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.2 LOCKING YOUR KEYSET  
You can lock your keyset to prevent other people from making or receiving calls while  
you are away. You can unlock it when you return.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] STN LOCK  
PASSCODE:_  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 100  
Display shows  
[201] STN LOCK  
UNLOCKED  
2. Enter your passocde  
Default is 1234  
[201] STN LOCK  
LOCKED OUTGOING  
3. Enter 1 for locking outgoing calls (Internal  
calls will still be allowed).  
OR  
[201] STN LOCK  
LOCKED ALL CALLS  
4. Enter 2 for locking all calls (Internal and  
external calls will not be allowed).  
[201] STN LOCK  
UNLOCKED  
5. Enter 0 to unlock your phone.  
6. Press the transfer key to save and exit  
1.3  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.3 CHANGING YOUR PASSCODE  
Each keyset user can set or change his/her individual passcode. This passcode is used  
to lock or unlock keysets, for toll restriction override and to access the DISA feature.  
NOTE: Default passcodes cannot be used for toll restriction override or for DISA  
access.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] PASSCODE  
OLD CODE:_  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 101  
Display shows  
[201] PASSCODE  
OLD CODE:****  
2. Enter the existing passcode (default = 1234)  
3. Enter the new passcode  
[201] PASSCODE  
NEW CODE:_  
[201] PASSCODE  
VERIFY :SUCCESS  
4. Reenter the new passcode to verify the number  
If reentered correctly, display shows  
5. Press the transfer key to save and exit  
1.4  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.4 CALL FORWARDING  
The OfficeServ 7100 allows the system administrator to program the call forward  
destinations for other station users. This MMC also allows call forward to be set after  
the destination has been entered.  
The OfficeServ 7100 system allows four types of call forwarding: FORWARD ALL,  
FORWARD NO ANSWER, FORWARD BUSY, and FORWARD DND. There is an  
additional option, FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER, that allows both of these options to  
be activated at the same time, provided that destinations have been entered for both.  
The destinations for all these forwards can be either an internal number or an external  
number.  
0 = FORWARD CANCEL  
1 = ALL CALL  
2 = BUSY  
3 = NO ANSWER  
4 = BUSY/NO ANSWER  
5 = FORWARD DND  
0 = FORWARD CANCEL  
1 = ALL CALL  
This option will cancel any call forwarding set in MMC  
102. It will not remove the programmed destination and  
will not override any preset forward settings in MMC 316.  
This option, when set, will forward all calls to the  
programmed destination. If the programmed destination  
is a station then that station can call the forwarded  
station to put calls through.  
2 = BUSY  
This option, when set, will forward calls to the  
programmed destination when the forwarded keyset is  
busy.  
3 = NO ANSWER  
This option, when set, will forward calls to the  
programmed destination if the forwarded station  
does not answer a call before the forward no answer  
timer in MMC 502 expires.  
4 = BUSY/NO ANSWER  
5 = FWD DND  
This option will activate both the BUSY option and the  
NO ANSWER option at the same time.  
This option will forward all calls to the programmed  
destination whenever the forwarded station goes into  
DND.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] FORWARD  
0:FORWARD CANCEL  
1.  
Press the transfer key followed by 102  
Display shows  
1.5  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
[201] FORWARD  
1:ALL CALL:NONE  
2.  
3.  
4.  
Dial 0 – 4 to select forward type  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select forward type  
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor  
[201] FORWARD  
1:ALL CALL:205  
Dial destination number (e.g., 201)  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select destination  
and press RIGHT soft key to move cursor  
[201] FORWARD  
CURENTLY SET :YES  
Dial 1 for YES, 0 for NO  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO  
and press RIGHT soft key to return to step  
2
5.  
Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.6  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.5 SETTING YOUR ANSWER MODE  
Each keyset can have its answer mode for intercom calls set to one of the following  
options:  
RING—The station will ring in one of eight custom ring patterns. Calls are answered by  
pressing the ANS/RLS key or lifting the handset.  
AUTO—After giving a short attention tone, the station will automatically answer calls on  
the speakerphone. When a C.O. line is transferred to a station in Auto Answer, the  
screened portion of the call will be Auto Answer, but the keyset will ring when the  
transfer is complete if the user has not pressed the ANS/RLS key or lifted the handset.  
VOICE—The station will not ring. After a short attention tone, callers can make an  
announcement. The called party must press the ANS/RLS key or lift the handset to  
reply.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] ANS MODE  
RING MODE  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 103  
Display shows  
[201] ANS MODE  
VOICE ANNOUNCE  
2. Dial 0, 1 or 2 to change the ring mode, e.g., 2  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the ring mode  
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.7  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.6 PROGRAMMING YOUR STATION’S NAME  
Names are written using the keypad. Each key press selects a character. Pressing the  
dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the directory name  
is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” four times to get the letter “S.” Press the  
number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selecting characters from the table  
below to complete your message. Pressing the bottom left programmable key will  
change the letter from upper case to lower case. There are up to 11 characters that can  
be used. NOTE: When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the  
previous character, press the VOLUME UP or DOWN keys to move the cursor to the  
right or to the left.  
iDCS KEYSETS and ITP KEYSETS  
COUNT  
1
2
3
4
5
DIAL 0  
DIAL 1  
DIAL 2  
DIAL 3  
DIAL 4  
DIAL 5  
DIAL 6  
DIAL 7  
DIAL 8  
DIAL 9  
DIAL 4  
<
space  
>
?
.
,
C
F
I
L
O
R
V
Y
[
)
!
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A
D
G
J
M
P
T
B
E
H
K
N
Q
U
X
@
#
$
%
^
S
4
W
:
Z
]
9
4
=
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %,  
$, -, <, >, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \, " and ~.  
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previous  
character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.  
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] STN NAME  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 104  
Display shows  
[201] STN NAME  
SAMSUNG  
2. Enter the station name using the procedure  
described above  
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.8  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.7 PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED DIAL  
LOCATIONS  
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial list.  
Each station user begins with ten numbers 00–09 and may be assigned up to fifty  
numbers. See your system administrator to determine the amount assigned to your  
station.  
NOTE: Press button B for flash and button C for pause.  
Display keyset users may want to hide some speed dial numbers so they will not show  
in the display. Before entering a telephone number, press button E. All digits after this  
will be hidden. Press button E again to begin displaying digits.  
If your system uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O. lines, pressing button D before  
entering a speed dial will cause all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones until  
the D button is pressed again.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] SPEED DIAL  
00:  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 105  
Display shows  
[201] SPEED DIAL  
SPDBLK NOT EXIST  
If you have no speed dial bins,  
the display will be as shown  
[201] SPEED DIAL  
05:_  
2. Dial the location number (e.g., 05)  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the location  
Press the right soft key to move cursor  
[201] SPEED DIAL  
05:9-4264100_  
3. Enter the trunk access code (e.g., 9) followed  
by the number to be dialed (e.g., 4264100)  
OR  
Press the left soft key to return to step 2  
4. Press the F button to access the next program  
OR  
Press the transfer key to save and exit  
1.9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.8 NAMING YOUR PERSONAL SPEED DIAL  
LOCATIONS  
This program allows a character name to be entered for each personal speed dial  
location. This name enables the speed dial number to be located when using the  
directory dial feature. The directory dial feature allows the display keyset user to select  
a speed dial location by scanning its name. There are up to 11 characters that can be  
used.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] SPEED NAME  
00:  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 106  
Display shows  
[201] SPEED NAME  
01:_  
2. Dial the speed dial location (e.g., 01)  
OR  
Use UP or DOWN to scroll through the location  
numbers and use the right soft key to move the  
cursor  
[201] SPEED NAME  
01:SAMSUNG_  
3. Enter the location name using the procedure  
described in Programming Your Station’s Name  
4. Press UP or DOWN to move to the next  
location  
OR  
Press the F key to program speed dial numbers  
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.9 ADDING EXTENDERS TO KEYS  
This program allows you to assign key extenders to make a general access feature key  
more specific. The feature keys that can have extenders are listed below:  
FEATURE KEY  
DESCRIPTION  
EXTENDER  
BOSS  
DP  
DS  
FWRD  
GPIK  
IG  
MMPG  
PAGE  
PARK  
RP  
SPD  
PMSG  
DIR  
VT  
SG  
Boss and Secretary  
Direct Pickup  
Direct Station Select  
Call Forward  
Group Pickup  
In/Out of Group  
Meet Me Page  
Page  
Park (orbits)  
Ring Plan  
Speed Dial  
Programmed Message  
Directory  
1–4  
Extension or station group number  
Any extension number  
0–5  
01–20  
Any group number you are part of  
0–9, 4  
0–9, 4  
0–9  
1–6 or HOLD for None  
00–49, 500–999  
01–13  
PERS (1), SYS (2) or STN (3)  
Voice Mail Group (501–519)  
Any group number (500–519)  
Voice Mail Transfer  
Station Group  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] EXT (KTS)  
01:CALL1 ¤  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 107  
Display shows the first station  
[201] EXT (KTS)  
2. Enter the key number, e.g., 18  
OR  
18:DS  
¤
Use UP and DOWN to scroll through the keys  
Use the right soft key to move the cursor  
OR  
Press the key to be programmed  
[201] EXT (KTS)  
18:DS ¤DS207  
3. Dial the extender according to above table  
Press the right soft key to return to step 2  
OR  
Press the transfer key to store and exit  
OR  
Press the speaker key to store and advance to  
the next program  
1.11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.10 CHECKING STATION STATUS  
This program displays the following attributes of a station port. This is a read only  
feature.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
PORT #  
PICKUP GROUP  
SGR  
BOSS-SECR  
PAGE  
COS NO  
Cabinet 2 Slot 3  
None, 01–20  
Station Group Number  
None, 1–4  
Page Zone (1–4)  
COS (1–30) per Ring Plan (01–06)  
1
TENANT GROUP  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] STN STATUS  
PORT:C1-S02-P01  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 108  
Display shows  
[201] STN STATUS  
TYPE:24B US SET  
2. Press UP or DOWN to view the status items  
3. Press the transfer key to exit  
1.12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.11 CHANGING YOUR TIME AND DATE DISPLAY  
Display keysets will always have the date and time displayed when not in use. You can  
select from the following display options:  
0
1
2
COUNTRY Sets overall display format and has two options  
0 = ORIENTAL  
1 = WESTERN  
MM/DD DAY HH:MM  
DAY DD MM HH:MM  
CLOCK  
Sets format of clock display and has two options  
0 = 12 HOUR (Displays 1 P.M. as 01:00)  
1 = 24 HOUR (Displays 1 P.M. as 13:00)  
DISPLAY  
Sets format of DAY and MONTH display and has two options  
0 = UPPER CASE (Displays Friday as FRI and March as MAR)  
1 = LOWER CASE (Displays Friday as Fri and March as Mar)  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] DAY FORMAT  
COUNTRY:WESTERN  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 109  
Display shows  
[201] DAY FORMAT  
COUNTRY:ORIENTAL  
2. Press UP or DOWN to select the display mode  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
3. Press the right soft key to return to step 2  
OR  
Press the left soft key to return to step 3  
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.12 SETTING STATION ON/OFF OPTIONS  
The OfficeServ 7100 allows the system administrator to set any of the keyset features  
listed below.  
FEATURES  
DESCRIPTION  
Automatically places an existing C.O. call  
on hold if a CALL button, trunk key or trunk  
route key is pressed during that call.  
AUTO HOLD  
00  
01  
Automatically starts the stopwatch timer  
during a C.O. call.  
AUTO TIMER  
When ON, this feature disables the  
hookswitch allowing a headset user to  
answer all calls by pressing the ANS/RLS  
button.  
02  
HEADSET USE  
When ON, this feature allows the user to  
dial directory numbers without having to  
first lift the handset or press the SPK button.  
03  
04  
05  
HOT KEYPAD  
KEY TONE  
Allows the user to hear a slight tone when  
pressing buttons on keyset.  
Allows the user to hear the latter part of  
page announcements if keyset becomes  
free during a page.  
PAGE REJOIN  
When OFF, requires the user to press the  
fast flashing button to answer a ringing call  
after lifting the handset.  
06  
07  
RING PREF.  
This field is reserved and can not be used  
for U.S. software.  
NOT FOR USA  
Keyset users can allow intercom calls to  
camp-on to other keysets without having to  
press a CAMP-ON key.  
08  
09  
10  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
NOT FOR USA  
If this option is set to YES, station users  
who have AME set must enter their station  
password to listen to messages being left.  
If this option is set to ON the user will have  
the name associated with the speed dial  
number shown in the display after the  
number has been dialed.  
If this setting is set to OFF the CID review  
list will only store CID information for calls  
that were not answered at the station and  
reject the information for calls that were  
answered.  
AME PASSCODE  
11  
12  
DISP SPD NAME  
CID REVIEW ALL  
1.14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
FEATURES  
DESCRIPTION  
When set to OFF an OHVA will be heard  
through the keyset speaker rather than the  
handset.  
13  
14  
SECURE OHVA  
NOT FOR USA  
This option determines whether CO calls  
arriving at a station will be auto answered if  
auto answer is selected in MMC 103.  
For ITP phones with 2 Line Display  
Set to ON will require user to press SEND  
button to make a call, it works like a cell  
phone. Enblock dialing must be enabled in  
MMC 861.  
15  
AUTO ANS CO  
16  
17  
ENBLOCK 2LED  
STN NO RING  
When ON all incoming calls will not ring at  
stations.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
AUTO HOLD :OFF  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 110  
Display shows  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
HOT KEYPAD :OFF  
2. Dial the option number from above list  
(e.g., 4)  
Press UP or DOWN to select the option and  
Press the right soft key to move the  
cursor  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
HOT KEYPAD :ON  
3. Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF  
Press the left or right soft key to return to  
step 2  
OR  
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
AUTO HOLD :OFF  
If option 00 from above list is dialed at  
Step 2  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
AUTO TIMER :OFF  
If option 01 from above list is dialed at  
Step 2  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
HEADSET USE :ON  
If option 02 from above list is dialed at  
Step 2  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
HOT KEYPAD :ON  
If option 03 from above list is dialed at  
Step 2  
1.15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
KEY TONE :ON  
If option 04 from above list is dialed at  
Step 2  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
RING PREF :ON  
If option 06 from above list is dialed at  
Step 2  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
DISPLAY :TIME  
If option 07 from above list is dialed at  
Step 2  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
AUTO CAMPON :ON  
If option 08 from above list is dialed at  
Step 2  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
AME PASSCODE :ON  
If option 10 from above list is dialed at  
Step 2  
[201] STN ON/OFF  
HOT KEYPAD :ON  
4. Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF  
Press the left or right soft key to return to  
Step 2  
5. Press transfer to store and exit  
1.16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.13 SELECTING A RING TONE  
Each keyset user can select one of eight ring frequencies.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] RING TONE  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 111  
SELECTION 6  
Display shows  
[201] RING TONE  
SELECTION 5  
2. Dial 1–8 to select the ring tone  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the ring tone  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
3. Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.14 ALARM REMINDER  
Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones. Each alarm may be  
one of the following three types:  
0. NOTSET  
The alarm is not set.  
1. TODAY ONLY The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled  
automatically.  
2. DAILY  
The alarm will ring each day at this time.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] ALM CLK(1)  
HHMM: ¤NOTSET  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 112  
Display shows  
[201] ALM CLK(2)  
HHMM: ¤NOTSET  
2. Dial 13 to select the alarm (e.g., 2)  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
OR  
Press the left soft key to return to step 2  
[201] ALM CLK (2)  
HHMM:1300¤NOTSET  
3. Enter alarm time in 24 hour format (e.g., 1300)  
Display automatically advances to step 5  
[201] ALM CLK  
HHMM:1300¤DAILY  
4. Enter alarm type (e.g., 2)  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select alarm type  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
and return to step 2  
5. Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.15 STATION VOLUME  
This procedure allows users to view and set the level of the volume for your keyset.  
0. RING VOLUME  
1. OFF-RING VOL  
2. HANDSET VOL  
3. SPEAKER VOL  
4. BGM VOLUME  
Set a level for your keyset ring volume. There are eight levels of  
volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest.  
Set a level for your keyset off-hook ring volume. There are eight  
levels of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest.  
Set a level for your keyset handset volume. There are eight  
levels of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 8 is the highest.  
Set a level for your keyset speaker volume. There are sixteen  
levels of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 16 is the highest.  
Set a level for your keyset background music volume. There are  
sixteen levels of volume; level 1 is the lowest and level 16 is the  
highest.  
5. PAGE VOLUME  
This is the volume you will hear internal page over the keyset  
speaker when your keyset is idle and BGM is turned on. There  
are 16 volume levels: level 1 is the lowest and level 16 the  
highest.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] STN VOLUME  
RING VOLUME :OFF  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 114  
Display shows  
[201] STN VOLUME  
OFF-RING VOL:OFF  
2. Dial 1-8 to select the volume to change  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the volume to  
change  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
[201] STN VOLUME  
OFF-RING VOL:ON  
3. Press UP or DOWN to select ON or OFF  
Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2  
OR  
Dial 1 for ON or 0 for OFF  
[201] STN VOLUME  
RING VOLUME :4  
If option 0 from above list is dialed at step 2  
1.19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
[201] STN VOLUME  
OFF-RING VOL:4  
If option 1 from above list is dialed at step 2  
[201] STN VOLUME  
HANDSET VOL:4  
If option 2 from above list is dialed at step 2  
If option 3 from above list is dialed at step 2  
If option 4 from above list is dialed at step 2  
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit  
[201] STN VOLUME  
SPEAKER VOL:13  
[201] STN VOLUME  
BGM VOLUME :13  
1.20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.16 SETTING A PROGRAMMED MESSAGE  
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a  
programmed message. Display stations calling you will see this message and be  
informed of your status or follow your instructions.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] PGMMSG(00)  
CANCEL VAC MSG  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 115  
Display shows  
[201] PGMMSG(05)  
PAGE ME  
2. Dial 0020 to select message number, e.g., 05  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select message  
3. Press the left or right soft key to return to step 2  
OR  
Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.17 ALARM REMINDER WITH MESSAGE  
Station users can have three alarms programmed at their phones. Each alarm may be  
one of the following three types:  
0. NOTSET  
The alarm is not set.  
1. TODAY ONLY The alarm will ring at the programmed time and be canceled  
automatically.  
2. DAILY  
The alarm will ring each day at this time.  
In addition, each alarm may be accompanied by a 16 character message that will be  
displayed while the alarm is ringing.  
NOTE: These are the same three alarms described in Alarm Reminder. This procedure  
allows a message to be added. A display keyset is necessary to view messages.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] ALM REM(1)  
HHMM: ¤NOTSET  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 116  
Display shows  
[201] ALM REM(1)  
HHMM: ¤NOTSET  
2. Dial 13 to select the alarm (e.g., 2)  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the alarm  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
[201] ALM REM (2)  
HHMM:1300¤NOTSET  
3. Enter the alarm time in 24 hour clock format  
(e.g., 1300)  
Display automatically advances to step 4  
[201] ALM REM  
HHMM:1300¤DAILY  
4. Dial the valid entry from the above list for the  
alarm type  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the alarm type  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
[201] ALM REM  
TAKE MEDICATION  
5. Enter messages using the method in  
Programming Your Station’s Name  
Press the right soft key to return to step 2  
6. Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
1.18 CALLER ID DISPLAY  
The station user can change the order in which the CLI, Caller ID and/or ANI  
information is displayed on an LCD set during a transferred call.  
CLI display options are the following:  
0. NO DISPLAY  
No CLI data will be displayed.  
1. NUMBER FIRST  
The CLI number received from the Central Office will be  
displayed first.  
2. NAME FIRST  
The CLI name received from the Central Office will be  
displayed first.  
Caller ID display options are the following:  
0. NO DISPLAY  
No CID data will be displayed.  
1. NUMBER FIRST  
The CID number received from the Central Office will be  
displayed first.  
2. NAME FIRST  
The CID name received from the Central Office will be  
displayed first.  
ANI display options are the following:  
0. NO DISPLAY  
No ANI data will be displayed.  
1. NUMBER FIRST  
The ANI number received from the Central Office will be  
displayed first.  
2. NAME FIRST  
Since there is no name sent by the Central Office, The only  
time you will receive a name is when your service company  
has programmed a name to be associated with the number  
otherwise your display will read “no ANI name”.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
[201] CID DISP  
NUMBER FIRST  
1. Press the transfer key followed by 119  
Display shows  
1.23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OfficeServ 7100  
TECHNICAL MANUAL  
USER INSTRUCTIONS  
PART 1 APRIL 2007  
[201] ANI DISP  
NUMBER FIRST  
2. Dial 0 or 1 to select CID or ANI  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select CID or ANI and  
press the right soft key  
[201] CID DISP  
NAME FIRST  
3. Dial display option 0, 1 or 2, e.g., 2  
OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select option  
4. Press the transfer key to store and exit  
1.24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home Page  
Table of Contents  
ITP-5112L  
ITP-5112L User Guide  
For OfficeServ100, OfficeServ500,  
OfficeServ7000 Series  
04/2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
ABOUT THIS BOOK ....................................................................................1  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ................................................2–8  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET ........................................................9  
ITP-5112L SETUP ........................................................................................10  
Initializing the ITP-5112L............................................................................................................10  
IP Setup Menu ................................................................................................................................10  
Menu Structure..............................................................................................................................11  
Navigating the Menus ................................................................................................................12  
Setting the Network Parameters ............................................................................................12  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
Making an Outside Call ..............................................................................................................16  
Dialing from the Outgoing / Incoming Menu....................................................................17  
Dialing the Most Recent Outgoing / Incoming Number ..............................................17  
Making Calls from the Call Log ................................................................................................17  
Answering a Call ..........................................................................................................................17  
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................................18  
Recall Dial Tone ............................................................................................................................18  
Sending a Flash..............................................................................................................................18  
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ..........................................................................................18  
Canceling Callback........................................................................................................................19  
INTERCOM CALLS  
Calling Other Stations ................................................................................................................20  
Dialing the Most Recent Outgoing / Incoming Number................................................20  
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................................20  
Voice Announce Mode................................................................................................................20  
Auto Answer Mode ......................................................................................................................21  
Busy Station Callback ..................................................................................................................21  
Busy Station Camp-On................................................................................................................21  
Calling your System Operator ..................................................................................................22  
Copyright 2006 Samsung Telecommunications America.  
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,  
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—  
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.  
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in  
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior  
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing  
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from  
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.  
CALL PROCESSING  
System Hold ....................................................................................................................................23  
Exclusive Hold ................................................................................................................................23  
Remote Hold ..................................................................................................................................23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Hold Recall ......................................................................................................................................24  
Consultation Hold ........................................................................................................................24  
Retrieving Calls Held at Another Station..............................................................................24  
Transferring Calls ..........................................................................................................................25  
Transfer with Camp-On ..............................................................................................................25  
Transfer to Voicemail....................................................................................................................26  
Call Waiting......................................................................................................................................26  
Conference Calls............................................................................................................................26  
Conference Splitting ....................................................................................................................27  
Conference Groups ..............................................................................................................27–28  
Forwarding Calls ....................................................................................................................28-29  
Call Forward Options ..................................................................................................................29  
Station Call Pickup........................................................................................................................30  
Group Call Pickup..........................................................................................................................30  
My Group Pickup ..........................................................................................................................30  
Privacy Release ..............................................................................................................................30  
Background Music ........................................................................................................................40  
Established Call Pick-Up ............................................................................................................41  
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock....................................................................................41  
Door Phone Calls ....................................................................................................................43-44  
Executive/Secretary Hotline......................................................................................................44  
Group Listening ............................................................................................................................46  
Account Codes ..............................................................................................................................46  
Locking Your Keyset ....................................................................................................................46  
Manual Signalling ........................................................................................................................47  
Off-Hook Voice Announce ........................................................................................................47  
OHVA Block......................................................................................................................................48  
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................................48  
In Group/Out of Group ..............................................................................................................48  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
AME Password................................................................................................................................49  
Auto Camp-On ..............................................................................................................................49  
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................................50  
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................................50  
Set Answer Mode (Intercom)....................................................................................................51  
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................................51  
Automatic Hold..............................................................................................................................51  
Headset Operation ......................................................................................................................52  
Hot Keypad......................................................................................................................................52  
Key Confirmation Tone................................................................................................................53  
Rejoining a Page............................................................................................................................53  
Ring Preference..............................................................................................................................53  
Auto Answer CO Calls..................................................................................................................54  
Display Speed Dial Name ..........................................................................................................54  
Caller ID Review All ......................................................................................................................55  
Secure OHVA ..................................................................................................................................55  
DIALING FEATURES  
Speed Dialing ................................................................................................................................31  
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ....................................................................32  
One Touch Speed Dialing ..........................................................................................................33  
Directory Dialing ..........................................................................................................................33  
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................................34  
Manual Retry with Redial ..........................................................................................................34  
Save Number with Redial ..........................................................................................................34  
Automatic Redial/Retry ..............................................................................................................35  
Pulse to Tone Changeover ........................................................................................................35  
Memo Redialing ............................................................................................................................35  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
Making an Internal Page ............................................................................................................36  
Making an External Page............................................................................................................36  
All Page ............................................................................................................................................36  
Meet Me Page ................................................................................................................................36  
Call Park and Page ........................................................................................................................37  
Messages—Set and Cancel ......................................................................................................38  
Returning Messages ....................................................................................................................38  
Programmed Messages ..............................................................................................................39  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
Directory Information ................................................................................................................ 56  
Call Log ............................................................................................................................................56  
Dial by Name ..................................................................................................................................57  
Call Progress Displays..................................................................................................................57  
Display Number Dialed ..............................................................................................................58  
Call Duration Timer ......................................................................................................................58  
Auto Timer ......................................................................................................................................58  
Timer Function ..............................................................................................................................58  
Viewing Message Indications ..................................................................................................59  
Personal Speed Dial Names ......................................................................................................59  
Station Names................................................................................................................................59  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
Do Not Disturb ..............................................................................................................................40  
One Time DND ..............................................................................................................................40  
Mute ..................................................................................................................................................40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Managing Key Assignments ....................................................................................................59  
LCR with Clear ................................................................................................................................60  
Backspace with LCR......................................................................................................................60  
Text Messaging ......................................................................................................................60–61  
CALLER ID ............................................................................................................62  
Selecting your Caller ID Display ..............................................................................................62  
Viewing the Next Caller ID Call................................................................................................62  
Saving the Caller ID Number....................................................................................................62  
Redialing a Saved Caller ID Number......................................................................................62  
Storing a Caller ID Number ......................................................................................................63  
Inquire Caller ID Park/Hold Info ..............................................................................................63  
Reviewing Past Caller ID Calls ..................................................................................................64  
ABOUT THIS BOOK  
APPLICATION PROGRAM MENUS ........................................65  
Samsung’s new OfficeServ technology keyset model ITP-5112L is part of the  
OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 Series.  
PhoneBook......................................................................................................................................65  
E-Diary ..............................................................................................................................................65  
Message............................................................................................................................................66  
Sound/Screen ................................................................................................................................67  
Call Forward....................................................................................................................................67  
Setup ................................................................................................................................................67  
My Phone ........................................................................................................................................69  
The ITP-5112L IP keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses  
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the ITP-  
5112L uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing  
number of homes.  
The ITP-5112L IP keysets also incorporate a large LCD color screen, which provides  
important information for the user, to make using the keyset easier and more con-  
venient.  
Samsung Voicemail..................................................................................70  
Accessing your Mailbox ..............................................................................................................71  
Subscriber Services Menu Diagram ................................................................................72–73  
Getting Started .............................................................................................................................74  
Listen to your Messages.............................................................................................................74  
Subscriber Services Menu .........................................................................................................74  
Listening to Old or New Messages ........................................................................................75  
Group New or Old Messages....................................................................................................76  
Record and Send a Message ....................................................................................................76  
Access Manager ............................................................................................................................77  
Personal Greetings ......................................................................................................................79  
Mailbox Administration..............................................................................................................81  
Message Broadcast ....................................................................................................................83  
Personal Services ........................................................................................................................84  
Personal Administration Settings ..........................................................................................85  
Keyset User Features ..................................................................................................................86  
Shortcuts ........................................................................................................................................88  
Interactive Displays ......................................................................................................................88  
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation  
of your keyset. Keep this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for  
infrequently used features.  
This book is written based on factory default settings, for the feature access codes.  
Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be changed. If  
you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book, please con-  
tact your installation and service company to determine the correct code.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ............................89–90  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW  
The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key-  
set above the display. The terminal status indicator is a tri-colored (red, green, and  
amber) light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi-  
vidual button LEDs. The terminal status indicator provides the following indica-  
tions:  
USER ORIENTATION  
The ITP model telephones are called “IP keysets. The IP keyset incorporates but-  
tons or “keys” that are used to access or activate the many features of your office  
phone system. The lower five buttons (ten total) that reside on either side of the  
Large Display screen are programmable buttons. This means they can be pro-  
grammed for a specific function on your keyset and that same button can be  
something different on another keyset. See the system manager to get your most  
frequently used features assigned to your programmable buttons.  
Busy/Off Hook  
Intercom Ring  
Outside Call Ring  
Recall Ring  
Message Waiting  
Do Not Disturb  
Steady Red  
Flashing Red  
Flashing Blue  
Flashing Amber  
Flashing Red  
Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals  
The top button on either side of the Large Display Screen scrolls through the var-  
ious levels of the programmable button display screens.  
SELECT BUTTONS  
Lines from the telephone company are “C.O. lines. Calls on these lines are referred  
to as “outside calls. Your system can have individual C.O. line buttons or lines may  
be assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an  
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press aLOCALbut-  
ton to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing theLCRbut-  
ton will automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits  
are dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703,  
etc.  
The 5112L keysets incorporate twelve select buttons. These buttons are posi-  
tioned six on either side of the LCD screen.  
The top left and right buttons are used to page up and page down screens.  
The remaining five buttons on either side of the display are programmable. There  
are ten programmable buttons per programmable feature screen, with the excep-  
tion of the last screen, which has nine programmable buttons. The total program-  
mable buttons per 5112L station is ninety-nine.Any system feature or function can  
be assigned to these buttons.  
Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons are programmed to ring specific stations.  
You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number.  
The 5112L keyset provides distinctive ring patterns:  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
The 5112L keysets use the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume  
while the keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use  
and the handset volume while you are listening. These three levels will be stored  
in memory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset, the vol-  
ume buttons will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard  
through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by  
using the volume buttons.There are 16 levels for each volume setting.The volume  
of off-hook ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.  
Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated.  
Internal calls have a double ring tone repeated.  
Door phone calls and alarm/appointment reminders have a triple ring tone  
repeated.  
FULL DUPLEX SPEAKERPHONE  
All ITP keysets are speakerphones. Pressing the SEND button will answer an  
incoming call on the speakerphone. Pressing the END button will release the call  
on the speakerphone.  
Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy. Press the SPEAKER but-  
ton and hang up the handset.  
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SCROLL BUTTON ASSEMBLY  
SCREEN BUTTON  
The scroll button is actually a type of thumbwheel assembly. You may use it to  
scroll through the station screens. Rolling the SCROLL BUTTON DOWN (towards  
the navigation button) will advance you through the multiple SOFT MENU and  
STATION PROGRAMMABLE button screens. Rolling the SCROLL BUTTON UP  
(towards the station display) will bring the cursor back towards the Main Screen.  
By scrolling up or down, you cause the cursor to move back and forth through the  
screens in the same manner as the UP/DOWN arrows on the top SELECT BUT-  
TONS work.  
The 5112L incorporates a SCREEN button. This button allows you to choose your  
keyset’s idle screen display. The default is CALENDAR. The options are STATION  
FIXED FEATURE buttons (two levels), or STATION PROGRAMMABLE buttons  
(ten levels).  
NOTE:  
From the default CALENDAR screen:  
Press the SCREEN button once to access the STATION PROGRAMMABLE  
BUTTON SCREEN #1. Press the DOWN arrow associated with the top left soft  
key and you will advance to STATION PROGRAMMABLE SCREEN #2. Each  
additional press of the DOWN arrow will advance you through the screens,  
until you reach SCREEN #10. Press the UP arrow associated with the top left  
soft key to return to the previous screen. Each additional press of the UP but-  
ton will move you back towards the main screen.  
Press the SCREEN button twice to access the SOFT MENU SCREEN #1. Press  
the DOWN arrow associated with the top left soft key and you will advance  
to SCREEN #2.  
NAVIGATION BUTTON  
The 5112L keysets incorporate a Navigation Button. This button is designed to  
assist the user in activating and using various station features, more easily. These  
features include Outgoing Call Log, Incoming Call Log, Speed Number Search, Call  
Forward Assign and Alarm Assign.  
With the NAVIGATION BUTTON, the station user is no longer required to enter  
station level programming to activate these frequently used features. A few but-  
ton presses and these features are activated.  
The NAVIGATION BUTTON is divided into separate feature buttons. These but-  
tons are described below.  
CONFERENCE BUTTON  
The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to five parties  
MENU BUTTON: This button displays the station feature main menu, which is  
configured in icons, so that the users can easily utilize various settings and  
helpful functions.  
(station or trunk).  
TRANSFER BUTTON  
SEND BUTTON: If the station is programmed for Enblock Dial Mode, when  
dialing an outside telephone number or internal station number, you must  
press the SEND button to initiate the call. This button is also used when  
reviewing recently received or called numbers and answering incoming calls.  
TRANSFER is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You  
can do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you  
can do a blind transfer without notification.  
The SEND button operates as the ANS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An  
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.  
HOLD BUTTON  
The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset, while enabling you to call  
ENTER BUTTON: This button is used to select a menu option, or to save  
changes made to a menu or submenu option.  
other stations or consult coworkers in confidence.  
DIRECTION BUTTON: The DIRECTION BUTTON is the donut shaped ring,  
which surrounds the ENTER button.This button is used to navigate within the  
menus. There are directional arrows stenciled into this button, which indicate  
which direction the cursor will be moved.  
SPEAKER BUTTON  
The SPEAKER button allows you to have a conversation from the keyset without  
lifting the handset.  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Note that the DIRECTION BUTTON has four icons, at the top, bottom, left and  
right of the ENTER button. These icons are used to navigate directly to  
particular programming options from the CALENDAR screen.  
SYSTEM TONES  
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already  
familiar to you.  
Pressing the top (INFO) icon will take you directly to the STATUS INFO  
SCREEN. The bottom (TONE) icon will take you to the Sound/Screen Menu.  
The left side (MESSAGE) icon will take you to the Text Message Menu. The  
right side (PHONE) icon will take you to the PhoneBook Menu.  
END BUTTON: This button is used to disconnect a call after a conversation or  
to move to the initial screen.  
The END button operates as the RLS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An  
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.  
CANCEL BUTTON: This button is used to erase any characters or numbers  
entered by the dial button or to move to the previous screen.  
After pressing the MENU button, use the direction button to highlight the desired  
menu icon. For multiple screen options, the UP/DOWN arrows at the either side of  
the top of the LCD may be used to scroll on a per page basis. Press ENTER to  
access that menu. To navigate within the menu, you may scroll to the desired  
option/function, dial the associated option function number or press the associ-  
ated select button on either side of the display.  
Press the END button to exit programming.  
FEATURE ACCESS CODES  
This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea-  
tures. If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes  
may not be correct.Your installing company can inform you the correct codes.  
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ITP-5112L KEYSET  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET  
Color LCD Panel  
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.  
Displays a large quantity  
of information so that  
the users can easily  
search.  
Select Buttons (6)  
To select a specific item  
the user can simply  
press the Select button  
next to the item.  
Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the  
upper section of the bottom panel. Push towards the top of the keyset to lock  
in.  
Volume Button  
Used to adjust  
the volume of  
the handset,  
speakerphone,  
ringer, back-  
Select Button (6)  
Status Indicator  
Used to provide  
your keyset status.  
Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the  
symbol.  
Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face  
down.  
ground music  
and page.  
Screen  
Button  
Plug an eight-conductor ethernet cable, from the wall, into the jack marked  
LAN on the back of the keyset.(Connect the ITP keyset to any port on the local  
network).  
Scroll  
Button  
Navigation Button  
Microphone Button  
Dial Button  
Speaker Button  
If your ITP will share LAN connection with a PC, plug an eight-conductor eth-  
ernet cable, from the PC, into the jack marked PC on the back of the keyset.  
Conference Button  
Used to make a calls of  
up to 5 parties.  
For handsfree operation and ringing.  
Plug the power connector, from the power adapter provided, into the power  
jack on the back of the keyset. The power adapter is not required if the ITP is  
connected to a LAN connection that provides power over the ethernet. The  
ITP-5112L supports the power over ethernet feature when it is connected to  
a IEEE 802.3af compliant LAN switch or power injector port.  
Hold Button  
Used to save a call  
without hanging-  
up on the current  
call.  
Transfer Button  
IMPORTANT NOTES:  
Be careful not to connect the Network LAN cable into the PC connector of the  
phone.  
To prevent damaging the keyset, only use the Power Adapter that came with  
the 5112LD keyset.  
This manual assumes that the ITP keysets are connected to a functioning local  
IP network. The local IP network must be able to communicate with the MCP  
and MGI card in the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, or in the OfficeServ 7000  
Series systems over IP. This is assumed regardless of whether the IP keyset is  
on a local or remote network.  
Before using your ITP-5112L phone, press the MENU button, select  
Sound/Screen, then select option 8,“Screen Saver. If you chooseUser Define,  
you can set the time period for the Power Save Mode to occur or you can  
select the interval the Power Save Mode occurs. During Power Save Mode the  
screen will turn off.  
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
The [0]-[9] dial buttons are used to directly choose a menu, or sub menu  
options.  
The [ENTER] button in the navigation button assembly is used when saving a  
modification.  
The [MENU] button in the navigation button assembly is used to to display  
the IP Setup Main Menu.  
The [END] button in the navigation button assembly is used when canceling  
or editing the modification, or existing programming.  
The [CANCEL] button in the navigation button assembly is used to go back to  
the previous screen or to delete the last digit of a displayed option value.  
ITP-5112L SETUP  
INITIALIZING THE ITP-5112L  
Initially the ITP-5112L IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users  
network.The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event  
that the system information should change. The option chosen via scroll button  
will be highlighted.  
The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 100, the  
OfficeServ 500, or the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary infor-  
mation has been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID and password of the server,  
as described below to register the phone.  
MENU STRUCTURE  
The IP SETUP MENU is configured as follows:  
1. SYSTEM EASY WIZARD  
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The  
addresses necessary to set up the ITP-5112L are:  
This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for con-  
necting the ITP keyset to your system.  
IP Address of Station  
Network Gateway Address  
IP Address of System’s MCP  
User ID  
2. SYSTEM INFORMATION  
1. Version Info: Provides boot rom, software, DSP, and hardware version  
information.  
2. Network Info: Displays network mode, IP address of phone, network, and  
gateway information.  
3. Netmask  
Password  
IP SETUP MENU  
4. Gateway  
To get to the SETUP MODE unplug the power  
cord from the ITP. Press and hold the MENU  
button while you plug power back into the  
phone. Release the MENU button when you  
see the SETUP SCREEN. If you have a PoE  
(Power over Ethernet) connection, the same  
procedure can be done by unplugging and  
plugging the Ethernet cable into the phone  
while pressing and holding the MENU button.  
Note that items 2 to 4 are only displayed when setting Manual IP.  
Configuration  
*1.System Easy Wizard  
2.System Information  
3.Network Setup  
4.Load & Upgrade Setup  
5.System Server Setup  
6.Factory Reset  
3. NETWORK SETUP  
This menu allows you to individually setup the same parameters found in the  
Easy Wizard.  
4. LOAD & UPGRADE SETUP  
7.Reboot  
1. Upgrade TFTP Server:The IP address of the TFTP server containing the ITP  
software.  
2. Upgrade Start: Starts the ITP software upgrade process.  
Once the CONFIGURATION MENU is displayed, you can move to each menu in  
the Set Up by using the navigation buttons and [1]-[9] dial buttons of the ITP-  
5112L IP phone.  
5. SYSTEM SERVER SETUP  
1. Server IP Address:The MCP’s IP address.  
2. Server ID: The ID assigned to your ITP (see your phone administrator for  
this information).  
3. Server Pass:The password assigned to your ITP (see your phone adminis-  
trator for this information).  
The UP and DOWN directions buttons in the navigation button assembly are  
used to move the highlighted bar up or down to the desired option.  
The LEFT and RIGHT buttons in the navigation button assembly are used to  
move the highlighted bar left or right, to the desired option, move to a sub  
menu and if a menu is at the last line, that menu option will be executed.  
10  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
If [1. Manual IP] is selected, the user must enter the IP address, subnet mask,  
and gateway value for the customer network that the 5112L resides on.  
6. FACTORY RESET  
This option resets ITP to factory default settings.  
If [2. DHCP] is selected, the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway value will be  
set to the default values automatically. (Choose this option only if a DHCP  
server is available on the local network).  
7. REBOOT  
This option reboots the ITP.  
[3.PPPoE] (Point to Point Power over Ethernet):This option is selected in some  
cases when connecting directly to ISP (Internet Service Provider) equipment  
without going through a local LAN. If so, you must enter the username/pass-  
word assigned to you by the ISP to authenticate your internet connection.  
NAVIGATING THE MENUS  
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via  
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [] dial keys, as well as utilizing the navigation  
button assembly.  
Setting IP Manually  
The button used for editing and their features are summarized below.  
Network Setup  
1.IP  
2.Subnet  
3.Gateway  
If [1. Manual IP] is selected the Network Setup  
sub menu will be displayed.  
BUTTON  
FEATURES  
Left and Right ......................To move a cursor (highlighted area) or to erase what is  
entered.  
The user directly enters the IP address, subnet  
mask, and gateway, address as follows:  
Enter ........................................To save the current setting and end programming.  
IP Address  
If the [1. IP] menu is selected,the LCD will display  
the following message and the user can enter  
the ITP’s address.  
End............................................To cancel the current programming and return to the  
Main Menu.  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Cancel......................................To move back to the previous screen or delete the last  
digit of the displayed option value.  
Check if there is any currently saved IP address of the phone on the LCD. If the IP  
address has not been set, the LCD displays nothing. The user can enter the IP  
address using [0]-[9] dial buttons and [] button can save that IP address by press-  
ing the [Enter] button of navigation button assembly.  
[] ............................................To enter [.] between IP address fields.  
[0]-[9] ......................................To enter numerical values.  
Subnet  
If the [2. Subnet] menu is selected, the user can  
enter a new Netmask IP address.  
SETTING THE NETWORK PARAMETERS  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Utilize the following programming steps to program the ITP-5112L IP keyset to  
operate within the users network.  
Check if there is any currently saved subnet mask address of the phone on the  
LCD. If the subnet mask address has not been set, the display will show nothing.  
System Easy Wizard  
By selecting this option, the System Easy Wizard can guide you through setting up  
your network parameters. If you want to set up these parameters individually, fol-  
low the instructions below.  
Press any dial buttons from [0]-[9] and [ ] button to enter the subnet mask IP  
address and then save that subnet mask IP address by pressing the [Enter] button  
of navigation button assembly.  
Gateway  
If the [3. Gateway] menu is selected the user can  
enter a new gateway address.  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Network Parameter Setup  
Network Setup  
The user can check if there is any gateway IP address of the phone that is current-  
ly saved on the LCD. If the gateway IP address has not been set, the LCD will show  
nothing. Use any dial buttons from [0]-[9] and [] button to enter the gateway IP  
address and save it by pressing the [Enter] button of navigation buttons.  
From the Configuration Main Menu, select [3.  
Network Setup] to set or modify the network  
parameters. The LCD will display the Network  
Setup screen.  
1.Manual IP  
2.DHCP  
3.PPPoE  
NOTE: If DHCP mode is selected, the IP address, Netmask, and Gateway will not be  
displayed on the LCD.  
12  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
You must input the ID assigned to your ITP phone. See your phone system admin-  
istrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit.  
Load and Upgrade Set/Modify  
The fourth item [4. Load & Upgrade Setup] sets or modifies the IP phone’s soft-  
ware version. Use extreme caution when upgrading the keyset.  
Finally, select the [3. System Password] item and the screen below will be dis-  
played.  
Select the [4. Load & Upgrade] item. The screen below is displayed.  
Phone Password  
xxxx  
1.TFTP Server Setup  
2.Upgrade Start  
[1.TFTP Server Setup]: This option is used to enter the IP address of the TFTP  
Server which hosts the ITP software.  
You must input the password associated with your ID. See your phone system  
administrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit.  
[2.Upgrade Start]: When you select this option, the software from the TFTP  
server will be pushed to the ITP phone.  
Completion of Settings  
From the Main Menu verify settings at the second item [2. System Information]  
after setting all of the above items. Select the seventh item [7.Reboot] to save all  
modified settings and reboot the ITP-5112L phone.  
Registering and Authenticating the ITP to your System  
The fifth item [5. System Server Setup] sets or modifies settings related to the  
registering the ITP to the MCP. Select the [5.System Server Setup]. The screen  
below will be displayed.  
1.System Server  
2.System ID  
3.System Password  
You can set/modify the IP address of the MCP at the [1. System Server] item. The  
screen below is displayed when you enter the item.The server IP is the IP address  
of the MCP.  
Server IP Address  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
You can confirm the current IP address of the authentication server at the LCD  
panel.The address is left blank if it is not set. Use the dial buttons from [0]-[9], and  
[,] to set the IP address and press the [ENTER] button among the navigation but-  
tons to save and exit.  
Next select the [2. System ID] item and the screen below will be displayed.  
Phone ID  
xxxx  
14  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIALING FROM THE OUTGOING /  
INCOMING MENU  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
Note: When making calls, internal or outside calls, in order to access the program-  
mable button screens, press the SCREEN button. Then you can utilize either the  
SCROLL button or the UP/DOWN arrow (select) buttons on the display.  
From the station idle screen, press the MENU button and select PHONE-  
BOOK.  
Select OUTGOING CALLS or INCOMING CALLS from the submenu. These  
menus will store the last thirty calls made to and from the station.  
Press the select button on the display, associated with the number to redial or  
use the DIRECTION or SCROLL button to move the cursor to the desired  
number. Press the ENTER button to display the detailed information of the  
number.  
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
IMPORTANT: Put phone in OVERLAP MODE:  
Press the MENU button.  
Select SETUP and then select DIAL MODE.  
Change it to OVERLAP. If your phone is not in OVERLAP mode you must  
always press the SEND button after dialing the digits to send the call.  
Press the SEND button to dial the number or press ENTER again.  
DIALING THE MOST RECENT OUTGOING /  
INCOMING NUMBER  
Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button,line group button or dial  
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—press an idle outside line button,  
line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the  
speaker—OR—lift the handset and dial the Trunk Group access code or sim-  
ply start dialing.  
Press the SEND button. The most recent call (Internal or External) to or from  
the station will be displayed.  
Continue to press the SEND button and the system will automatically dial the  
number for you.  
Dial the telephone number or the Intercom number.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset. To disconnect a speakerphone call,  
press the END button.  
MAKING CALLS FROM THE CALL LOG  
The Station Call Log displays the last outgoing station, and incoming trunk calls.  
The total number of calls that can be displayed is 60. You may redial any of these  
calls from the Call Log.  
NOTES:  
1. You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and  
there is no button available for that line.  
Press the SEND button to display the first page of the CALL LOG.  
Use the SCROLL button or the DIRECTION button to navigate to the desired  
number. Use the UP and DOWN arrows, associated with the top left and right  
soft keys to advance and return through the CALL LOG Screens.  
When the desired number is highlighted, press the SEND button.  
The number will be automatically dialed.  
2. If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may  
be labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).  
3. If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before  
making a call, dial , plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.  
4. If your system is programmed to require an account code before making  
a call, press the ACCT button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the  
ACCT button again and then select a C.O. line.  
ANSWERING A CALL  
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system  
administrator.  
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call. See  
Ring Preference under Customizing Your KeysetOR—press the SEND button  
to automatically answer on the speakerphone.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
While a call is ringing in, the display will indicate the type of call coming in  
(station number and name, trunk number and name, etc.)  
NOTES:  
1. If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flashing  
button to answer.  
16  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
2. While a call is ringing in, press the SCREEN button to display the programma-  
ble button screen. This will enable you to view and invoke any of the station  
features that you may wish.  
CANCELING CALLBACK  
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a  
callback, the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button, will be solid black.  
UNIVERSAL ANSWER  
To cancel a callback:  
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer  
calls ringing this device, dial 67OR—press the UA button.This device can oper-  
ate in any one of the six different ring plans.  
Press the CALLBACK button, if programmed, or dial 44.The display will show  
the callback details and an option to CLEAR the callback.  
Press the CLEAR button,or press the HOLD button.This will cancel the last set  
callback and display the next set callback, also with the option to CLEAR.This  
process is repeated until all callbacks are cleared from memory.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or  
press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
RECALL DIAL TONE  
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and  
then make a new call on the same line.  
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH button may be  
programmed to recall dial tone.  
SENDING A FLASH  
While on an outside call, press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone  
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.  
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.  
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK  
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that  
the line or group of lines is busy.  
Press the CALLBACK button, if programmed, or dial 44, you will hear confir-  
mation tone.  
Press the END button.  
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.  
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer,wait for dial tone and dial  
the telephone number or speed dial number again.  
NOTES:  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button will be solid  
black.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
18  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
AUTO ANSWER MODE  
INTERCOM CALLS  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
then automatically answer the call.  
CALLING OTHER STATIONS  
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree.  
For privacy, use the handset.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.  
Dial the extension number or group number.  
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback  
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin  
speaking immediately after the tone.  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
to ON.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button.  
NOTES:  
BUSY STATION CALLBACK  
1. If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may  
press this button instead of dialing the number.  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Press the CALLBACK button, if programmed, or dial 44.  
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.  
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to call the now idle station.  
DIALING THE MOST RECENT OUTGOING /  
INCOMING NUMBER  
NOTES:  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, the cursor associated with the CALLBACK button, will be solid  
black.  
Press the SEND button.The most recent call (Internal or External to system) to  
or from the station will be displayed.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER or SEND button before dialing.  
Continue to press the SEND button and the system will automatically dial the  
number for you.  
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON  
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to  
wait for a callback:  
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the SEND button  
to be connected to the calling station.  
Finished the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button.  
MANUAL CAMP-ON  
See Ringing Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.  
Press the CAMP button or dial 45.  
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds  
and the cursor associated with the first available CALL button will flash black  
to indicate your call is waiting.  
Wait for the called party to answer.  
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer-  
ing your camp-on.  
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
you will hear the caller’s announcement.  
Press the SEND button to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—  
OR—lift the handset to reply.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.  
NOTES:  
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to  
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
to ON.  
20  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
CALL PROCESSING  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
SYSTEM HOLD  
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the  
camp on button every time you call a busy station,you can set your phone for auto  
camp-on.  
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD.The call will flash at the keyset. If  
this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash at those keysets also.  
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the flashing LED will go  
steady again. Resume the conversation—OR—press the HOLD button. The  
flashing LED will go steady again and you will be connected to the call again.  
Resume the conversation.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 081 to turn ON auto camp-on or 080 to turn it OFF.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
From the LCD:  
NOTE:While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing CALL button  
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See  
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.  
Press the MENU button.  
Scroll to CONFIG option and press ENTER.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 0 and  
immediately enter the option.  
EXCLUSIVE HOLD  
Scroll to AUTO CAMPON option. Press ENTER to change status.  
Press CANCEL to return to main configuration screen—OR—press END to  
return to idle screen.  
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:  
Press the HOLD button twice. The call will flash on your keyset and this line  
will show a steady indication on other keysets.  
To retrieve the call, press the flashing line button or press the HOLD button a  
third time.  
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR  
Dial 0 and press SEND button to call your system operator or group of opera-  
tors.  
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.  
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.  
NOTE: If the Hot keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
REMOTE HOLD  
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station.  
Press TRANSFER and dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS  
button)  
Press the HOLD button.This will place the call on system hold on an available  
CALL button or Line button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.  
NOTES:  
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons  
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by press-  
ing the TRANSFER button (or the RETURN soft key in the display).  
2. Intercom calls cannot be put on remote hold.  
22  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
HOLD RECALL  
TRANSFERRING CALLS  
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station.The  
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing indicator.  
Transfer is used to send any calls to another extension in one of two ways.You can  
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can  
do a blind transfer without notification.  
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer  
the recall.  
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will  
go to the system operator.  
While on a call, press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or  
group number. Your call is automatically put on transfer hold—OR—press a  
DSS button or station group button.Your call is automatically put on transfer  
hold.  
CONSULTATION HOLD  
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth-  
er extension:  
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer)—  
OR—wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and  
hang up. If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line  
when the called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the  
outside party.  
Press the TRANSFER button; you will receive transfer dial tone. Your call is  
placed on transfer hold.  
Dial the extension number.  
Consult with the internal party.  
Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.  
If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the first  
station to hang up, simply press another DSS button—OR—press the CALL  
button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and begin the trans-  
fer process again.  
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto  
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.  
NOTE:Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside  
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the  
parties by pressing the DROP button.  
NOTES:  
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT ANOTHER  
STATION  
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the  
parties by pressing the TRANSFER button.  
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to re-  
ceive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the other party.  
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press  
the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number.  
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the LINE button with  
the flashing indicator.  
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line  
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.  
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,  
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy  
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.  
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to  
receive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller.  
24  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NOTE:To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal sta-  
tion. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect-  
ed together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONFERENCE button plus  
the CALL button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party  
and use your extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release auto-  
matically. Press CONFERENCE to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.  
TRANSFER TO VOICEMAIL  
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have  
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this.To transfer a call directly to  
a voice mailbox:  
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.  
Hang up when dialing is completed.  
CONFERENCE SPLITTING  
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold  
feature turned on (See Customizing Your Keyset) and all of the outside lines involved  
in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset, you can split the conference  
into separate calls as follows:  
CALL WAITING  
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has  
camped-on to you:  
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you  
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate  
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.  
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automati-  
cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press  
HOLD and then the flashing button—OR—finish the first call and hang up;  
the waiting call will ring.  
Press any one of the outside line buttons. That outside line indicator will  
remain steady to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines  
in the conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom  
callers in the conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each  
caller privately and transfer them as usual, or reestablish another conference.  
CONFERENCE GROUPS  
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer.  
Users can create up to six Conference Groups with five members each (including  
yourself). They can then call all members or only selected members of this group  
at the same time. As each member answers, their status is indicated in the display.  
Depending whether the member is either IN the conference or OUT of the confer-  
ence they can be dropped or called with a single button press. Each Conference  
Group can be programmed with a name for easy identification.  
NOTE:Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.When using the speakerphone  
the camp-on tone will come through the speaker.  
CONFERENCE CALLS  
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of  
outside lines and internal stations in any order.  
Creating a Conference Group  
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONFERENCE button and receive  
conference tone.  
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONFERENCE button  
and receive conference tone.  
Make another call or press the CONFERENCE button to join all parties.  
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.  
From the idle condition press the CONFERENCE button.  
Press the MENU button, then select ADD option.  
The Group Name Window appears. Enter up to a 20 character name using the  
dial pad keys. Use the navigation key to move the cursor left or right while  
entering characters.  
Press the DOWN button on the NAVIGATION DISC to move the cursor to the  
first entry “NUM01” and begin entering the phone number of the first mem-  
ber.  
Enter 9 plus the outside telephone number or enter an internal extension  
number. Repeat the process until all members are entered in the Conference  
Group. Use CANCEL to erase digits as needed.  
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not  
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONFERENCE button  
again to return to your previous conversation.  
To drop a party from your conference call:  
Press ENTER to SAVE this conference group.  
Press END to return phone to idle condition.  
Press CONFERENCE and dial the extension or line number that is to be  
dropped.  
Press CONFERENCE again to reestablish the conference.  
26  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Using Conference Groups  
2. From the LCD:  
Press the MENU button, scroll to the CALL FORWARD icon, press ENTER.  
Scroll to the desired Forward Option. Press ENTER button.  
You will be prompted to enter the Forward Destination. Enter it and press  
ENTER.  
From the idle condition press the CONFERENCE button.  
Select the Conference Group by pressing the corresponding soft key on the  
left.  
Press SEND to call all members of the group – OR – press the ENTER key to  
deselect one or more members, then press SEND. As each member answers,  
their status indicator on the left will change from an X to a circle.  
Once you press the SEND button to initiate the conference call you can hang  
up any member by selecting the member by pressing the MENU button and  
selecting “SENDING CANCEL. This action will drop the selected member.  
When the conference call is finished, place the handset in the cradle or press  
the SPEAKER key to hang up.  
NOTE:Once call forwarding has been initially set,for subsequent settings,you may  
scroll to the desired forward type and press ENTER to forward to that same desti-  
nation.You may also press the SELECT button associated with the desired forward  
type, as opposed to scrolling to it.  
3. From the Station Feature Button:  
Each of the forward types may be assigned its own feature button. Pressing  
the desired feature button will set forwarding to the last destination.  
Note: The originating station is the Supervisor of the conference. When this  
station hangs up, all the conference group members are disconnected. When  
you want to hang up but keep the other members in the conference, press the  
MENU button, the select SUPERVISOR, then cursor to another internal sta-  
tion, then press ENTER and hang up. Control of the conference is passed to  
this station. You are free to go about your business.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. The station that receives a Forward All call can transfer the call to the for-  
warded station. This is useful when you are expecting an important call but  
you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.  
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she  
does not have a FORWARD ALL button, the TRANSFER button will light to  
indicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been trans-  
ferred elsewhere.  
FORWARDING CALLS  
This option allows for one button Call Forward setting.You may forward your calls  
to another station, station group or external destination.  
Call forwarding may be set in several different manners:  
1. From the dial pad, dial 60 plus the extender (see below) that corresponds with  
the type of forwarding desired, followed by the station number to forward to.  
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS  
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call  
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea-  
tures. To review or change call forward options:  
60 + 0 Call Forward Cancel. Cancels all call forwarding from the station.  
60 + 1 Call Forward All Calls. Forwards all calls under any condition.  
60 + 2 Call Forward Busy. Forward calls to another station when you are on  
Press TRANSFER 102.  
the phone.  
Dial 0-6 to select the forward type (e.g., 1) OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination and press the right soft key to  
move the cursor  
60 + 3 Call Forward No Answer. Forward calls to another station when you  
don’t answer.  
60 + 4 Call Forward Busy/No Answer. Sets both Forward Busy and Forward  
No Answer.  
60 + 5 Call Forward DND. Forwards calls when you activate DND.  
Dial 1 to set OR press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO and press TRANSFER  
to store and exit.  
60 + 6 Call Forward Follow Me. Forward calls to the station where you cur-  
rently are.  
28  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
STATION CALL PICKUP  
DIALING FEATURES  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65 plus  
the extension number of the ringing phone. If you have a DP key assigned with a  
station number, you only need to press this DP key with the flashing light to answer  
this ringing station. NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must  
first lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
AllDIALING FEATURESinstructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode.  
This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many  
years. In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use  
Enblock Dialing. With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to  
the carrier after pressing the SEND key. Please check your telephone setup to con-  
firm what dialing mode is used.  
GROUP CALL PICKUP  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66  
plus the desired group number (01-20 on the OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ  
7100, 01-99 on the OfficeServ 500 M, and 01-99 on the OfficeServ 500 L and  
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 Series) or press the flashing GROUP  
PICKUP button if available.  
SPEED DIALING  
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide  
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.  
NOTES:  
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial  
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.  
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code.  
From the Main Fixed Feature screen with the handset on-hook, press the  
SPEED DIAL button or dial 16.  
Dial the desired speed dial number.  
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.  
MY GROUP PICKUP  
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same  
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the  
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access  
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
From the LCD:  
PRIVACY RELEASE  
Press the MENU button.  
Scroll to the PHONEBOOK option, press ENTER.  
Scroll to SEARCH, press ENTER.  
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri-  
vacy on the C.O. from your phone.  
Choose the method to be used to initiate a speed call, as described below.  
To Release Privacy: While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have  
other internal parties (or up to three) join the conversation.  
SEARCH—Search and initiate speed dial calls by: Speed Dial Number, Associated  
Names, Telephone Numbers, Assigned Groups or Previous Calls, registered to the  
phone.  
Press the PRB button (the PRB indicator will be steady). Inform the other  
party that he/she may now join the conversation.  
Scroll to, or dial the associated number of the desired function. (Search,  
Outgoing Call, Incoming Call, Missed Call, New Number, Edit Group, Delete All,  
My Own Number) and press ENTER.  
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to  
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the  
PRB button a second time, the PRB button LED will be off.  
Once in the menu, you may dial the selected number, change, delete or regis-  
ter the number. When the information is displayed, press ENTER to dial the  
number, press MENU to display further options.  
To Join a Non-Private Conversation: When someone has informed you that you  
can join a conversation:  
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated OR  
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.  
30  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
1. BY SPEED DIAL #: Searches all speed dial numbers assigned to the phone.  
Enter the speed dial number of the party you wish to call. When the number  
is displayed, press ENTER and the number will be automatically dialed for  
you.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 105.  
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).  
Dial a line or line group access code.  
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include  
#, ,, FLASH and PAUSE.  
Press TRANSFER to store the number.  
If you press ENTER without entering a speed dial number, all registered num-  
bers will be displayed.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
2. BY NAME: Searches for a telephone number by names associated with them.  
Enter the name in theBy Namebox and press ENTER.When the name is dis-  
played, press ENTER again and all of the numbers associated with that name  
are displayed. Using the direction button, highlight the desired number. Press  
ENTER and the system will automatically dial it for you.  
From the LCD:  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to PHONEBOOK option, press ENTER.  
Scroll to New Number and press ENTER. Or you may dial [5] and immediate-  
ly enter the option.  
If you press ENTER without entering a name, all registered names will be dis-  
played.  
3. BY PHONE NUMBER: Searches for an entry by the phone number registered.  
Enter the phone number of the party you wish to call. Press ENTER and the  
number will be displayed from the PHONEBOOK. When the number is dis-  
played, press ENTER and all information associated with that number is dis-  
played.  
Enter the name and all desired phone numbers for that particular speed dial  
entry and press ENTER.  
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING  
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed  
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.  
If you press ENTER without entering a number, all registered numbers will be  
displayed.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.  
Dial the speed dial number (0049 or 500999) that you want assigned to  
this button.  
Notes:  
—Entering (*123*) searches all numbers that include the 123 in them.  
—Entering 305* searches all numbers that begin with 305.  
—Entering *3000 searches all numbers that end with 3000.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
4. BY GROUP: Searches for an entries by group information registered. Scroll to  
group or enter associated number, press ENTER. The numbers registered to  
that group are displayed. Scroll to the desired number and press SEND. The  
number is automatically dialed for you.  
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
5. BY TIME: Searches for entries based on incoming calls that have registered  
numbers on the set. Scroll to the desired entry and press ENTER. The infor-  
mation associated with that call will be displayed. Scroll to the desired num-  
ber entry and press SEND to have the number dialed automatically for you.  
DIRECTORY DIALING  
Press the SCREEN button twice. Scroll to the first Fixed Feature screen.  
Press the DIRECTORY button.  
Press the soft button associated with the desired option.  
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED  
DIAL NUMBERS  
STN - Accesses Station name directory,  
SYSTEM - Accesses System speed dial name list.  
PERS - Accesses your personal speed dial name list.  
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial  
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system admin-  
istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.The phone itself main-  
tains 1000 station speed dial numbers.  
Enter the first digit of the desired party.  
Press the UP/DOWN buttons to scroll to the desired entry.  
Press the appropriate operation soft button:  
32  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIAL - Dials the displayed number.  
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY  
PREVIOUS - Moves you to the previous entry.  
EXIT - Exit programming and return to idle screen.  
NEXT - Moves you to the next entry.  
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system can  
automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-pro-  
grammed interval for up to 15 attempts.  
Press END to return to idle screen.  
When you hear a busy signal, press the AUTO-RETRY button.  
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for  
you.You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker.The micro-  
phone is muted.  
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK-  
ER to begin speaking.  
LAST NUMBER REDIAL  
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the REDIAL button or dial  
19.  
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, from the Main Fixed screen, press  
the LAST REDIAL button.  
NOTES:  
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.  
2. To cancel an auto-retry, lift and replace the handset.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER  
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the  
# with be sent as tones.  
MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL  
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial  
the same number dialed.  
MEMO REDIALING  
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are  
Press the REDIAL button.  
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.  
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.  
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.  
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.  
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the key pad.  
Press SAVE to store the number.  
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL  
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SAVE/REPEAT button  
To dial the number, press the SAVE/REPEAT button. It will select the same line and  
dial the stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press  
the SAVE/REPEAT button.  
before hanging up.  
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SAVE/REPEAT button or dial 17.  
The same line will be selected for you.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another  
number.  
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
34  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Press WAIT or TRANSFER.  
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.  
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE  
CALL PARK AND PAGE  
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:  
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can  
park the call prior to paging. The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ  
7000 Series systems offer two different methods:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
MANUAL PARK ORBITS  
While in conversation, press the PARK button.  
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another  
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any  
available orbit number and see the number in the display.  
Remember the selected orbit number.  
Replace the handset when finished.  
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described  
(example:“John Smith park two”).  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE  
and dial a zone number.  
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE  
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8OR—dial 9 to page all external  
zones.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:  
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
NOTES:  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE  
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls  
in park orbits.  
and dial a zone number.  
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it  
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park  
and page intercom calls.  
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
ALL PAGE  
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same  
time:  
Lift the handset.  
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial , or press the ALL PAGE button.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
While in conversation, press the PAGE button.The call is automatically parked  
at your station.  
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.  
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.  
Hang up.  
NOTE: The indicator on the PAGE button will be lit steady when an All Page is in  
progress.  
To retrieve an automatically parked call:  
MEET ME PAGE  
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,  
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK button,  
press it and dial the announced orbit number.  
Lift the handset.  
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.  
Dial the desired zone number.  
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.  
36  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must  
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.  
NOTES:  
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall  
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page  
intercom calls.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES  
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a  
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message  
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.  
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION  
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user  
guide.  
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy  
signal, you can leave a message indication:  
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
Press the MESSAGE button—OR—dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.  
Hang up.  
The message button on the Main Programmable Button screen and the TSI  
will flash at the called station.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can  
NOTES:  
have a different message code:  
1. A station can have up to five message indications.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the  
PGM MSG button indicator will be lit steady. Press the button again to turn off  
the programmed message and the indicator will go blank.  
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous  
one off and set a different programmed message.  
CANCELING MESSAGES  
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the  
extension number of the station at which you left a message.  
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension.  
Your MESSAGE button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will go out.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
RETURNING MESSAGES  
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43.The first station that left a message will  
be called automatically.If that station does not answer, your MESSAGE button  
indicator will continue to flash and the TSI will stay on.  
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.  
Your MESSAGE button indicator will stop flashing and the TSI will turn off  
when all messages have been returned.  
NOTES:  
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any  
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.  
38  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to  
a computer modem on your PC.  
DO NOT DISTURB  
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati-  
cally moved to your keyset.  
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.  
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.  
While on-hook, press the DND button or dial 401. The DND button indicator  
will be lit steady to remind you of this mode.  
To cancel DND, press the DND button again or dial 400.The DND button indi-  
cator goes blank.You can make calls while in the DND mode.  
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for  
the single line station.  
APPOINTMENT REMINDER / ALARM  
REMINDER  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,  
your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status.  
ALARM CLOCK  
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment  
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set  
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.  
ONE TIME DND  
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you  
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you  
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your key-  
set will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.  
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the  
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times  
at five minute intervals.  
Set alarm for desired duration (Everyday, Once). These alarms can be used to  
remind you of an appointment later in the day (Once) or as a daily reminder  
(Everyday). There are two possible alarms. Each can be either a today (Once) or a  
daily (Everyday) alarm.  
MUTE  
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa-  
tion:  
Press the MUTE button. The MUTE button indicator will be lit steady.  
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The MUTE button indica-  
tor goes blank.  
To set alarms:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM  
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Press TRANSFER to save.  
BACKGROUND MUSIC  
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in  
your keyset:  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.  
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.  
To cancel individual alarms:  
You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis-  
tening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Press the HOLD key.  
40  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
From the LCD:  
Write your message using the dial pad buttons. Each press of a key selects a  
character. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For  
example, if your message isTAKE MEDICATION, press 8 once to get the letter  
“T. Press 2 once to getA.Press 5 twice to getK.Continue selecting charac-  
ters from the following table to complete the message.  
Enter ALARM ALERT period.  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to E-DIARY option, press ENTER.  
Scroll to ALARM option and press ENTEROR—you may dial 2 and immedi-  
ately enter the option.  
Choose the desired ALARM NUMBER (1/2).  
Enter TIME via the dial pad in 24-hour format.  
Set RING TONE via the direction button (left/right). Each tone is heard.  
Set REPEAT DURATION via the direction button.  
Press ENTER when finished.  
Set RING TONE.  
When all information is set, press ENTER.  
COUNT  
DIAL 0  
DIAL 1  
DIAL 2  
DIAL 3  
DIAL 4  
DIAL 5  
DIAL 6  
DIAL 7  
DIAL 8  
DIAL 9  
DIAL ,  
NOTES:  
1
2
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
,
<
>
?
To clear alarm:  
space  
,
!
Scroll to CLEAR option in Alarm Clock setting screen and press ENTER.  
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
S
Q
Z
]
DAILY PLANNER  
Scheduling feature with message. Allows the scheduling of up to 30 alarm  
reminders. Each of these reminders can have an associated message of up to 32  
characters. These reminders can be scheduled to ring one hour before, one half  
hour before or right at the exact time set.  
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
L
O
R
V
Y
[
Press TRANSFER and then dial 116.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off.Enter the time as HHMM (hours and  
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
M
P
T
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a char-  
acter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For exam-  
ple, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.”  
Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters  
from the following table to complete your message.  
W
:
Press the TRANSFER key to store the alarm and reminder message.  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-  
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.  
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.  
From the LCD:  
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE  
Press MENU button.  
Select E-DIARY.  
Select DAILY PLANNER.  
Press direction button UP/DOWN to set the month. Press direction button  
LEFT/RIGHT to set the date. Press ENTER on the desired date.  
Press MENU then ADD.  
Enter the TIME desired for the alarm (in 24 hour format).  
Enter the message in the CONTENTS field.  
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:  
You will receive three short rings repeated.  
Lift the handset.You are connected to the door phone.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
42  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
message and press ENTER (while maintaining contact with t he caller). This  
method does not give you the option to transfer the call to another station.  
Take necessary action (take message, etc.)  
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/  
ROOM MONITOR  
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in  
another room.  
To set up the Executive/Secretary messages (10 each):  
Press BOSS/SECR button and establish a connection.  
Press the EXE/SECR MSG button. The first message screen is displayed.  
Pressing the DOWN arrow in the upper left corner of the LCD will scroll you to  
the second screen. Pressing the UP arrow in the upper right corner of the LCD  
will return you to the first screen.  
Dial the extension number of the door phone.  
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con-  
versation.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
This method gives you the option to transfer the call to another station if so  
desired.  
Scroll to the desired message.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press the SPEAKER button.  
Press MENU button for options (Send, Edit, and Remove)  
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE  
SEND - Sends the message to the other end.  
EDIT - Enter message from the dial pad.  
REMOVE - Deletes message.Use remove option to delete theBlank Message”  
default message.  
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.  
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secre-  
tary station.  
When an Executive/Secretary hotline is programmed to this keyset, the keyset  
offers an additional screen option.This screen has options for setting the status of  
the keyset user. This status update is viewable to EasySet users only.  
From the BOSS station in DND:  
Receive three short, double ring bursts, followed by the text message from the  
Secretary.  
Press ENTER to invoke REPLY option—OR—scroll to OK option and press  
ENTER.  
Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta-  
tion.  
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will have  
a flashing indication when the other station is in use.  
If REPLY option is activated, the Select Message screen is displayed.  
Scroll to the desired message and press ENTER. The message is sent to the  
Secretary keyset display and the Secretary station has the option to reply, if so  
desired.  
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:  
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button.  
Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete  
the transfer—OR—hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the  
BOSS button.  
Sending a text message from the BOSS keyset to the Secretary keyset, from  
the idle condition:  
Press the EXE/SECR MSG button.  
Press the NEXT button (if there are more than two Secretary stations assigned  
to that BOSS station, all Secretary keysets will be displayed), in the case of mul-  
tiple Secretary stations, scroll to the desired Secretary, press the soft key asso-  
ciated with that Secretary and press NEXT button.  
To send a text message to the Boss display:  
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the EXE/SECR MSG soft button.  
Scroll to the desired message and press ENTER (the BOSS station gets three  
short ring bursts, followed by the message).  
This method gives you the option to transfer the call to another station if so  
desired.  
Press the TRANSFER button again to be reconnected to the caller.  
Take the necessary action (the BOSS cancels DND and transfer the call or take  
a message)—OR—press the EXE/SECR MSG soft button, scroll to the desired  
Scroll to the desired message and press the associated soft key or ENTER.  
The message is sent.  
Executive Divert:  
From the BOSS keyset when the keyset rings, press the EXEC DIVERT button.  
The call is forwarded to the Secretary station.  
44  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Pressing the EXEC DIVERT button, when the keyset is in idle status, will divert  
all calls after, to the Secretary station. Pressing the EXEC DIVERT button again,  
will cancel the divert function.  
Press CANCEL to return to Main Config Menu—OR—press END to return to  
idle screen.  
MANUAL SIGNALLING  
GROUP LISTENING  
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta-  
tion, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or  
ringing).  
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want  
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:  
Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker.The microphone is not in use,  
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.  
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.  
Repeat if necessary.  
To send a signal to another station:  
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.  
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the des-  
ignated station.  
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be  
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up.This will elim-  
inate a momentary squeal.  
NOTE: Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station  
number extender assigned to it.  
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE  
ACCOUNT CODES  
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling sta-  
tion must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA  
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.  
When equipped with optional equipment, your system will allow calls to be  
charged to a specific account.  
During any outside C.O. call, press the account (ACC) button.  
Enter the 3 digit account code bin number when prompted, OR  
If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code (maximum 12  
characters including , and #) and press ACC000 again, OR  
If your button has an extender other than 000 (001~999) account code con-  
tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your.  
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announce-  
ment in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF  
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the  
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be  
heard through the speaker.  
To make an off-hook voice announcement:  
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET  
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.  
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.  
After the attention tone, begin speaking.  
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away.You  
can unlock it when you return.  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to MY PHONE option. Press ENTER.  
Scroll to LOCKED option and press ENTEROR—you may press 4 and imme-  
diately access option.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset. This will place the original  
party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.  
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original  
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.  
Enter the PASSWORD. Press ENTER. (Default Password is “1234”).  
Use Direction button to scroll LEFT/RIGHT to choose desired mode.  
NOTES:  
1. UNLOCKED - No restrictions. User may complete internal and outside calls.  
2. LOCKED OUT - Restricted to incoming calls only. No outside calls can be  
made.  
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to  
avoid an echo effect.  
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.  
3. LOCKED ALL - No calls, incoming or outgoing allowed to or from the set.  
Press ENTER.  
46  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OHVA BLOCK  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) button. Pressing  
this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the  
button again and cancel the blocking.  
AME PASSWORD  
This feature allows people using the AME feature to enable password protection.  
This will prevent unauthorized people from listening to your messages being left.  
The passcode is the same as your station passcode. This feature only applies if  
there is a SVMi card installed in the system and your keyset has a programmed  
AME button.  
OHVA REJECT  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) button. Pressing  
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing  
party and return you to your original call.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP  
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from  
the group and then put it back in.While you are out of the group, you can receive  
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an  
IN/OUT button with the group number assigned.  
From the LCD:  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.  
Press the IN/OUT button. The button indicator will be lit steady when your  
keyset is in the group.  
Press the IN/OUT button again to exit the group and the indicator will go  
blank. Repeat as necessary.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and  
immediately enter the option.  
Scroll to AME password and press ENTER to change status.  
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return  
to the idle screen.  
If you do not have an IN/OUT button:  
Dial the IN/OUT access code number ________________, then the group  
number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when  
a busy station is called.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press SPEAKER button.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
The IN/OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that  
this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can de-  
cide for which groups you will receive calls.  
From the LCD:  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and  
immediately enter the option.  
Scroll to AUTO CAMP-ON and press ENTER to change status.  
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return  
to the idle screen.  
48  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)  
SELECT RING TONE  
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls  
Each ITP-5112L user can select from a variety of ring tones.  
under Intercom Calls for descriptions).  
From the LCD:  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 103.  
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SOUND/SCREEN option and press ENTER.  
Scroll to RING TONE SELECT and press ENTEROR—you may dial 1 and  
immediately enter the option.  
From the LCD:  
Select from one of the three categories:  
1. Standard Ring Tones  
2. Melody or  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.  
Scroll to ANSWERING MODE and press ENTEROR—you may dial 1 and  
immediately enter the option.  
Select desired station ring type setting. (Ring, Auto Answer, or Voice  
Announce).  
Press ENTER to select and SAVE.  
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return  
to idle screen.  
3. My Ring Tones  
Press ENTER to select. Use LEFT/RIGHT arrow buttons to scroll through the  
available ring tones and press ENTER to SAVE.  
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return  
to idle screen.  
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE  
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station pass-  
code whenever you desire.  
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward  
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the  
SEND button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 101.  
Dial your old passcode.  
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters).You can use 09.  
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four  
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.  
Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode.  
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)  
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.  
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
From the LCD:  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to MY PHONE option and press ENTER.  
Scroll to CHANGE PASSWORD and press ENTER—OR—you may dial 3 and  
immediately enter the option.  
Enter CURRENT PASSWORD, press ENTER.  
Enter NEW PASSWORD and press ENTER.  
Enter NEW PASSWORD again, for confirmation and press ENTER.  
Press CANCEL to return to the Main Option Page—OR—press END to return  
to idle screen.  
AUTOMATIC HOLD  
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing CALL  
button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call.  
This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
50  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
From the LCD:  
From the LCD:  
Press MENU button  
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and  
immediately enter the option.  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and  
immediately enter the option.  
Scroll to AUTO HOLD, press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to the Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
Scroll to HOT KEYPAD, press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
NOTE: Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER.  
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE  
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the  
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.  
HEADSET OPERATION  
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using  
headset mode, press the SEND and END buttons to answer and release calls.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Additional ring tones can be selected from the SOUND/SCREEN, “Keytone  
Select” option.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
From the LCD:  
REJOINING A PAGE  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option and press ENTER.  
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page  
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and  
immediately enter the option.  
Scroll to HEADSET USE and press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
From the LCD:  
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button. If it is so equipped  
pressing this button while the button indicator is blank will cause the keyset to  
enter headset mode and the button indicator to be lit solid to indicate this.  
Pressing the button while the button indicator is lit solid will cause the keyset to  
return to handset mode and the button indicator will go blank.  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP and press ENTER.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and  
immediately enter the option.  
Scroll to PAGE REJOIN, press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to the Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
HOT KEYPAD  
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be madeliveorhotso that it is  
not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin  
dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line  
number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.  
RING PREFERENCE  
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press  
the SEND button.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at  
your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button  
to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
52  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and imme-  
diately enter the option.  
Scroll to DISP SPDNAME, press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
From the LCD:  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.  
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and imme-  
diately enter the option.  
Scroll to RING PREF, press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls  
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in,first out basis.  
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that  
you did not answer.When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the  
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS  
This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer.When  
a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound  
two beeps, the same as when a screened transfer is completed, and you will be  
connected to the CO call. In order for this option to work the station must also be  
programmed for auto answer (see Set Answer Mode).  
From the LCD:  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and imme-  
diately enter the option.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and imme-  
diately enter the option.  
Scroll to CID REVIEW ALL, press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
Scroll to AUTO ANS CO CALL, press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
SECURE OHVA  
This option allows you to receive OHVA (Over Head Voice Announce) calls via the  
speaker while you are on the handset.  
NOTE: Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to  
work. Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer the  
call.  
With your handset on hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 131 to turn SECURE OHVA ON or 130 to turn it OFF.  
Press TRANSFER to savve your selection.  
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME  
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as  
it is dialed.  
From the LCD:  
Press the MENU button from the idle screen.  
Select SETUP.  
Select STATION ON/OFF.  
Scroll to SECURE OHVA and press ENTER to change status.  
Press CANCEL to return to option Main Screen.  
Press the END to return to idle screen.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
From the LCD:  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.  
54  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIAL BY NAME  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A sta-  
tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a  
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial  
any station or speed dial number in seconds.  
DIRECTORY INFORMATION  
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.  
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an-  
swering.  
Press MENU button  
Scroll to PHONEBOOK option, press ENTER.  
Scroll to SEARCH and press ENTEROR—you may dial 1 and immediately  
enter the option.  
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be  
easily identified and answered with different greetings.  
Scroll to BY NAME, press ENTER.  
Enter NAME to search for and press ENTER.  
Name is displayed, press ENTER, number is displayed.  
Press SEND button to automatically call by number.  
Press MENU button for more options.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]  
where xxx is the station group number.This allows you to answer calls directed to  
you differently than calls directed to your group.  
CALL LOG  
The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele-  
phone. You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a  
review list.  
You can also use the Dial by Name feature by following these steps:  
Press the DIR button (DIRECTORY).  
Select the directory you wish to use:PERS (personal speed dial numbers),SYS  
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).  
Dial the button on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name  
you wish to search for.  
Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are assigned in  
blocks of 10 each.  
Press the LOG key.  
Press either the IN or OUT key.  
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.  
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.  
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of  
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll  
through your list of calls.  
Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list.  
Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name, Number, or Date associated  
with this call.  
NOTE: A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above  
lists (PERS, SYS, or STN).  
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS  
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is  
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER  
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall  
from 204], [Call for 501], [message frm 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you in-  
formed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are  
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.  
Press the DIAL key to call this number.  
These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.  
You can also review your Call Log by following the steps below:  
From the idle screen, you can press the MENU button.  
Select PHONEBOOK.  
Select Outgoing, Incoming or Missed Call Logs.  
56  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED  
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS  
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the dis-  
play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is  
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed  
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.  
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:  
With the handset on-hook, press the MESSAGE button with the flashing indi-  
cator.  
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.  
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes-  
sage indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next mes-  
sage.  
CALL DURATION TIMER  
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you  
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately  
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call dura-  
tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 min-  
utes, the timer restarts.  
Press the END button to return your keyset to the idle condition.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES  
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.  
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.  
You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to  
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time  
is restarted.  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 106.  
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.  
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder.  
Press the TRANSFER key to store the speed dial name.  
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.  
AUTO TIMER  
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer  
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.  
See Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers Section.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
STATION NAMES  
See Application Program Menus—My Phone.  
From the LCD:  
Press MENU button.  
Scroll to SETUP option, press ENTER.  
Scroll to STATION ON/OFF and press ENTEROR—you may dial 6 and  
immediately enter the option.  
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS  
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program-  
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.  
Scroll to AUTO TIMER, press ENTER.  
Press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to Main Configuration Menu—  
OR—press END to return to idle screen.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons  
OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender.  
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.  
Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming.  
TIMER FUNCTION  
Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal-  
lation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders  
for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.  
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.  
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.  
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.  
Read the elapsed time in the display.  
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.  
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.  
58  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
STATION 205: JOHN  
Home Page  
STATION 201: LINDA  
received a call on line 702  
LCR WITH CLEAR  
is talking on line 701  
When you are making outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can  
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to  
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.  
Talking on line 702  
702:  
01:15  
701:  
05:25  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
BACKSPACE WITH LCR  
Press TRANSFER  
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by press-  
ing the BACKSPACE soft key as many times as necessary.  
Transfer:  
RETURN  
TEXT MESSAGING  
Dial 205  
See also MESSAGE option in the Application Program Menus section.  
205:busy  
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro-  
grammed messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or Station  
Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk and lis-  
ten to your outside party. The other station can view this message and take the  
appropriate action or respond back with another text message.  
OHVA  
CAMP ON  
OHVA to 205  
OHVA from 201  
TMSG  
REJECT  
There are 1000 messages assignable to stations in blocks of 10, stored in system  
memory that can be sent to another display keyset. Only the display keysets that  
are allowed in system programming (MMC 611) will receive the TEXT MESSAGE  
soft key in the display and use this feature.  
Wait for reply  
GIVE THE CALL  
TMSG:01  
SEND  
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will  
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the  
UP/DOWN button to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.  
Dial 03 or press twice  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
TMSG:03  
SEND  
The basics steps in text messaging are:  
1. Press TEXT MESSAGE soft key to begin text messaging.  
2. Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.  
3. Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.  
4. Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)  
5. When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their  
previous call progress condition.  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
Wait for reply  
TMSG  
EXIT  
702:  
01:45  
701:  
05:55  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps  
2.  
The example on the following page will better demonstrate how to use Text  
Messaging. In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announce-  
ment to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text  
message.  
60  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER  
CALLER ID  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save  
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list.To store a  
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:  
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY  
You can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the  
display.Regardless of which one is selected, you can press the NND button to view  
the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID informa-  
tion you wish to view first.  
Press the STORE button. The system displays the speed dial bin in which the  
number was stored—OR—press the CID button and then press the SCROLL  
button.  
Press the STORE soft key.  
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 119.  
Dial 0 for CID options, 1 for ANI options, or 2 for CLI options.  
Dial 0 if you do not wish to view CID information, 1 to view the NUMBER first  
or 2 to view the NAME first.  
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to  
STORE CID numbers.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO  
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL  
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,  
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This may influ-  
ence how you choose to handle the call.  
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you  
can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with  
the call in queue at you keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in  
the display depending on you Name/Number selection.  
From an idle keyset:  
Press the INQUIRE button—OR—press the CID button and then the  
INQUIRE soft key.  
Dial the trunk number.  
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may  
use NND to view more information about this call—OR—you can return to  
the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,  
press the NEXT button.  
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press  
the SAVE button to save the CID number. The system must be using LCR to dial  
the saved number.  
If you are on a call:  
Press the INQUIRE button.Your existing call will go on hold—OR—press the  
CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold.  
Dial the trunk number.  
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button—OR—you may  
use NND to view more information about this call—OR—you can return to  
the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID NUMBER  
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR button or dial 17.  
NOTES:  
1. Your telephone system must be LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin.  
NOTES:  
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you  
must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.  
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer avail-  
able] display.  
62  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS  
APPLICATION PROGRAM MENUS  
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This  
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in,first-out basis.The list includes calls that you  
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer. When  
reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back. The system  
must be using LCR to dial the stored number.To access the CID information stored  
in your REVIEW list:  
Much of the call processing of the ITP 5112L can be accomplished by using the  
various feature/function screens on the LCD. Below are instructions for additional  
call processing and special applications that can be accomplished via the LCD  
programming. These screens, features and functions can be accessed by pressing  
the MENU button. Follow the below user information to utilize these features and  
functions.  
Press the REVIEW button—OR—press the CID button and then press the  
REVIEW soft key.  
After pressing the MENU button,  
use the direction button to high-  
light desired menu icon. For multi-  
ple screen options, the UP/DOWN  
arrows at the top left and right  
sides of the LCD may be used to  
scroll on a per page basis. Press  
ENTER to access that menu.To nav-  
igate within the menu, you may  
scroll to the desired option/func-  
tion, dial the associated option  
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.  
You can now CLEAR this entry—OR—use NND to view more information  
about this call, OR  
Press DIAL to call this person back—OR—press SCROLL and then press  
STORE to save this number in a personal speed dial bin.  
NOTES:  
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administra-  
tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.  
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num-  
bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.  
function number or press the asso-  
ciated select button on either side of  
the display.  
Application Program Main Menu Screen  
Press END button to exit programming.  
PHONEBOOK  
This menu allows you to maintain a contact list of addresses, phone numbers,  
names, speed numbers and call logs. Refer to Speed Dialing and Programming  
Section.  
E-DIARY  
1. WAKE UP CALL: Set Wake Up call for desired duration (Everyday, Monday-  
Saturday, Monday-Friday). Using the direction button scroll UP/DOWN to the  
desired option and LEFT/RIGHT to scroll to desired option setting.  
Enter TIME via dial pad in 24-hour format.  
Set RING TONE via direction button (LEFT/RIGHT) Each tone is heard.  
Set REPEAT DURATION via direction button.  
Press ENTER when finished.  
2. ALARM: See Alarm Reminder Programming Section.  
64  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
3. DAILY PLANNER: See Alarm Reminder Programming Section.  
b. RETRIEVE MESSAGE: Select this option to RETRIEVE a saved message  
fro the Message Box. When selected a list of saved messages will be  
shown. You can select one of these messages and open it or you can  
press the MENU buttons for deleting, editing or sending.  
4. MEMO PAD: Self memo feature. Allows you to set text message notes. Up to  
5 memos may be stored.  
Add NEW MEMO: Type in memo on keypad. Press MENU button to  
change fonts or add characters. To save press ENTER.  
When you select an existing MEMO, press MENU to edit it or delete it.  
2. RECEIVE BOX: When this item is selected, all incoming text messages will be  
shown. If you select a received message, then press MENU, you can REPLY,  
RESEND or DELETE the message.  
5. CALCULATOR  
3. SENT BOX: This shows a list of sent messages. You can press MENU and  
RESEND and DELETE messages.  
Enter FIRST NUMBER, press NAVIGATION KEY associated with the prop-  
er operation.  
Enter SECOND NUMBER and press ENTER to display answer.  
4. MESSAGE BOX: This item allows you to save up to 10 messages on your  
phone. You can send any of these messages at any time. Select “1) Edit  
Message” to CREATE a new message. Select “2) Message List” to VIEW and  
EDITall saved messages. Press MENU to ADD, EDIT ot DELETE messages.  
6. WORLD TIME: Displays times throughout the world.  
Use direction button, LEFT/RIGHT to view desired time zone.  
Press MENU to set your current time zone.  
SOUND/SCREEN  
This option allows the user to set ring tones, volume, and screen settings. Use the  
7. D-DAY PLUS: Scheduling feature that allows the user to view the time left  
until an event, or time since event occurred. Use to monitor deadlines, sched-  
ules, etc.  
directional ARROW KEYS to browse and ENTER to save.  
1. Ring Tone Select: Select from 3 categories of ring tones from your phone.  
2. Keytone Select: Selects the tone heard when pressing any button on your  
phone.  
8. UNIT CONVERT: Weights and Measures conversion application. Allows you  
to convert units of weights and measures into other units.  
3. Volume: Sets various volume levels on your phone.  
4. Select Background: Select the background for your idle screen.  
5. Menu Style: Select from 2 menu formats.  
Choose desired function (LENGTH, WEIGHT, AREA, VOLUME,  
TEMPERATURE), press ENTER.  
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select base unit.  
6. Background Style: Select from 2 color schemes for your phone menus.  
7. Select Brightness: Select screen brightness level.  
8. Screen Saver: Determines what time/interval the screen saver or power save  
wil kick in.  
Scroll DOWN and ENTER VALUE to be converted.  
Scroll DOWN, select CONVERSION UNIT.  
Press ENTER to display answer.  
MESSAGE  
CALL FORWARD  
This menu allows the user to send and receive text messages to/from other ITP-  
5112L phones and Softphones. The user can also store up to 10 messages on the  
phone.  
See Transferring Calls Section, Forwarding Calls.  
SETUP  
1. SEND MESSAGE  
1. ANSWERING MODE: See Customizing Your Keyset Section, Station Answering  
Mode Programming.  
a. SEND MESSAGE: Select this option to enter and send a new text mes-  
sage. In theRecv#field enter the EXTENSION of the RECIPIENT phone.  
In the MSG box enter your MESSAGE and press ENTER to send.  
2. ABSENT MESSAGE: See Paging and Messaging Section.  
3. INTERNAL CALL: Select incoming information display from internal caller.  
(Number or Name)  
66  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
4. AOM PAGE SETUP  
7. OUT CODE SETUP  
5. DIAL MODE: Select dial type options.(enblock-requires SEND button to com-  
8. NETWORK INFO: Provides all IP network related information.  
plete the call, or overlap - direct out dial)  
Scroll to or dial 9, press ENTER.  
Scroll LEFT/RIGHT to select desired display option.  
Press ENTER, display confirms save.  
MY PHONE  
Used to personalize your keyset.  
1. MY NAME: Enters the user’s name on the phone.The name registered here is  
displayed on the LCD screen od the opponent’s phone when making an inter-  
nal call.  
6. STATION ON/OFF: Turn various features/functions on/off in the keyset.  
These features are:  
2. LANGUAGE: Sets a language between Korean and English  
AUTO HOLD: When on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or  
flashing CALL button will automatically put your call on hold and connect  
you to the next call.  
3. CHANGE PASSWORD: Changes the four-digit password that can lock the  
phone from use.  
AUTO TIMER: Timer in LCD that monitors call duration.  
HEADSET USE: Switches between headset and handset use.  
HOT KEYPAD: Allows for dialing without lifting handset first.  
4. LOCKED: Sets the lock status of the phone. This will restrict access to the  
phone.  
UNLOCKED: Full Access.  
LOCKED OUT: Restricts outgoing calls.  
LOCK ALL: Restricts complete access to phone.  
PAGE REJOIN: Allows remaining portion of internal page to be played  
through keyset speaker, after handset is replaced.  
RING PREF: Allows for automatically answering of calls when handset is lift-  
ed. (Does not require button press)  
5. PRIVATE LIFE PROTECTION: Retricts access to the MENU button using a  
AME PASSWORD: Allows password protection of AME feature on set. This  
password.  
prevents unauthorized listening to messages being left.  
6. PHONE VERSION: Displays the software version of the telephone.  
AUTO CAMPON: Allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on to,  
when a busy station is called.  
7. RESET TO DEFAULT: Removes the data (phone number, messages) set by the  
user and defaults the phone.  
DIS SPDNAME: Allows the speed dial associated name to be displayed while  
number is being dialed.  
SECURE OHVA: Allows OHVA calls to be received by station in conversation  
on handset.  
CALL COST DISP: Display in LCD that monitors call cost, for duration of call.  
CID REVIEW ALL: Allows user to review Caller ID information for calls sent to  
the station.The list is programming dependent and operates on a first in first  
out basis. Calls to displayed numbers can be returned with a single button  
press, provided LCR is being used.  
STOP CID DISPLAY: Discontinues CID information after call is answered.  
AUTO ANS CO CALL: Allows CO calls to be auto answered on incoming calls.  
Scroll to or dial 0, press ENTER.  
Scroll to desired feature, press ENTER to change option status.  
Press CANCEL to enter change and return to main Configuration menu.  
68  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX  
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]  
Samsung Voicemail  
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a  
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari-  
ous features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this  
section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as  
Subscriber Services.  
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]  
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring  
voicemail [VMMSG].  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
0000).  
Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voicemail box has the  
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending  
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes-  
sages.  
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the  
office environment]  
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main  
greeting will answer.  
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number  
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
0000).  
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you con-  
trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your  
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are  
referred to as “Call Conditions. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most com-  
monly used Call Conditions.  
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station  
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a  
different station)  
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones  
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be  
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.  
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be  
prompted to enter a password.  
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.  
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice.You will be prompted to  
enter you password.  
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all  
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature  
availability.  
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will  
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then  
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.  
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Access Manager - See Access Manager.  
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.  
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.  
Personal Services - See Personal Services.  
Return to Main Menu.  
70  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Subscriber Services Menu  
Group New  
Messages  
Group Saved  
Messages  
Listen to New Review Saved  
Record & Send  
Messages  
Access  
Manager  
Personal  
Greetings  
Mailbox  
Administration  
Personal  
Services  
Pause, Resume  
Play Menu  
Options  
Exit  
Messages  
Messages  
11  
33  
1
3
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
Assign and/or Edit  
Change  
Review  
Group Messages Menu  
Listen Menu  
Record Menu  
Follow Me  
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
1
Primary Greeting  
Message Alert  
Workload  
Group  
Urgent Messages  
Play  
For a Directory  
Assign and/or Edit  
Busy Greeting  
Change  
Pager Notification  
Edit Stored  
Telephone Numbers  
Block All Calls  
Call forwarding  
Call Screening  
Find Me  
1
1
11  
2
#
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
5
7
8
Message  
of Subscribers  
Play Previous  
Message  
To Create a  
Reminder  
Group  
Callback Requests  
Assign and/or Edit  
Blocking Greeting  
Review Deleted  
Messages  
Change  
Change  
Password  
##  
2
3
4
5
8
9
#
0
1
2
Weekly Schedule  
Save  
Group  
Reminders  
Assign and/or Edit  
Night Greeting  
Review Undelivered  
Messages  
Place a  
Record  
Name  
"Enter the Recipient's Number"  
Message  
Direct Call  
Discard  
Message  
Review  
Recording  
3
Group  
Private Messages  
1
Assign and/or Edit  
Screened Greeting  
Auto Play  
New Messages  
S
L
Name  
Enter Directory  
3
3
Reply to Sender  
4
Stop, Append to  
Recording  
2
Group  
Fax Only Messages  
Edit Only  
Personal Greetings  
Auto Play Message  
Information  
Extended  
Prompting  
Personal  
4
8
0
Administration  
Place  
5
Discard Recording  
and Rerecord  
Call to Sender  
3
Auto Set  
Night Intercept  
Edit Only  
Mailbox Greeting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Deliver Copy  
of Fax Message  
55  
6
Set  
4
Delivery Options  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
R
e
c
o
r
d
d
S
e
nd  
Play  
Forward a  
Copy of Message  
Broadcast Message  
Menu Options  
Specify  
Future Delivery  
5
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Play  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Record  
Cancel, Return  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
#
0
7
Access Coverage  
a Reminder  
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
be  
r
S
ervices  
SEND Message,  
Then Copy  
*
6
Change  
Playback Volume  
Group  
A Specific Sender  
Play  
Menu Options  
Cancel, Return  
to Executary  
Cancel, Return  
Play  
77  
8
t
o S cr r Services  
u
b
s
i
b
e
Menu Options  
to Subscriber Services  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
*
*
7
Pause, Resume  
Message Playback  
Play  
Cancel, Return  
Cancel, Return  
sc
Sub riber Services  
Message Inventory  
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
ri  
b
e
r Services  
o
Change  
Playback Volume  
*
*
77  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
9
Play  
Menu Options  
Pause, Resume  
Record/Playback  
8
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
#
Cancel, Return  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
to Subscriber Services  
9
Skip to  
Next Message  
*
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
Scan Messages  
##  
0
SEND Message,  
Then Exit Record  
Play  
#
0
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play Message  
Information  
00  
C
a
n
ce  
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
Ca  
n
c
e
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
t
o
S
u
b
s
crib  
e
r Services  
t
sc
Sub riber Services  
*
*
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available  
please speak to your system administrator.  
72  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PLAY MENU OPTIONS  
0
,
#
GETTING STARTED  
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following  
a few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a  
tutorial.You should start with the following steps:  
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.  
1 or 3  
From the Subscriber Services Menu:  
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES  
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].  
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].  
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].  
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].  
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.  
Play the previous message.  
11  
2
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].  
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
3
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
Reply to the message.  
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and  
ready to use.  
4
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the  
sender has a mailbox on this system).  
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES  
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.  
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the  
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your pass-  
word.You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new  
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.  
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is need-  
ed to use this feature on an outside call.  
55  
Deliver a fax copy.  
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail docu-  
ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out  
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically  
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.  
Note:After you enter your password, ifAutoplay of New Messagesis enabled and  
you have new messages the SVMi E-Series will begin to play them automatically.  
A subscriber can control this feature. From the Subscriber Services Menu [6] [5]  
toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.  
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.  
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU  
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),  
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it  
as a memo to yourself (##).  
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.  
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES  
GROUP NEW MESSAGES  
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES  
GROUP OLD MESSAGES  
ACCESS MANAGER  
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a mes-  
sage to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be  
left for each recipient.  
11  
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.  
3
77  
Change playback volume of the recording.  
33  
4
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will tog-  
gle between the two levels.  
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
8
9
Pause or resume during message playback.  
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.  
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
PAUSE / RESUME  
8
74  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
99  
0
Change playback speed of the recording.  
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear  
the Send Menu with the following functions:  
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle  
between the two speeds.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
Review  
Continue Recording  
Discard and Re-Record  
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)  
Schedule Future Delivery  
Play options.  
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this  
point.  
00  
#
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just  
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.  
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else  
Save and Send the Recording  
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current mes-  
sage - it is retained as new.  
Setting Message Attributes  
##  
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is  
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific mes-  
sage quickly. To stop scanning press [1].  
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the  
following delivery options:  
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery  
Return Receipt Requested  
Request a Call Back  
Private Delivery  
Reply Required  
Exit  
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.  
11 or 33  
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES  
Scheduling Future Delivery  
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a spe-  
cific sender, press [9].  
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be  
able to set message attributes and set this message as:  
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:  
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery  
Next Few Hours  
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
A Coming Day of the Week  
Specific Day / Time  
Exit  
a) Number of messages  
b) Number of reminders  
c) Number of urgent messages  
d) Number of messages needing a callback  
e) Number of private messages  
f) Number of fax messages  
2
4
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
ACCESS MANAGER  
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:  
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,  
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials  
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their cur-  
rent status when you access them.  
a) Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use  
the system directory.  
76  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System  
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:  
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are  
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet-  
ing during the night (when you are not available).  
1
Follow Me  
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It  
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new  
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an  
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or  
changing the number where you can be reached.  
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.  
8
,
0
#
Pause / Resume  
Exit from Access Manager  
Play All Options  
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.  
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at  
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.  
Play Access Coverage  
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.  
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions  
you have setup.  
3
4
Call Blocking  
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,  
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your  
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.  
5
Call Forwarding  
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter-  
nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to  
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of  
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If  
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow  
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.  
The Caller will hearForwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}before actually being  
forwarded.  
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System  
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest sys-  
tems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be acces-  
sible in more complex systems.  
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension  
and you do not answer.  
5
6
Call Screening  
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them  
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you  
may assign any of your 9 greetings.The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,  
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to  
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of  
your telephone.  
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung  
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option  
to accept or reject the call.  
Find Me  
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list  
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered  
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored tele-  
phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.  
The Find Me feature only use the first five.  
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select-  
ed by the following digits:  
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting  
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you  
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will  
play for all call coverage conditions.  
7
Night Intercept  
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is  
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When  
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic  
Greeting' feature.  
78  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Edit Personal Greetings  
Example:“Hi this is John Smith.I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.  
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to  
leave me a message, press 1.”  
6
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.  
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your  
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to lis-  
ten to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return  
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the  
greeting.  
2
Busy Greeting  
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension  
or the telephone at your Designated Location.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy  
Greeting' feature.  
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call  
Coverage Condition,then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage  
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,  
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else  
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,  
press 1.”  
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting  
3
Call Blocking Greeting  
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any  
of the Call Coverage greetings.The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox  
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail-  
box using the VT (Voicemail Transfer) key.  
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone  
is forwarded ALL or DND.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Blocking' feature.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be  
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please  
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as  
soon as I can.”  
4
Night Greeting  
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has  
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another  
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans-  
fer the caller directly to your Mailbox.  
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after  
business hours during the evening and at night.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Scheduling' feature.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would  
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave  
me a message, press 1.”  
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
5
Call Screening Greeting  
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening  
to the caller's record name.  
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica-  
tion, message alert options and other message control features.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Screening' feature.  
1
Message Alert  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside  
or inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with  
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension  
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail  
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed  
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your pass-  
word and you will now be logged in.  
80  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Setting Up Message Alert:  
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet  
been picked up by the recipient.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [1] for Message Alert.  
5
6
Auto Play New Messages  
There are 4 options available to you:  
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new  
messages will immediately begin to play.To enable (or if already enabled tog-  
gle and disable) this feature:  
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.  
2
Pager Notification  
Auto Play Message Information  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper  
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played auto-  
matically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be  
requested manually by pressing ‘00. To enable (or if already enabled toggle  
and disable) this feature:  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [2] for pager notification.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
There are 4 options available to you:  
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.  
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.  
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST  
3
Undelete  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to  
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the pro-  
grammed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the fol-  
lowing morning).  
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System  
Administrator.  
Broadcast to All Mailboxes  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a  
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.  
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.  
Deleted voicemail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.  
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously delet-  
ed messages, during this period of time.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.  
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned  
Subscriber Administration privileges.  
4
Undelivered Retrieval  
When this function is activated,the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall  
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip-  
ient.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.  
82  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS  
#
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely  
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.  
You probably will not need to change them after that.  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your  
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.  
1
Setting your Password  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].  
1
Workload Management  
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to  
change it.  
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized  
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for bet-  
ter organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending  
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).  
2
Recording your Name  
Use this option to record your name.Your recorded name is played in several  
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation  
of the Samsung Voicemail system.  
2
Stored Numbers  
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are  
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using  
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features  
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert, “Pager  
Alert, and “Direct Call”).  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].  
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change  
it.  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your  
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
3
5
Schedule Availability  
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal  
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions  
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to  
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.  
3
Entering your Directory Name  
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by  
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].  
Place a Direct Call  
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are  
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the  
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last  
name and then your first name.  
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any-  
where. You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corre-  
sponds to a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This  
feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited  
or opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.  
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)  
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
7
Personal Administration  
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next  
section).  
4
Extended Prompting  
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the  
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are  
very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail.  
84  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any  
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled  
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber  
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find  
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.  
AME Password  
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your  
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized  
people from listening to messages being left for you.  
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flash-  
ing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your Samsung Voicemail  
password).You will then hear the message being left.  
KEYSET USER FEATURES  
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup  
by the System Administrator.  
Call Record  
Message Waiting Lights  
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any  
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will  
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.  
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voicemail message light on your  
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to  
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber  
Main Menu.  
Answer Machine Emulation  
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you  
can use it to monitor calls going to your voicemail, and optionally answer them.  
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering  
machine.  
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voicemail. After ringing your  
station the caller will be connected to your voicemail and hear your personal  
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the  
connection between the caller and your voicemail box. At this time you will only  
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You  
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.  
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit  
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (dur-  
ing forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.  
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:  
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.  
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to  
leave a message normally.  
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.  
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).  
86  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SHORTCUTS  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
Calling  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately  
send the call to the called parties mailbox.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
Call Divert to Voicemail  
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller  
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer set-  
ting.  
Direct Messaging  
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav-  
ing to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a  
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly.If you dial a busy exten-  
sion press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.  
Self Memo (Reminder)  
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind  
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future  
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.  
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS  
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays  
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the vol-  
ume, get message information, or help.  
Viewing Mailbox Contents  
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you  
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the  
SVMi E-Series.  
88  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
N O T E S  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5112L  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
N O T E S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home Page  
Table of Contents  
ITP-5121D  
ITP-5121D User Guide  
For OfficeServ100, OfficeServ500,  
OfficeServ7000 Series  
04/2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
ABOUT THIS BOOK ....................................................................................1  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ................................................2–7  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET ........................................................8  
ITP-5121D SETUP ..................................................................................9–15  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
Making an Outside Call................................................................................................16  
Answering an Outside Call..........................................................................................16  
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................16  
Recall/Flash ......................................................................................................................17  
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ............................................................................17  
Canceling Callback ........................................................................................................17  
INTERCOM CALLS  
Calling Other Stations ..................................................................................................18  
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................18  
Answer Modes ................................................................................................................18  
Busy Station Callback....................................................................................................19  
Busy Station Camp-on..................................................................................................19  
Calling Your System Operator....................................................................................20  
CALL PROCESSING  
Holding Calls ............................................................................................................21–22  
Transferring Calls ....................................................................................................22–23  
Transfer with Camp-On................................................................................................23  
Transfer to Voicemail ....................................................................................................23  
Call Waiting ......................................................................................................................23  
Conference Calls ............................................................................................................24  
Forwarding Calls......................................................................................................25–26  
Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................27  
My Group Pickup............................................................................................................27  
Privacy Release................................................................................................................28  
Copyright 2006 Samsung Telecommunications America.  
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,  
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—  
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.  
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in  
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior  
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing  
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from  
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIALING FEATURES  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
Speed Dialing ..................................................................................................................29  
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..............................................29–30  
One Touch Speed Dialing............................................................................................30  
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................30  
Manual Retry with Redial ............................................................................................31  
Save Number with Redial............................................................................................31  
Chain Dialing....................................................................................................................31  
Automatic Redial/Retry................................................................................................31  
Pulse to Tone Changeover ..........................................................................................32  
Memo Redialing..............................................................................................................32  
AME Password ................................................................................................................43  
Auto Camp-On ................................................................................................................43  
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................43  
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................43  
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ....................................................................................44  
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................44  
Automatic Hold ..............................................................................................................44  
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................44  
Hot Keypad ......................................................................................................................45  
Key Confirmation Tone ................................................................................................45  
Rejoining a Page ............................................................................................................45  
Ring Preference ..............................................................................................................45  
Auto Answer CO Calls ..................................................................................................46  
Display Speed Dial Name............................................................................................46  
Caller ID Review All........................................................................................................46  
Secure OHVA ....................................................................................................................46  
Enblock Dialing ..............................................................................................................47  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
Making an Internal Page..............................................................................................33  
Making an External Page ............................................................................................33  
All Page ..............................................................................................................................33  
Meet Me Page..................................................................................................................34  
Call Park and Page..........................................................................................................34  
Messages—Set and Cancel ........................................................................................35  
Returning Messages......................................................................................................35  
Programmed Messages................................................................................................36  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
Interactive Display Keys ..............................................................................................48  
Directory Information ................................................................................................ 48  
Call Log ..............................................................................................................................49  
Dial by Name....................................................................................................................49  
Call Progress Displays ..................................................................................................50  
Display Number Dialed ................................................................................................50  
Call Duration Timer........................................................................................................50  
Auto Timer ........................................................................................................................50  
Timer Function ................................................................................................................50  
Viewing Message Indications ....................................................................................51  
Alarm Reminder Messages..................................................................................51–52  
Personal Speed Dial Names........................................................................................52  
Station Names .................................................................................................................52  
Managing Key Assignments .......................................................................................53  
LCR with Clear .................................................................................................................53  
Backspace with LCR ......................................................................................................53  
Text Messaging ......................................................................................................54–55  
Caller ID .....................................................................................................................56–60  
ANI .............................................................................................................................57–60  
CLI ..............................................................................................................................57–60  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................................................37  
One Time DND ................................................................................................................37  
Mute ....................................................................................................................................37  
Background Music ........................................................................................................37  
Established Call Pick-Up ..............................................................................................38  
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock ....................................................................38  
Door Phone Calls............................................................................................................39  
Executive/Secretary Hotline ......................................................................................39  
Executive Divert..............................................................................................................39  
Group Listening ..............................................................................................................40  
Account Codes ................................................................................................................40  
Locking Your Keyset ......................................................................................................40  
Manual Signalling ..........................................................................................................41  
Off-Hook Voice Announce ..........................................................................................41  
OHVA Block ......................................................................................................................42  
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................42  
In Group/Out of Group ................................................................................................42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU ..................................................61  
Menu Options.........................................................................................................61–63  
Outgoing Call Log ....................................................................................................61  
Incoming Call Log ...................................................................................................61  
Speed Dial...................................................................................................................62  
Directory Dial ..........................................................................................................62  
Forward Set .........................................................................................................62  
Alarm Reminder .......................................................................................................63  
Samsung Voicemail..................................................................................64  
ABOUT THIS BOOK  
Accessing your Mailbox ............................................................................................65  
Subscriber Services Menu Diagram .................................................................66–67  
Getting Started ...............................................................................................................68  
Listen to your Messages .............................................................................................68  
Subscriber Services Menu .........................................................................................68  
Listening to Old or New Messages .........................................................................69  
Group New or Old Messages .....................................................................................70  
Record and Send a Message ..............................................................................70–71  
Access Manager ......................................................................................................71–73  
Personal Greetings ................................................................................................73  
Mailbox Administration .......................................................................................75  
Message Broadcast ......................................................................................................77  
Personal Services ....................................................................................................78  
Personal Administration Settings ............................................................................79  
Keyset User Features ....................................................................................................80  
Shortcuts ..........................................................................................................................82  
Interactive Displays .......................................................................................................82  
Samsung’s new OfficeServ Technology keyset model, ITP-5121D, is part of the  
OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 Series.  
The ITP-5121D IP keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone,in that it uses  
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the ITP-  
5121D uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing  
number of homes.  
The ITP-5121D keysets incorporate an LCD screen, which provides important infor-  
mation for the user, to make using the keyset easier and more convenient.  
Your keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system. Please take the time  
to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your keyset. Keep  
this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for infrequently used  
features.  
Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica-  
tions a breeze.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ............................83–84  
This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access  
codes. Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be  
changed. If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book,  
please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct  
code.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Some simple rules to remember:  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW  
Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use.  
A fast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in.  
A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold.  
A slow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset.  
USER ORIENTATION  
The ITP model telephones are called IP keysets.The IP keyset incorporates buttons  
orkeysthat are used to access or activate the many features of your office phone  
system. The ITP-5121D keyset incorporates 21 programmable buttons. These 21  
buttons are arranged in three rows of seven across the face of the keyset. Any of  
the system features or functions can be programmed to these buttons.  
FULL DUPLEX SPEAKERPHONE  
All ITP keysets are speakerphones. Pressing the SEND button will answer an  
incoming call on the speakerphone. Pressing the END button will release the call  
on the speakerphone.  
The three buttons above the top row of programmable buttons are soft keys.  
These buttons assist in the use of the system features and functions.  
Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy. Simply press the SPEAK-  
ER button and hang up the handset.  
Lines from the telephone company areC.O. lines.Calls on these lines are referred  
to as “outside calls.Your system can have individual C.O. line keys or lines may be  
assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an  
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press a “LOCALbut-  
ton to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing theLCRbut-  
ton will automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits  
are dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703,  
etc.  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
The ITP-5121D keyset uses the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume  
while the keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use  
and the handset volume while you are listening. These three levels will be stored  
in memory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset, the vol-  
ume buttons will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard  
through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by  
using the volume buttons.There are 16 levels for each volume setting.The volume  
of off-hook ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.  
Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons are programmed to ring specific stations.  
You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number.  
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR  
CALL INDICATIONS  
The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key-  
set above the display.The terminal status indicator is a tri-colored (red, green, and  
amber) light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi-  
vidual button LEDs. The terminal status indicator provides the following indica-  
tions:  
The buttons on your phone have light emitting diodes (LEDs).These are tri-colored  
LEDs that light green, red or amber (green and red together).  
Intercom calls, also called internal calls, always appear on your CALL buttons.They  
will always light green.You can have up to eight CALL buttons, but at least two are  
recommended.  
Busy/Off Hook  
Intercom Ring  
Outside Call Ring  
Recall Ring  
Message Waiting  
Do Not Disturb  
Steady Red  
Flashing Red  
Flashing Green  
Flashing Amber  
Flashing Red  
Outside calls appear on individual line buttons if they are assigned. When an indi-  
vidual line is not assigned to its own button, it will appear on a CALL button.  
Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets. You  
never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold.They stay right where you put  
them and are identified with a green flashing light.  
Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals  
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SEND BUTTON: If the station is programmed for Enblok Dial Mode, when  
dialing an outside telephone number or internal station number, you must  
press the SEND button to initiate the call. This button is also used when  
reviewing recently received or called numbers and answering incoming calls.  
CONFERENCE BUTTON  
The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to 5 parties (sta-  
tion or trunk).  
When reviewing recently received calls, continue to press the SEND button  
for more than 2 seconds and the last outside number called will be redialed.  
TRANSFER BUTTON  
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways.You can  
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can  
do a blind transfer without notification.  
The SEND button operates as the ANS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An  
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.  
ENTER BUTTON: This button is used to select a menu option, or to save  
changes made to a menu or submenu option.  
HOLD BUTTON  
DIRECTION BUTTON: The DIRECTION BUTTON is the donut shaped ring,  
which surrounds the ENTER button. This button is used to navigate within  
the menus.There are directional arrows stenciled into this button, which indi-  
cate which direction the cursor will be moved.  
The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset, while enabling you to call  
other stations or consult coworkers in confidence.  
SPEAKER BUTTON  
END BUTTON: This button is used to disconnect a call after a conversation or  
to move to the initial screen.  
The SPEAKER button allows you to have a conversation from the keyset without  
lifting the handset.  
The END button operates as the RLS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An  
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.  
NAVIGATION BUTTON  
CANCEL BUTTON: This button is used to erase any characters or numbers  
entered by the dial pad or to move to the previous screen.  
The ITP-5121D keyset incorporates a NAVIGATION button. This button is  
designed to assist the user in activating and using various station features, more  
easily. These features include:  
FEATURE ACCESS CODES  
This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea-  
tures. If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes  
may not be correct.Your installing company can inform you of the correct codes.  
Outgoing Call Log  
Incoming Call Log  
Speed Number Search  
Name Search  
Call Forward Assign  
Alarm Assign  
With the NAVIGATION button the station user is no longer required to enter sta-  
tion level programming to activate these frequently used features. A few button  
presses and these features are activated.  
The NAVIGATION button is divided into separate feature buttons. These buttons  
are described below.  
MENU BUTTON: This button displays the station feature main menu so that  
the users can easily utilize various settings and helpful functions.  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ITP-5121D  
SYSTEM TONES  
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already  
familiar to you.  
LCD Panel  
Programmable Buttons (21)  
Intercom Dial Tone—A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing.  
Soft Button  
Scroll Button  
DIAL TONE  
CONTINUOUS  
Status Indicator  
Speaker  
Ringback Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is ringing.  
Volume  
Button  
RINGBACK TONE—1000 ms ON/3000 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
Redial  
Button  
Keyset  
Support  
Navigation  
Button  
Busy Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is busy.  
Dial Button  
Speaker Button  
Hold Button  
Microphone  
BUSY TONE—500 ms ON/500 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
Conference Button  
Transfer Button  
DND/No More Calls Tone—Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed  
is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls.  
DND/NO MORE CALLS TONE—250 ms ON/250 ms OFF  
FOR TEN SECONDS  
Transfer/Conference Tone—Indicates your call is being held and you  
can dial another party.  
TRANSFER/CONF TONE—100 ms ON/100 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
Confirmation Tone—Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you  
have correctly set or canceled a system feature.  
CONFIRMATION TONE—50 ms ON/50 ms OFF  
FOR ONE SECOND  
(programmable)  
Error Tone—A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done  
something incorrectly.Try again.  
ERROR TONE—50 ms of tone 1/50 ms of tone 2  
FOR THREE SECONDS  
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET  
ITP-5121D SETUP  
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.  
INITIALIZING THE ITP-5121D  
Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the  
upper section of the bottom panel. Push towards the top of the keyset to lock  
in.  
Initially the ITP-5121D IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users  
network.The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event  
that the system information should change. The option chosen via scroll key will  
be highlighted.  
Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the  
symbol.  
The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ  
500, and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary information has  
been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID and password of the server, as described  
below to register the phone.  
Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face  
down.  
Plug an eight-conductor ethernet cable, from the wall, into the jack marked  
LAN on the back of the keyset.(Connect the ITP keyset to any port on the local  
network).  
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The  
addresses necessary to set up the ITP-5121D are:  
If your ITP will share LAN connection with a PC, plug an eight-conductor eth-  
ernet cable, from the PC, into the jack marked PC on the back of the keyset.  
IP Address of the ITP  
Network Gateway Address  
Subnet Mask  
IP Address of System’s MCP  
User ID  
Plug the power connector, from the power adapter provided, into the power  
jack on the back of the keyset. The power adapter is not required if the ITP is  
connected to a LAN connection that provides power over the ethernet. The  
ITP-5121D supports the power over ethernet feature when it is connected to  
a IEEE 802.3af compliant LAN switch or power injector port.  
Password  
To get to the Set-Up Menu, unplug the power from the ITP-5121D phone or  
unplug the LAN cable if using Power over Ethernet, press and hold the MENU but-  
ton while plugging in the power cord or LAN cable if using Power over Ethernet  
back into the phone. Now release the MENU button.  
IMPORTANT NOTE:  
Be careful not to connect the Network LAN cable into the PC connector of the  
phone.  
>1.SYSTEM EASY WIZARD  
2.SYSTEM INFORMATION  
To prevent damaging the keyset, only use the Power Adapter that came with  
the 5121D keyset.  
Other items not shown on screen when scrolling down (press down arrow on nav-  
igation disc).  
This manual assumes that the ITP keysets are connected to a functioning local  
IP network. The local IP network must be able to communicate with the MCP  
and MGI card in the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, or in the OfficeServ 7000  
Series systems over IP. This is assumed regardless of whether the IP keyset is  
on a local or remote network.  
3.NETWORK SETUP  
5.SYSTEM SERVER SETUP  
6.FACTORY RESET  
4.LOAD & UPGRADE SETUP  
6.FACTORY RESET  
7.REBOOT  
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
IP SETUP MENU  
MENU STRUCTURE  
To enter the IP SETUP MENU, press the MENU button as soon as the ITP-5121D  
The IP SETUP MENU is configured as follows:  
phone is connected to the power supply or Power over Ethernet LAN port.  
1. SYSTEM EASY WIZARD  
When entering the IP setup menu, the LCD displays the following options:  
This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for con-  
necting the ITP keyset to your system.  
>1.SYSTEM EASY WIZARD  
2.SYSTEM INFORMATION  
2. SYSTEM INFORMATION  
1. Version Info: Provides boot rom, software, DSP, and hardware version  
information.  
Other items not shown on screen when scrolling down (press down on navigation  
disc):  
2. Network Info: Displays network mode, IP address of phone, network, and  
gateway information.  
3. Netmask  
4. Gateway  
3.NETWORK SETUP  
5.SYSTEM SERVER SETUP  
6.FACTORY RESET  
4.LOAD & UPGRADE SETUP  
Note that items 2 to 4 are only displayed when setting Manual IP.  
3. NETWORK SETUP  
6.FACTORY RESET  
7.REBOOT  
This menu allows you to individually setup the same parameters found in the  
Easy Wizard.  
4. LOAD & UPGRADE SETUP  
Once the IP SETUP MENU is displayed, you can move to each menu in the Set Up  
by using the navigation buttons.  
1. Upgrade TFTP Server:The IP address of the TFTP server containing the ITP  
software.  
2. Upgrade Start: Starts the ITP software upgrade process.  
The UP and DOWN directions buttons in the navigation button assembly are  
used to move the highlighted bar up or down to the desired option.  
The LEFT and RIGHT buttons in the navigation button assembly are used to  
move the highlighted bar left or right, to the desired option, move to a sub  
menu and if a menu is at the last line, that menu option will be executed.  
The [0]-[9] dial buttons are used to directly choose a menu, or sub menu  
options.  
5. SYSTEM SERVER SETUP  
1. Server IP Address:The MCP’s IP address.  
2. Server ID: The ID assigned to your ITP (see your phone administrator for  
this information).  
3. Server Pass:The password assigned to your ITP (see your phone adminis-  
tratror for this information).  
The [ENTER] button in the navigation button assembly is used when saving  
a modification.  
The [MENU] button in the navigation button assembly is used to to display  
the IP Setup Main Menu.  
6. FACTORY RESET  
This option resets ITP to factory default settings.  
The [END] button in the navigation button assembly is used when canceling  
or editing the modification, or existing programming.  
7. REBOOT  
The [CANCEL] button in the navigation button assembly is used to go back  
to the previous screen or to delete the last digit of a displayed option value.  
This option reboots the ITP.  
10  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Setting IP Manually  
NAVIGATING THE MENUS  
From the “Network Mode Setup” Menu,  
select [1. MANUAL IP] and press ENTER.  
Next, press the END button to get to the  
NETWORK SETUP MENU as seen here.  
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via  
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [,] dial keys, as well as utilizing the navigation  
button assembly.  
1.NETWORK MODE SET UP  
2.IP ADDRESS SET UP  
The button used for editing and their features are summarized below.  
3.NETMASK SETUP  
4.GATEWAY SETUP  
BUTTON  
FEATURES  
Left and Right ......................To move a cursor (highlighted area) or to erase what is  
entered.  
Enter the IP address of the IP keyset.Next, enter the netmask and gateway address  
for the customer network.  
Enter ........................................To save the current setting and end programming.  
If the [2. IP ADDRESS SET UP] menu is  
selected, press ENTER, the LCD will dis-  
play this message and the user can  
enter its IP address.  
End............................................To cancel the current programming and return to the  
Main Menu.  
INPUT IP ADDRESS& PRESS OK  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Cancel......................................To move back to the previous screen or delete the last  
digit of the displayed option value.  
Check if there is any currently saved IP address of the phone on the LCD. If the IP  
address has not been set, the LCD displays nothing. The user can enter the IP  
address using [0]-[9] dial buttons and [,] button for entering a “.” Save that IP  
address by pressing the [Enter] button of navigation button assembly.  
[,] ............................................To enter [.] between IP address fields.  
[0]-[9] ......................................To enter numerical values.  
SETTING THE NETWORK PARAMETERS  
If the [3. NETMASK SET UP] menu is  
selected, press ENTER, the LCD will dis-  
play the following message and the  
user can enter a new Netmask IP  
address.  
Utilize the following programming steps to program the ITP-5121D keyset to  
operate within the users network.  
INPUT NETMASK & PRESS OK  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Network Parameter Setup  
From the Setup, Main Menu, select [3. NET-  
WORK SETUP] to set or modify the network  
parameters.  
Check if there is any currently saved subnet mask address of the phone on the  
LCD. If the subnet mask address has not been set, the display will show nothing.  
Press any dial buttons from [0]-[9] and [,] button to enter the subnet mask IP  
address and then save that subnet mask IP address by pressing the [Enter] button  
of navigation button assembly.  
3.NETWORK MODE SET UP  
Select the Network Mode Setup and press  
ENTER, the LCD will display this message.  
>1.MANUAL IP  
2.DHCP  
If the [4. GATEWAY SET UP] menu is  
selected, press ENTER, the LCD will dis-  
play the following message and the user  
can enter a new gateway address.  
INPUT GATEWAY & PRESS OK  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
If [1. MANUAL IP] is selected, the user must enter the IP address of the IP key-  
set. Then enter the subnet mask, and gateway value for the customer net-  
work.  
If [2. DHCP] is selected, the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway value will  
be obtained automatically (if a DHCP server is present).  
Check if there is any currently saved Gateway IP address of the phone on the LCD.  
If the gateway IP address has not been set, the LCD displays nothing.The user can  
enter the gateway IP address by using [0]-[9] and [,] button and can save that IP  
address by pressing the [ENTER] button of the navigation button assembly.  
12  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NOTE: In the [3. NETWORK SET UP MENU], [1. NETWORK MODE SETUP] option,  
when [2. DHCP] is selected the IP address, Netmask, and Gateway will not be dis-  
played on the LCD.  
System Server Setup  
The fifth item [5. SYSTEM SERVER SET UP] sets or modifies settings related to  
registering the phone to the MCP. You can obtain this information from your sys-  
tem administrator. The screen below is displayed.  
Load and Upgrade Set/Modify  
The fourth item [4. LOAD & UPGRADE SET UP] sets or modifies the IP phone’s  
software version. Use extreme caution when upgrading the keyset.  
1.SERVER IP ADDRESS  
Select the [4. LOAD & UPGRADE SET UP] item and move to the lower level. The  
screen below is displayed.  
You can set/modify the IP address of the MCP at the [1. SERVER IP ADDRESS] item.  
The screen below is displayed when you enter the item. The server IP is the IP  
address of the MCP2/MCP.  
1.UPGRADE TFTP SERVER  
2.UPGRADE START  
INPUT SERVER IP ADDRESS  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Select option [1. UPGRADE TFTP SERVER] and enter the IP address of the TFTP  
server containing the ITP software. Use [0]-[9] and [,] button to enter the IP  
address. Press ENTER to save.  
You can confirm the current IP address of the MCP at the LCD panel. The address  
is left blank if it is not set. Use the dial buttons from [0]-[9], and [,] to set the IP  
address and press the [ENTER] button among the navigation buttons to save and  
exit. Select the [2. SERVER ID] item.  
Select option [2. UPGRADE START] to start the upgrade process.  
INPUT SYSTEM ID  
You must input the ID assigned to your ITP phone. See your phone system admin-  
istrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit. Select the [3.  
SERVER PASS] item.  
INPUT SYSTEM PASSWORD  
You must input the password associated with your ID. See your phone system  
administrator to get this value. Press the [ENTER] button to save and exit.  
Completion of Settings  
From the main menu, select the seventh item [7. REBOOT] to save all modified  
settings and reboot the ITP-5121D phone.  
14  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
RECALL DIAL TONE  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and then  
make a new call on the same line.  
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH button may be  
programmed to recall dial tone.  
Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button,line group button or dial  
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—press an idle outside line button,  
line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the  
speaker—OR—press SPEAKER, receive intercom dial tone and dial a line  
access code.  
SENDING A FLASH  
While on an outside call, press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone  
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.  
Dial the telephone number.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button.  
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.  
NOTE: You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and  
there is no button available for that line.  
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK  
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that  
the line or group of lines is busy.  
If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may be  
labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).  
If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making  
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44. You will hear confirmation  
tone.  
a call, dial , plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.  
If your system is programmed to require an account code before making a  
call, press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the ACC  
button again and then select a C.O.line.See Account Codes for more information.  
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.  
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer,wait for dial tone and dial  
the telephone number or speed dial number again.  
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system  
administrator.  
NOTES:  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, your CBK button will light.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
CANCELING CALLBACK  
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call.  
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your KeysetOR—press the SEND but-  
ton to automatically answer on the speakerphone.  
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a  
callback, your CBK button will light.  
Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and/or stations set at a  
time. To cancel a callback:  
NOTE: If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flash-  
ing button to answer.  
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44. You will hear confirmation  
tone.  
While you are listening to confirmation tone, press the HOLD button.This will  
cancel the oldest set callback.  
UNIVERSAL ANSWER  
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer  
calls ringing this device, dial 67 or press the UA button.This device can operate in  
any one of the six different ring plans.  
NOTE: If the hot keypad feature is turned off,you must first lift the handset or press  
the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
16  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
BUSY STATION CALLBACK  
INTERCOM CALLS  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:  
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44.  
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.  
Lift the handset or press SEND to call the now idle station.  
CALLING OTHER STATIONS  
Dial the extension number or group number.  
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback  
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin  
speaking immediately after the tone.  
NOTES:  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, your CBK button will light.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or press the END button.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
NOTES:  
1. If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may  
press this button instead of dialing the number.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to  
wait for a callback:  
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS  
MANUAL CAMP-ON  
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the SEND button  
to be connected to the calling station.  
Press the CAMP button or dial 45.  
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds  
and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait-  
ing.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.  
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.  
Wait for the called party to answer.  
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer-  
ing your camp-on.  
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
you will hear the caller’s announcement.  
NOTES:  
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to  
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
Press SEND to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—OR— lift the  
handset to reply.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
ON.  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the  
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for  
auto camp-on.  
AUTO ANSWER MODE  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
then automatically answer the call.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 081 to turn on auto camp-on or 080 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree.For  
privacy, use the handset.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
ON.  
18  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR  
CALL PROCESSING  
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.  
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.  
SYSTEM HOLD  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD. The call will flash green at  
your keyset.If this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash red  
at those keysets.  
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the green flashing light will  
go steady green again. Resume the conversation.  
NOTE:While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing CALL button  
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See  
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.  
EXCLUSIVE HOLD  
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:  
Press the HOLD button twice.The call will flash green on your keyset and this  
line will show a steady red light on other keysets.  
To retrieve the call, press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD  
button a third time.  
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.  
REMOTE HOLD  
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station. Press TRANSFER and a  
dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS button). Press the HOLD  
button.This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line  
Button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.  
NOTES:  
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons  
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by press-  
ing the TRANSFER button (or the RETURN soft key in the display).  
2. Intercom calls cannot be remote held.  
HOLD RECALL  
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station.The  
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light.  
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer  
the recall.  
20  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
first station to hang up, simply press another DSS button. OR  
Home Page  
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will  
go to the system operator.  
Press the CALL button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and  
begin the transfer process again.  
CONSULTATION HOLD  
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto  
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.  
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth-  
er extension:  
NOTES:  
Press the TRANSFER button; you will receive transfer dial tone. Your call is  
placed on transfer hold.  
Dial the extension number.  
Consult with the internal party.  
Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.  
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the  
parties by pressing the TRANSFER button.  
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to re-  
ceive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the other party.  
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press  
the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number.  
NOTE:Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside  
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the  
parties by pressing the DROP button.  
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON  
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,  
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy  
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.  
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT  
ANOTHER STATION  
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to  
receive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller.  
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the line button with the  
red flashing light.  
TRANSFER TO VOICEMAIL  
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line  
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.  
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have  
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this.To transfer a call directly to  
a voice mailbox:  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.  
Hang up when dialing is completed.  
TRANSFERRING CALLS  
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You can  
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can  
do a blind transfer without notification.  
CALL WAITING  
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has  
camped-on to you:  
While on a call, press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or  
group number.Your call is automatically put on transfer hold. OR  
Press a DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on  
transfer hold.  
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer).  
OR  
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you  
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate  
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.  
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automati-  
cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press  
Wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and hang up.  
If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line when the  
called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside  
party. If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the  
22  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
HOLD and then the flashing button OR  
Finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.  
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer.  
FORWARDING CALLS  
You may forward your calls to another station, group of stations or an external  
telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as  
detailed below. If you have FWD ALL, FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER buttons,  
press one to turn that forward feature on. A steady red light reminds you what for-  
ward condition is activated.  
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.  
CONFERENCE CALLS  
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of  
outside lines and internal stations in any order.  
You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset  
and dialing 600.  
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONF button and receive confer-  
ence tone.  
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONF button and  
receive conference tone.  
FORWARD ALL CALLS  
To forward all your calls under any condition to another station:  
Make another call or press the CONF button to join all parties.  
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.  
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not  
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONF button again to  
return to your previous conversation.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for-  
warded station. This is useful when you are expecting an important call but  
you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.  
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she  
does not have a FORWARD ALL button, the TRANSFER button will light to in-  
dicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred  
elsewhere.  
To drop a party from your conference call:  
Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped.  
Press CONF again to reestablish the conference.  
NOTE:To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal sta-  
tion. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect-  
ed together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONF button plus the CALL  
button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use  
your extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release automatically.  
Press CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.  
FORWARD BUSY  
To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone:  
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
CONFERENCE SPLITTING  
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold  
feature turned on (See Customizing Your Keyset) and all of the outside lines involved  
in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset, you can split the conference  
into separate calls as follows:  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing.  
Press any one of the outside line buttons.That outside line will remain steady  
green to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines in the  
conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom callers  
in the conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each caller  
privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference.  
FORWARD NO ANSWER  
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer:  
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
24  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR  
Dial 1-5 to select the forward type OR  
FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER  
If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti-  
nation programmed, you may set both of these at the same time:  
Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type.  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.  
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
Dial 1 to set OR  
Dial 604.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO  
Press TRANSFER to store and exit  
FORWARD FOLLOW ME  
STATION CALL PICKUP  
When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you  
are now:  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65  
plus the extension number of the ringing phone.  
Dial 606 plus your extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this  
DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station.  
If you want a specific extension's calls forwarded to your phone (Remote Call  
Forward):  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Dial 606 plus the desired extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
GROUP CALL PICKUP  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66  
plus the desired group number or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP button if  
available.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
FORWARD DND  
GROUP NUMBERS  
01-20  
01-99  
01-99  
01-99  
OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100  
OfficeServ 500 M  
OfficeServ 500 L  
To forward your phone when you activate DND.  
Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
NOTES:  
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code.  
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS  
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call  
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea-  
tures. To review or change call forward options:  
MY GROUP PICKUP  
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same  
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the  
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access  
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.  
Press TRANSFER 102.  
The display will indicate the current call forward condition and destination  
OR  
Show 0:FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set.  
26  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PRIVACY RELEASE  
DIALING FEATURES  
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri-  
vacy on the C.O. from your phone.  
All “DIALING FEATURESinstructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode.  
This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many  
years. In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use  
Enblock Dialing. With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to  
the carrier after pressing the SEND key. Please check your telephone setup to con-  
firm what dialing mode is used.  
To Release Privacy:  
While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other internal parties (or  
up to three) join the conversation.  
Press the PRB button (the PRB button will light steady red). Inform the other  
party that he/she may now join the conversation.  
SPEED DIALING  
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to  
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the  
PRB button a second time, the PRB button will be off.  
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide  
speed dial list of numbers 500~999 or from your personal list of numbers 00~49.  
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial  
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.  
To Join a Non-Private Conversation:  
When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation:  
With the handset on-hook, press the MEMORY button or dial 16.  
Dial the desired speed dial number.  
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.  
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated.  
OR  
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED  
DIAL NUMBERS  
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial  
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system admin-  
istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 105.  
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).  
Dial a line or line group access code.  
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,  
,, FLASH and PAUSE.  
Press TRANSFER to store the number.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
28  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
For the purposes of pro-  
gramming speed dial num-  
bers, the programmable but-  
tons are known as A, B, C, D, E  
and F.  
A B C D E F  
MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL  
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial  
the same number dialed.  
Press the REDIAL button.  
The A button is not used.  
The B button inserts a  
flash.  
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.  
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.  
The C button inserts a  
pause.  
The D button is used for  
NOTE: If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will  
access the call log when pressed.  
pulse to tone conversion.If your system uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O.lines,  
pressing D while entering a speed dial number causes all subsequent digits to  
be sent as DTMF tones.  
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL  
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SNR button before  
hanging up.  
The E button is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide  
some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display. When you  
are entering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hid-  
den. Press E again to begin displaying digits.  
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SNR button or dial 17.The same  
line will be selected for you.  
The F button is used to enter a name. See Personal Speed Dial Names under  
Display Features.  
Use the HOLD button to clear a speed dial number.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another  
number.  
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING  
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed  
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.  
CHAIN DIALING  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.  
Dial the speed dial number (0049 or 500999) that you want assigned to  
this button.  
You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as  
many speed dial numbers together as required:  
After the first speed number is dialed, press MEMORY again and dial another  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num-  
ber.  
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.  
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system  
can automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-  
programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.  
LAST NUMBER REDIAL  
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the REDIAL buttonordial 19.  
When you hear a busy signal, press the RETRY button.  
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for  
you.You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker.The micro-  
phone is muted.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
30  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK-  
ER to begin speaking.  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
NOTES:  
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.  
2. To cancel a retry, lift and replace the handset.  
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE  
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:  
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the  
# with be sent as tones.  
MEMO REDIALING  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE  
and dial a zone number.  
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are  
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.  
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE  
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.  
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the keypad.  
Press SAVE to store the number.  
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8.  
OR  
To dial the number, press the SNR button. It will select the same line and dial the  
stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press the SNR  
button.  
Dial 9 to page all external zones.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE  
and dial a zone number.  
ALL PAGE  
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same  
time:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial , or press the ALL PAGE button.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
NOTE:The LED on the PAGE button will only light when an All Page is in progress.  
32  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
To retrieve an automatically parked call:  
MEET ME PAGE  
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,  
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK button,  
press it and dial the announced orbit number.  
Lift the handset.  
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.  
Dial the desired zone number.  
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.  
Press WAIT or TRANSFER.  
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.  
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
NOTES:  
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall  
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page  
intercom calls.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
CALL PARK AND PAGE  
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can  
park the call prior to paging. There are two different methods:  
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION  
MANUAL PARK ORBITS  
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy  
signal, you can leave a message indication:  
While in conversation, press the PARK button.  
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another  
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any  
available orbit number and see the number in the display.  
Remember the selected orbit number.  
Replace the handset when finished.  
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described  
(example:“John Smith park two”).  
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.  
Hang up. The MESSAGE button on the called station will light. Standard tele-  
phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message  
lamp,if the phone is equipped with one and they are connected to an 8MWSLI  
card (not available on the OfficeServ 100 or OfficeServ 7000 Series) or a  
16MWSLI card on the system.  
NOTES:  
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:  
1. A station can have up to five message indications.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
NOTES:  
CANCELING MESSAGES  
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls  
in park orbits.  
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it  
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park  
and page intercom calls.  
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the  
extension number of the station at which you left a message. To cancel all mes-  
sage indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension. Your MESSAGE  
light will go out.  
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON  
While in conversation, press the PAGE button.The call is automatically parked  
at your station.  
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.  
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.  
Hang up.  
RETURNING MESSAGES  
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43.The first station that left a message will  
be called automatically. If that station does not answer, your MESSAGE light  
will stay on.  
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.  
Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned.  
34  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NOTES:  
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any  
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must  
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
DO NOT DISTURB  
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.  
While on-hook, press the DND button or dial 401. The DND button lights  
steady red to remind you of this mode.  
To cancel DND, press the DND button again or dial 400. The DND light turns  
off.You can make calls while in the DND mode.  
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES  
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a  
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message  
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,  
your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status.  
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user  
guide.  
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
ONE TIME DND  
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you  
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you  
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your key-  
set will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.  
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can  
have a different message code:  
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the  
button will light red. Press the button again to turn off.  
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous  
one off and set a different programmed message.  
MUTE  
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa-  
tion:  
Press the MUTE button. It will light red.  
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The light turns off.  
BACKGROUND MUSIC  
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in  
your keyset:  
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.  
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.  
You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis-  
tening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.  
36  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP  
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE  
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a  
computer modem on your PC.  
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:  
You will receive three short rings repeated.  
Lift the handset or press SEND button.You are connected to the door phone.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati-  
cally moved to your keyset.  
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.  
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/  
ROOM MONITOR  
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for  
the single line station.  
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in  
another room.  
APPOINTMENT REMINDER/ALARM CLOCK  
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment  
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set  
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.  
Dial the extension number of the door phone.  
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con-  
versation.  
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the  
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times  
at five minute intervals.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
To set alarms:  
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM  
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Press TRANSFER to save.  
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.  
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secre-  
tary station.  
Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta-  
tion.  
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will light  
red when the other station is in use.  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
To cancel individual alarms:  
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Press the HOLD button.  
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button.  
Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete  
the transfer OR  
NOTE: Display keysets can show a reminder message. See Alarm Reminder  
Messages under Display Features.  
Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS button.  
EXECUTIVE DIVERT  
When the executive station is in the DIVERT mode all of his/her calls will ring the  
secretary station.  
Press the DIVERT button to pass a call while ringing.  
38  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
To transfer all calls to the Secretary:  
1
2
0
LOCKED OUTGOING  
Hold Button LED Flashes Hold Button LED Solid  
LOCKED ALL CALLS  
UNLOCKED  
Press the DIVERT button while the phone is idle.The LED will be lit and all calls  
NO  
will ring the secretary.  
Make outside calls  
YES  
NO  
ACCESS DENIED  
Receive outside calls  
Make intercom calls  
Receive intercom calls  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
NO  
The secretary can call the BOSS in the DIVERT mode but all other users will ring the  
secretary (the secretary can override the boss’ DIVERT).  
GROUP LISTENING  
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want  
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:  
MANUAL SIGNALLING  
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta-  
tion, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or  
ringing).  
Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker.The microphone is not in use,  
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.  
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.  
Repeat if necessary.  
To send a signal to another station:  
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.  
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the des-  
ignated station.  
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be  
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up.This will elim-  
inate a momentary squeal.  
NOTE: Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station  
number extender assigned to it.  
ACCOUNT CODES  
When equipped with optional equipment, your system will allow calls to be  
charged to a specific account.  
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE  
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling sta-  
tion must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA  
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.  
During any outside C.O. call, press the account (ACC) button.  
Enter the 3 digit account code bin number when prompted, OR  
If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code (maximum 12  
characters including Q and #) and press ACC000 again, OR  
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announce-  
ment in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF  
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the  
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be  
heard through the speaker.  
If your button has an extender other than 000 (001~999) account code con-  
tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your.  
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET  
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away.You  
can unlock it when you return.Your default station passcode is 1234.  
To make an off-hook voice announcement:  
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.  
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.  
After the attention tone, begin speaking.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 100.  
Dial your four digit station passcode.  
Dial 1 to locking outgoing, 2 for locked all calls, or 0 to unlock.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset. This will place the original  
party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.  
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original  
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.  
40  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NOTES:  
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to  
avoid an echo effect.  
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
AME PASSWORD  
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protec-  
tion. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being  
left.The passcode is the same as your station passcode.This feature only applies if  
there is a Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a  
programmed AME button.  
OHVA BLOCK  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) button. Pressing  
this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the  
button again and cancel the blocking.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
OHVA REJECT  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) button. Pressing  
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing  
party and return you to your original call.  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when  
a busy station is called.  
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP  
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from  
the group and then put it back in.While you are out of the group, you can receive  
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an  
IN/OUT button with the group number assigned.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Press the IN/OUT button. It will light red when your keyset is in the group.  
Press the IN/OUT button again to exit the group and turn the light off. Repeat  
as necessary.  
SELECT RING TONE  
Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies:  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 111.  
Dial 18 or press the UP and DOWN buttons to hear each tone.  
When you hear the tone that you prefer, press TRANSFER to save it.  
If you do not have an IN/OUT button:  
Dial the IN/OUT access code number ________________, then the group  
number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.  
NOTE: Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different  
tone than what you have selected for your keyset.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press SPEAKER button.  
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE  
The IN/OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that  
this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can de-  
cide for which groups you will receive calls.  
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station pass-  
code whenever you desire.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 101.  
Dial your old passcode.  
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters).You can use 09.  
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four  
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.  
Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode.  
42  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button. If it is so equipped  
pressing this button while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset  
mode and the light will illuminate to indicate this. Pressing the button while the  
light is lit will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out.  
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)  
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls  
under Intercom Calls for descriptions):  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 103.  
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
HOT KEYPAD  
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be madeliveorhotso that it is  
not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin  
dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line  
number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code. To ac-  
tivate this feature:  
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward  
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the  
SEND button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)  
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110  
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.  
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE  
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the  
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
AUTOMATIC HOLD  
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing CALL  
button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call.  
This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.  
REJOINING A PAGE  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page  
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
NOTE: Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER.  
HEADSET OPERATION  
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using  
RING PREFERENCE  
headset mode, press the SEND/END button to answer and release calls.  
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press  
the SEND button.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at  
your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button  
to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
45  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ENBLOCK DIALING  
AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS  
This option allows you to dial digits then press the SEND button to make the call  
This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer.When  
a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound  
two beeps, the same as when a screened transfer is completed, and you will be  
connected to the CO call. In order for this option to work the station must also be  
programmed for auto answer (see SET ANSWER MODE).  
(like a cellphone).  
While the handset on-hook press TRANSFER then dial 110.  
Dial 161 to turn Enblock Dialing ON or 160 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
While on hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer CO on or 150 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
NOTE: Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to  
work. Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer.  
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME  
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as  
it is dialed.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL  
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls  
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in,first out basis.  
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that  
you did not answer.When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the  
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
SECURE OHVA  
This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the  
handset.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP-ON on or 130 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
46  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALL LOG  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele-  
phone. You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a  
review list.  
INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS  
The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac-  
cess codes. Pressing one of these buttons has the same effect as pressing a pro-  
grammable button. These buttons are called soft keys as their functions are not  
fixed.They change to present you with the best options for that call condition.The  
use of soft keys allows the programmable buttons to be used for more DSS and  
speed dial buttons.  
Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are assigned in  
blocks of 10 each.  
Press the LOG key.  
Press either the IN or OUT key.  
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of  
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll  
through your list of calls.  
The SCROLL button is used to display options available to the user at a particular  
time or during a specific procedure. Press this button once while in the idle state  
to view the three main categories available.  
Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list.  
Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name, Number, or Date associated  
with this call.  
201: STN NAME  
Press the DIAL key to call this number.  
CALL OTHER ANS  
ANSWER: Guides you through the options to answer calls.  
OTHER: Guides you through features other than making or answering calls.  
CALL: Guides you through the options to make a call.  
These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.  
DIAL BY NAME  
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A sta-  
tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a  
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial  
any station or speed dial number in seconds.  
Select one of the main categories: CALL, OTHER or ANS (ANSWER). Press the  
SCROLL button to display additional options available under each of the three  
main categories.The symbol ¬ displayed as the last character on the lower line of  
the display indicates that there are additional options. Press the SCROLL button to  
display these additional options.  
Press the DIR button (DIRECTORY).  
Select the directory you wish to use: PERS (personal speed dial numbers), SYS  
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).  
Dial the key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you  
wish to search for.  
User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters. Options assigned to soft  
keys will be in upper case letters.  
DIRECTORY INFORMATION  
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.  
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.  
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.  
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an-  
swering.  
NOTE: A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above  
lists (PERS, SYS, or STN).  
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be  
easily identified and answered with different greetings.  
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]  
where xxx is the station group number.This allows you to answer calls directed to  
you differently than calls directed to your group.  
48  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS  
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS  
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is  
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER  
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall  
from 204], [Call for 501], [message frm 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you in-  
formed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are  
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.  
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:  
With the handset on-hook, press the MESSAGE button with the red flashing  
light.  
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.  
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes-  
sage indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next mes-  
sage.  
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED  
Press the END button to return your keyset to the idle condition.  
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the dis-  
play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is  
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed  
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.  
ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES  
(See also Special Application Menu-Name Search)  
When you use the alarm/appointment reminder feature, you create a 16 charac-  
ter reminder message. When the alarm rings, your message will appear instead of  
[ALARM REMINDER]. To program reminder messages:  
CALL DURATION TIMER  
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you  
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately  
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call dura-  
tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 min-  
utes, the timer restarts.  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 116.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off.Enter the time as HHMM (hours and  
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a char-  
acter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For exam-  
ple, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.”  
Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters  
from the following table to complete your message.  
You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to  
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is  
restarted.  
AUTO TIMER  
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer  
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.  
Press the TRANSFER button to store the alarm and reminder message.  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
COUNT  
DIAL 0  
DIAL 1  
DIAL 2  
DIAL 3  
DIAL 4  
DIAL 5  
DIAL 6  
1
2
>
?
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
<
TIMER FUNCTION  
space  
,
!
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.  
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.  
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.  
Read the elapsed time in the display.  
H
K
N
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.  
L
O
M
50  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIAL 7  
DIAL 8  
DIAL 9  
DIAL ,  
NOTES:  
P
T
W
:
Q
U
X
=
R
V
Y
[
S
Q
Z
]
7
8
9
,
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS  
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program-  
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons  
OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender.  
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.  
Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming.  
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-  
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.  
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.  
Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal-  
lation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders  
for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.  
To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Press the HOLD button.  
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.  
LCR WITH CLEAR  
Press the TRANSFER button.  
When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can  
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to  
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES  
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.  
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.  
BACKSPACE WITH LCR  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 106.  
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.  
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes-  
sages.  
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by press-  
ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary.  
Press the TRANSFER button to store the speed dial name.  
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.  
STATION NAMES  
You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset.This allows other display key-  
set users to call you using the directory dial feature.  
To program a station name:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 104.  
Enter the 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind-  
er Messages.  
Press TRANSFER to store the name.  
52  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Press TRANSFER  
TEXT MESSAGING  
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro-  
grammed text messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or  
Station Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk  
and listen to your outside party.The other station can view this message and take  
the appropriate action or respond back with another text message.  
Transfer:  
RETURN  
Dial 205  
205:busy  
OHVA  
CAMP ON  
You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature. See your System  
Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature. They will assign you ten  
(10) blank messages.You can create any 16 character messages (01 to 10) that are  
appropriate for your use.  
OHVA to 205  
OHVA from 201  
TMSG  
REJECT  
NOTE: See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac-  
ters to create a text message.  
Wait for reply  
GIVE THE CALL  
TMSG:01  
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will  
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the  
UP/DOWN button to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.  
SEND  
Dial 03 or press twice  
The basics steps in text messaging are:  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
1. Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging.  
TMSG:03  
SEND  
2. Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.  
3. Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.  
4. Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)  
5. When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their  
previous call progress condition.  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
Wait for reply  
TMSG  
EXIT  
702:  
01:45  
701:  
05:55  
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps  
2.  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
The following example will better demonstrate how to use Text Messaging.In this  
example station 201 is making an off hook voice announcement to station 205  
who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text message.  
STATION 201: LINDA  
STATION 205: JOHN  
received a call on line 702  
is talking on line 701  
Talking on line 702  
702:  
01:15  
701:  
05:25  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
54  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NO CID DSP  
Caller ID Digital Signal Processors (CIDDSP’s) are resources  
in the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000  
Series systems required for receiving CID data. If there are  
no CIDDSP’s available at the time a call comes in, this is the  
message you will see on your display.  
CALLER ID  
WHAT IS CALLER ID?  
Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company-provided feature that de-  
livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your  
phone. There are two types of Caller ID; the first delivers the calling party’s tele-  
phone number only and the second (sometimes referred to as “Deluxe” Caller ID)  
delivers both the calling party’s telephone number and name as listed in the tele-  
phone directory.  
NOTE: The Caller ID features may require optional software and/or hardware.  
Please see your service and installation company for details.  
WHAT IS ANI?  
[T1/E&M NOT SUPPORTED ON THE OS 7100]  
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) is a feature offered by some telephone  
service providers that provides the calling party’s telephone number. This service  
is only available on E&M Tie Lines on a T1, digital trunk. ANI is similar to Caller  
Identification (CID) but the format and information of the calling person is differ-  
ent. CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses DTMF signalling. Usually, with ANI, a call-  
ing party’s identity is the Listed Directory Number (LDN) unless a separate bill-to-  
number has been specified, (in which case the bill-to-number will be sent). Note  
that ANI does not provide calling party NAME,only the number.The phone system  
can provide calling number to name translation table.  
The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID; in fact, in the case of num-  
ber only delivery, the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific  
telephone number. However, even though you are paying to receive Caller ID  
information, there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in-  
formation. The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display  
information that the system will provide.  
PRIVATE  
The caller does not wish his/her name or number to be re-  
vealed to you. This type of call can be stopped at the tele-  
phone company by dialing an access code on your outside  
lines. This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce-  
ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that  
have had Caller ID blocked.The code to block these calls can  
usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc-  
tory.  
WHAT IS CLI?  
On ISDN circuits, calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both  
BRI (BRI not supported on the OfficeServ 7100) and PRI type circuits. On BRI cir-  
cuits the system only supports number delivery and, like ANI, a name can be  
attached to the telephone number of frequent callers via the Caller ID translation  
table. On 5ESS and NI2 PRI circuits both name and number support is provided on  
the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems.  
OUT OF AREA  
PAYPHONE  
The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller  
ID information (for example, international calls) or he/she is  
calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID  
information, for example, some outbound WATS lines.  
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID  
DISPLAY  
Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both  
lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems. On Transferred CO  
calls, you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in  
the display. Regardless of which one is selected, you can press the NND button to  
view the other pieces of Caller ID information.To select the type of Caller ID infor-  
mation you wish to view first:  
The caller is calling from a coin-operated telephone. The  
telephone company will send this information as there are  
no directory listings for pay phones.The number will be de-  
livered as usual.  
INVALID CID INFO  
NO CID RECEIVED  
This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa-  
tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 119.  
Dial 0 for CID options, 1 for ANI options, or 2 for CLI options.  
Dial 0 if you do not wish to view CID information, 1 to view the NUMBER first  
or 2 to view the NAME first.  
This is a message that will be displayed when there was no  
CID information sent on the line.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
56  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL  
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO  
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you  
can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with  
the call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in  
the display depending on your Name/Number selection.  
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,  
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This may influ-  
ence how you choose to handle the call.  
From an idle keyset:  
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,  
press the NEXT button. If your keyset does not have a NEXT button, press the CID  
button and then the NEXT soft key.  
Press the INQUIRE button, OR  
Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key.  
Dial the trunk number.  
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button, OR  
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press  
the SAVE button to save the CID number.If your keyset does not have a SAVE but-  
ton,press the CID button,the SCROLL button and then the SAVE soft key.The sys-  
tem must be using LCR to dial the saved number.  
If you are on a call:  
Press the INQUIRE button.Your existing call will go on hold, OR  
Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on  
hold.  
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID  
Dial the trunk number.  
NUMBER  
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button, OR  
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR button or dial 17.  
NOTES:  
NOTES:  
1. Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you  
must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.  
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer avail-  
able] display.  
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER  
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save  
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list.To store a  
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:  
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This  
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in,first-out basis.The list includes calls that you  
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer (missed  
calls). When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back.  
The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number. To access the CID infor-  
mation stored in your REVIEW list:  
Press the STORE button. The system displays the speed dial bin in which the  
number was stored, OR  
Press the CID button and then press the SCROLL button.  
Press the STORE soft key.  
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.  
Press the REVIEW button, OR  
Press the CID button and then press the REVIEW button.  
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to  
STORE CID numbers.  
58  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.  
You can now CLEAR this entry, OR  
Use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
Press DIAL to call this person back, OR  
Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed  
dial bin.  
SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU  
Below are instructions for additional call processing and special applications that  
can be accomplished via the LCD programming.These features and functions can  
be accessed by pressing the MENU button. Follow the user instructions below to  
utilize these features and functions.  
NOTES:  
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administra-  
tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.  
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num-  
bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.  
After pressing the MENU button, use the direction button to scroll to the desired  
menu option. Press ENTER to access the menu. To navigate within the menu you  
may scroll to the desired option/function or dial the associated option function  
number.  
Press END button to exit programming.  
MENU OPTIONS  
Note that some of the features listed here may require system programming and  
configuration in order to function. See your system administrator for details.  
Press the MENU button to access the options below. Use the UP/DOWN direc-  
tional button to scroll to, and within option menus and sub menus. You may also  
dial the option number, after pressing the MENU button.  
1. OUTGOING LOGS: Allows you to view a list of the 30 most recent outgoing  
calls from the keyset. You may return the call directly from the displayed sta-  
tus.  
Scroll or dial option number 1. Outgoing Call Log.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to  
automatically dial the number.  
OR  
Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu.  
OR  
Press END to exit programming.  
2. INCOMING LOGS: Allows you to view a list of the 30 most recent incoming  
calls to the keyset.You may return the call directly from the displayed status.  
Scroll or dial option number 2. Incoming Call Log.  
Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to  
automatically dial the number.  
OR  
Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu.  
60  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
2. ALL FWD NO.  
OR  
Press END to exit programming.  
3. BUSY FWD NO.  
4. NOANS FWD NO.  
5. DND FWD NO.  
0. FWD CANCEL  
3. SPEED DIAL: Allows you to search through Station and System Speed Dial  
Numbers.You may dial the number directly from the displayed status.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll or dial option number 3. Speed Dial.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll to option or dial desired option.  
Scroll to or dial 1. FORWARD TYPE and scroll to or dial the desired for-  
ward type.  
Press ENTER to activate the desired call forward type.  
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.  
1. Personal Speed  
2. System Speed  
OR  
Press ENTER.  
Press END to exit programming.  
OR  
6. ALARM REMINDER: Allows you to set an Alarm Reminder. Up to three alarms  
Scroll to the desired number and press the SEND button to automatical-  
may be set.  
ly dial the number.  
OR  
OR  
Scroll or dial option number 6. Alarm Reminder.  
Scroll or dial the desired Alarm number (Alarm 1-3).  
Press ENTER.  
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.  
Press END to exit programming.  
Enter Alarm Type.  
4. DIRECTORY DIAL: Allows you to search for station speed, system speed and  
0. NOT SET: Disables alarm.  
1. TODAY: Rings alarm one time only, on the day set.  
2. DAILY: Rings alarm daily at time set.  
station numbers based on their associated programmed name.  
Scroll or dial option number 4. Directory Dial.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll to option or dial desired option.  
Press ENTER.  
Display confirms setting and returns to that alarm set menu.  
Scroll up to set ALARM TIME.  
Press ENTER.  
Enter ALARM TIME (Military Format).  
Press ENTER.  
1. Personal Speed  
2. System Speed  
3. Station Number  
Enter the name associated with that speed number or station number.  
Press the SEND button to automatically dial the number.  
Display confirms setting.  
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.  
OR  
OR  
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.  
Press END to exit programming.  
OR  
Press END to exit programming.  
5. FORWARD SET: Allows you to assign station call forward condition for the  
phone.You must first set the forward type and destination (Options 2-5) then  
activate the forwarding in option 1.  
Scroll or dial option number 5. Forward Set.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll to or dial the desired forward option and assign station number to  
forward your station to.  
62  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX  
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]  
Samsung Voicemail  
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a  
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari-  
ous features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this  
section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as  
Subscriber Services.  
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]  
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring  
the voicemail [VMMSG].  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
0000).  
Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voicemail box has the  
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending  
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new  
messages.  
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the  
office environment]  
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main  
greeting will answer.  
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number  
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
0000).  
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you con-  
trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your  
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are  
referred to as “Call Conditions. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most com-  
monly used Call Conditions.  
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station  
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a  
different station)  
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones  
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be  
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.  
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be  
prompted to enter a password.  
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.  
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice.You will be prompted to  
enter you password.  
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all  
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature  
availability.  
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will  
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then  
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.  
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Access Manager - See Access Manager.  
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.  
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.  
Personal Services - See Personal Services.  
Return to Main Menu.  
64  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Subscriber Services Menu  
Group New  
Messages  
Group Saved  
Messages  
Listen to New Review Saved  
Record & Send  
Messages  
Access  
Manager  
Personal  
Greetings  
Mailbox  
Administration  
Personal  
Services  
Pause, Resume  
Play Menu  
Options  
Exit  
Messages  
Messages  
11  
33  
1
3
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
Assign and/or Edit  
Change  
Review  
Group Messages Menu  
Listen Menu  
Record Menu  
Follow Me  
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
1
Primary Greeting  
Message Alert  
Workload  
Group  
Urgent Messages  
Play  
For a Directory  
Assign and/or Edit  
Busy Greeting  
Change  
Pager Notification  
Edit Stored  
Telephone Numbers  
Block All Calls  
Call forwarding  
Call Screening  
Find Me  
1
1
11  
2
#
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
5
7
8
Message  
of Subscribers  
Play Previous  
Message  
To Create a  
Reminder  
Group  
Callback Requests  
Assign and/or Edit  
Blocking Greeting  
Review Deleted  
Messages  
Change  
Change  
Password  
##  
2
3
4
5
8
9
#
0
1
2
Weekly Schedule  
Save  
Group  
Reminders  
Assign and/or Edit  
Night Greeting  
Review Undelivered  
Messages  
Place a  
Record  
Name  
"Enter the Recipient's Number"  
Message  
Direct Call  
Discard  
Message  
Review  
Recording  
3
Group  
Private Messages  
1
Assign and/or Edit  
Screened Greeting  
Auto Play  
New Messages  
Name  
Enter Directory  
3
3
Reply to Sender  
4
Stop, Append to  
Recording  
2
Group  
Fax Only Messages  
Edit Only  
Personal Greetings  
Auto Play Message  
Information  
Extended  
Prompting  
Personal  
4
8
0
Administration  
Place  
5
Discard Recording  
and Rerecord  
Call to Sender  
3
Auto Set  
Night Intercept  
Edit Only  
Mailbox Greeting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Deliver Copy  
of Fax Message  
55  
6
Set  
4
Delivery Options  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
R
e
c
o
r
d
d
S
e
nd  
Play  
Forward a  
Copy of Message  
Broadcast Message  
Menu Options  
Specify  
Future Delivery  
5
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Play  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Record  
C
Cancel, Return  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
#
0
7
Access Coverage  
a Reminder  
t
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
be  
r
S
ervices  
SEND Message,  
Then Copy  
*
6
Change  
Playback Volume  
Group  
A Specific Sender  
Play  
Menu Options  
Cancel, Return  
Cancel, Return  
Play  
77  
8
t
o S cr r Services  
u
b
s
i
b
e
Menu Options  
to Subscriber Services  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
*
*
7
Pause, Resume  
Message Playback  
Play  
Cancel, Return  
Cancel, Return  
sc
Sub riber Services  
Message Inventory  
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
ri  
b
e
r Services  
o
Change  
Playback Volume  
*
*
77  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
9
Play  
Menu Options  
Pause, Resume  
Record/Playback  
8
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
#
Cancel, Return  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
to Subscriber Services  
9
Skip to  
Next Message  
*
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
Scan Messages  
##  
0
SEND Message,  
Then Exit Record  
Play  
#
0
*
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play Message  
Information  
00  
C
a
n
ce  
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
Ca  
n
c
e
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
t
t
o
S
u
b
s
crib  
e
r Services  
t
sc
Sub riber Services  
*
*
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available  
please speak to your system administrator.  
66  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PLAY MENU OPTIONS  
0
,
#
GETTING STARTED  
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following  
a few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a  
tutorial.You should start with the following steps:  
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.  
1 or 3  
From the Subscriber Services Menu:  
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES  
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].  
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].  
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].  
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].  
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.  
Play the previous message.  
11  
2
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].  
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
3
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
Reply to the message.  
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and  
ready to use.  
4
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the  
sender has a mailbox on this system).  
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES  
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.  
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the  
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your pass-  
word.You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new  
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.  
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is need-  
ed to use this feature on an outside call.  
55  
Deliver a fax copy.  
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail docu-  
ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out  
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically  
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.  
Note:After you enter your password, ifAutoplay of New Messagesis enabled and  
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them auto-  
matically.A subscriber can control this feature.From the Subscriber Services Menu  
[6] [5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.  
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.  
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU  
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),  
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it  
as a memo to yourself (##).  
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.  
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES  
GROUP NEW MESSAGES  
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES  
GROUP OLD MESSAGES  
ACCESS MANAGER  
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a mes-  
sage to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be  
left for each recipient.  
11  
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.  
3
77  
Change playback volume of the recording.  
33  
4
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will tog-  
gle between the two levels.  
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
8
9
Pause or resume during message playback.  
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.  
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
PAUSE / RESUME  
8
68  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
99  
0
Change playback speed of the recording.  
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear  
the Send Menu with the following functions:  
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle  
between the two speeds.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
Review  
Continue Recording  
Discard and Re-Record  
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)  
Schedule Future Delivery  
Play options.  
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this  
point.  
00  
#
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just  
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.  
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else  
Save and Send the Recording  
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current mes-  
sage - it is retained as new.  
Setting Message Attributes  
##  
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is  
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific mes-  
sage quickly. To stop scanning press [1].  
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the  
following delivery options:  
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery  
Return Receipt Requested  
Request a Call Back  
Private Delivery  
Reply Required  
Exit  
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.  
11 or 33  
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES  
Scheduling Future Delivery  
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a spe-  
cific sender, press [9].  
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be  
able to set message attributes and set this message as:  
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:  
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery  
Next Few Hours  
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
A Coming Day of the Week  
Specific Day / Time  
Exit  
a) Number of messages  
b) Number of reminders  
c) Number of urgent messages  
d) Number of messages needing a callback  
e) Number of private messages  
f) Number of fax messages  
2
4
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
ACCESS MANAGER  
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:  
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,  
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials  
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their cur-  
rent status when you access them.  
a) Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use  
the system directory.  
70  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System  
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:  
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet-  
ing during the night (when you are not available).  
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It  
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.  
1
Follow Me  
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new  
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an  
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or  
changing the number where you can be reached.  
8
,
0
#
Pause / Resume  
Exit from Access Manager  
Play All Options  
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.  
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at  
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.  
Play Access Coverage  
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.  
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions  
you have setup.  
3
4
Call Blocking  
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,  
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your  
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.  
5
Call Forwarding  
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter-  
nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to  
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of  
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If  
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow  
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.  
The Caller will hearForwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}before actually being  
forwarded.  
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System  
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest sys-  
tems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be acces-  
sible in more complex systems.  
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension  
and you do not answer.  
5
6
Call Screening  
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them  
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you  
may assign any of your 9 greetings.The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,  
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to  
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of  
your telephone.  
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung  
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option  
to accept or reject the call.  
Find Me  
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list  
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered  
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored tele-  
phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.  
The Find Me feature only use the first five.  
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select-  
ed by the following digits:  
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting  
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you  
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will  
play for all call coverage conditions.  
7
Night Intercept  
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is  
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When  
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension  
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic  
Greeting' feature.  
72  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Edit Personal Greetings  
Example:“Hi this is John Smith.I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.  
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to  
leave me a message, press 1.”  
6
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.  
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your  
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to lis-  
ten to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return  
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the  
greeting.  
2
Busy Greeting  
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension  
or the telephone at your Designated Location.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy  
Greeting' feature.  
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call  
Coverage Condition,then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage  
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,  
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else  
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,  
press 1.”  
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting  
3
Call Blocking Greeting  
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any  
of the Call Coverage greetings.The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox  
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail-  
box using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.  
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone  
is forwarded ALL or DND.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Blocking' feature.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be  
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please  
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as  
soon as I can.”  
4
Night Greeting  
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has  
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another  
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans-  
fer the caller directly to your Mailbox.  
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after  
business hours during the evening and at night.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Scheduling' feature.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would  
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave  
me a message, press 1.”  
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
5
Call Screening Greeting  
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening  
to the caller's record name.  
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica-  
tion, message alert options and other message control features.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Screening' feature.  
1
Message Alert  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside  
or inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with  
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension  
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail  
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed  
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your pass-  
word and you will now be logged in.  
74  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Setting Up Message Alert:  
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet  
been picked up by the recipient.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [1] for Message Alert.  
5
6
Auto Play New Messages  
There are 4 options available to you:  
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new  
messages will immediately begin to play. To enable (or if already enabled  
toggle and disable) this feature:  
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.  
2
Pager Notification  
Auto Play Message Information  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper  
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played auto-  
matically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be  
requested manually by pressing ‘00. To enable (or if already enabled toggle  
and disable) this feature:  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [2] for pager notification.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
There are 4 options available to you:  
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.  
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.  
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST  
3
Undelete  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to  
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the pro-  
grammed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the  
following morning).  
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System  
Administrator.  
Broadcast to All Mailboxes  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a  
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.  
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.  
Deleted voicemail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.  
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously delet-  
ed messages, during this period of time.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.  
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned  
Subscriber Administration privileges.  
4
Undelivered Retrieval  
When this function is activated,the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall  
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the  
recipient.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.  
76  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS  
#
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely  
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.  
You probably will not need to change them after that.  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your  
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.  
1
Setting your Password  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].  
1
Workload Management  
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to  
change it.  
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized  
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for bet-  
ter organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending  
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).  
2
Recording your Name  
Use this option to record your name.Your recorded name is played in several  
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation  
of the Samsung Voicemail system.  
2
Stored Numbers  
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are  
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using  
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features  
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert, “Pager  
Alert, and “Direct Call”).  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].  
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change  
it.  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your  
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
3
5
Schedule Availability  
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal  
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions  
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to  
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.  
3
Entering your Directory Name  
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by  
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].  
Place a Direct Call  
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are  
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the  
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last  
name and then your first name.  
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any-  
where. You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corre-  
sponds to a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This  
feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited  
or opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.  
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)  
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
7
Personal Administration  
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next  
section).  
4
Extended Prompting  
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the  
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are  
very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail.  
78  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any  
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled  
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber  
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find  
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.  
AME Password  
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your  
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized  
people from listening to messages being left for you.  
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flash-  
ing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your SVMi E-Series pass-  
word).You will then hear the message being left.  
KEYSET USER FEATURES  
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup  
by the System Administrator.  
Call Record  
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any  
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will  
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.  
Message Waiting Lights  
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voicemail message light on your  
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to  
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber  
Main Menu.  
Answer Machine Emulation  
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you  
can use it to monitor calls going to your voicemail, and optionally answer them.  
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering  
machine.  
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voicemail. After ringing your  
station the caller will be connected to your voicemail and hear your personal  
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the  
connection between the caller and your voicemail box. At this time you will only  
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You  
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.  
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit  
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (dur-  
ing forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.  
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:  
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.  
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to  
leave a message normally.  
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.  
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).  
80  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
SHORTCUTS  
Calling  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately  
send the call to the called parties mailbox.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
Call Divert to Voicemail  
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller  
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer set-  
ting.  
Direct Messaging  
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav-  
ing to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a  
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly.If you dial a busy exten-  
sion press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.  
Self Memo (Reminder)  
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind  
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future  
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.  
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS  
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays  
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the vol-  
ume, get message information, or help.  
Viewing Mailbox Contents  
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you  
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the  
Samsung Voicemail.  
82  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
N O T E S  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5121D  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
N O T E S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home Page  
Table of Contents  
ITP-5107S  
ITP-5107S User Guide  
For OfficeServ100, OfficeServ500,  
OfficeServ7000 Series  
04/2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
ABOUT THIS BOOK ....................................................................................1  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ................................................2–6  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET ........................................................7  
ITP-5107S SETUP....................................................................................8–13  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
Making an Outside Call................................................................................................14  
Answering an Outside Call..........................................................................................14  
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................14  
Recall/Flash ......................................................................................................................15  
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ............................................................................15  
Canceling Callback ........................................................................................................15  
INTERCOM CALLS  
Calling Other Stations ..................................................................................................16  
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................16  
Answer Modes ................................................................................................................16  
Busy Station Callback....................................................................................................17  
Busy Station Camp-on..................................................................................................17  
Calling Your System Operator....................................................................................18  
CALL PROCESSING  
Holding Calls ............................................................................................................19–20  
Transferring Calls ....................................................................................................20–21  
Transfer with Camp-On................................................................................................21  
Transfer to Voicemail ....................................................................................................21  
Call Waiting ......................................................................................................................21  
Conference Calls ............................................................................................................22  
Forwarding Calls......................................................................................................23–24  
Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................25  
My Group Pickup............................................................................................................25  
Privacy Release................................................................................................................26  
Copyright 2007 Samsung Telecommunications America.  
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,  
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—  
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.  
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in  
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior  
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing  
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from  
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIALING FEATURES  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
Speed Dialing ..................................................................................................................27  
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..............................................27–28  
One Touch Speed Dialing............................................................................................28  
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................28  
Manual Retry with Redial ............................................................................................29  
Save Number with Redial............................................................................................29  
Chain Dialing....................................................................................................................29  
Automatic Redial/Retry................................................................................................29  
Pulse to Tone Changeover ..........................................................................................30  
Memo Redialing..............................................................................................................30  
AME Password ................................................................................................................41  
Auto Camp-On ................................................................................................................41  
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................41  
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................41  
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ....................................................................................42  
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................42  
Automatic Hold ..............................................................................................................42  
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................42  
Hot Keypad ......................................................................................................................43  
Key Confirmation Tone ................................................................................................43  
Rejoining a Page ............................................................................................................43  
Ring Preference ..............................................................................................................43  
Auto Answer CO Calls ..................................................................................................44  
Display Speed Dial Name............................................................................................44  
Caller ID Review All........................................................................................................44  
Secure OHVA ....................................................................................................................44  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
Making an Internal Page..............................................................................................31  
Making an External Page ............................................................................................31  
All Page ..............................................................................................................................31  
Meet Me Page..................................................................................................................32  
Call Park and Page..........................................................................................................32  
Messages—Set and Cancel ........................................................................................33  
Returning Messages......................................................................................................33  
Programmed Messages................................................................................................34  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
Interactive Display Keys ..............................................................................................45  
Directory Information ................................................................................................ 45  
Call Log ..............................................................................................................................46  
Dial by Name....................................................................................................................46  
Call Progress Displays ..................................................................................................47  
Display Number Dialed ................................................................................................47  
Call Duration Timer........................................................................................................47  
Auto Timer ........................................................................................................................47  
Timer Function ................................................................................................................47  
Viewing Message Indications ....................................................................................48  
Alarm Reminder Messages..................................................................................48–49  
Personal Speed Dial Names........................................................................................49  
Station Names .................................................................................................................49  
Managing Key Assignments .......................................................................................50  
LCR with Clear .................................................................................................................50  
Backspace with LCR ......................................................................................................50  
Text Messaging ......................................................................................................51–52  
Caller ID .....................................................................................................................53–57  
ANI .............................................................................................................................54–57  
CLI ..............................................................................................................................54–57  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................................................35  
One Time DND ................................................................................................................35  
Mute ....................................................................................................................................35  
Background Music ........................................................................................................35  
Established Call Pick-Up ..............................................................................................36  
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock ....................................................................36  
Door Phone Calls............................................................................................................37  
Executive/Secretary Hotline ......................................................................................37  
Executive Divert..............................................................................................................37  
Group Listening ..............................................................................................................38  
Account Codes ................................................................................................................38  
Locking Your Keyset ......................................................................................................38  
Manual Signalling ..........................................................................................................39  
Off-Hook Voice Announce ..........................................................................................39  
OHVA Block ......................................................................................................................40  
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................40  
In Group/Out of Group ................................................................................................40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Samsung Voicemail..................................................................................58  
Accessing your Mailbox ............................................................................................59  
Subscriber Services Menu Diagram .................................................................60–61  
Getting Started ...............................................................................................................62  
Listen to your Messages .............................................................................................62  
Subscriber Services Menu .........................................................................................62  
Listening to Old or New Messages .........................................................................63  
Group New or Old Messages .....................................................................................64  
Record and Send a Message......................................................................................64  
Access Manager ......................................................................................................65  
Personal Greetings ................................................................................................67  
Mailbox Administration .......................................................................................69  
Message Broadcast ......................................................................................................71  
Personal Services ....................................................................................................72  
Personal Administration Settings ............................................................................73  
Keyset User Features ....................................................................................................74  
Shortcuts ..........................................................................................................................76  
Interactive Displays .......................................................................................................76  
ABOUT THIS BOOK  
Samsung’s new OfficeServ Technology keyset model, ITP-5107S, is part of the  
OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 Series.  
The ITP-5107S IP keyset represents a new concept of Internet phone, in that it uses  
an IP address to Send/Receive voice and data. For voice communications, the ITP-  
5107S uses the data network line already in place in most offices and increasing  
number of homes.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ............................77–78  
The ITP-5107S keysets incorporate an LCD screen, which provides important infor-  
mation for the user, to make using the keyset easier and more convenient.  
Your keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system. Please take the time  
to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your keyset. Keep  
this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for infrequently used  
features.  
Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica-  
tions a breeze.  
This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access  
codes. Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be  
changed. If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book,  
please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct  
code.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Some simple rules to remember:  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW  
Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use.  
A fast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in.  
A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold.  
A slow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset.  
USER ORIENTATION  
The ITP model telephones are called IP keysets.The IP keyset incorporates buttons  
orkeysthat are used to access or activate the many features of your office phone  
system. The ITP-5107S keyset incorporates 7 programmable buttons. Any of the  
system features or functions can be programmed to these buttons.  
FULL DUPLEX SPEAKERPHONE  
All ITP keysets are speakerphones. Pressing the FLASHING CALL BUTTON will  
answer an incoming call on the speakerphone. Pressing the SPEAKER button will  
release the call on the speakerphone.  
The three buttons above the row of programmable buttons are soft keys. These  
buttons assist in the use of the system features and functions.  
Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy. Simply press the SPEAK-  
ER button and hang up the handset.  
Lines from the telephone company areC.O. lines.Calls on these lines are referred  
to as “outside calls.Your system can have individual C.O. line keys or lines may be  
assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an  
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press a “LOCALbut-  
ton to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing theLCRbut-  
ton will automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits  
are dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703,  
etc.  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
The ITP-5107S keyset uses the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume  
while the keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use  
and the handset volume while you are listening. These three levels will be stored  
in memory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset, the vol-  
ume buttons will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard  
through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by  
using the volume buttons.There are 16 levels for each volume setting.The volume  
of off-hook ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.  
Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons are programmed to ring specific stations.  
You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number.  
CALL INDICATIONS  
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR  
The buttons on your phone have light emitting diodes (LEDs).These are tri-colored  
LEDs that light green, red or amber (green and red together).  
The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key-  
set above the display.The terminal status indicator is a tri-colored (red, green, and  
amber) light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi-  
vidual button LEDs. The terminal status indicator provides the following indica-  
tions:  
Intercom calls, also called internal calls, always appear on your CALL buttons.They  
will always light green.You can have up to eight CALL buttons, but at least two are  
recommended.  
Outside calls appear on individual line buttons if they are assigned. When an indi-  
vidual line is not assigned to its own button, it will appear on a CALL button.  
Busy/Off Hook  
Intercom Ring  
Outside Call Ring  
Recall Ring  
Message Waiting  
Do Not Disturb  
Steady Red  
Flashing Red  
Flashing Green  
Flashing Amber  
Flashing Red  
Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets. You  
never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold.They stay right where you put  
them and are identified with a green flashing light.  
Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals  
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CONFERENCE BUTTON  
SYSTEM TONES  
The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to 5 parties (sta-  
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already  
familiar to you.  
tion or trunk).  
Intercom Dial Tone—A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing.  
TRANSFER BUTTON  
DIAL TONE  
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways.You can  
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can  
do a blind transfer without notification.  
CONTINUOUS  
Ringback Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is ringing.  
HOLD BUTTON  
RINGBACK TONE—1000 ms ON/3000 ms OFF  
The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset, while enabling you to call  
CONTINUOUS  
other stations or consult coworkers in confidence.  
SPEAKER BUTTON  
Busy Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is busy.  
The SPEAKER button allows you to initiate a conversation from the keyset with-  
out lifting the handset or switch to speaker phone mode if you are currently on  
handset.  
BUSY TONE—500 ms ON/500 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
FEATURE ACCESS CODES  
DND/No More Calls Tone—Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed  
is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls.  
This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea-  
tures. If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes  
may not be correct.Your installing company can inform you of the correct codes.  
DND/NO MORE CALLS TONE—250 ms ON/250 ms OFF  
FOR TEN SECONDS  
Transfer/Conference Tone—Indicates your call is being held and you  
can dial another party.  
TRANSFER/CONF TONE—100 ms ON/100 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
Confirmation Tone—Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you  
have correctly set or canceled a system feature.  
CONFIRMATION TONE—50 ms ON/50 ms OFF  
FOR ONE SECOND  
(programmable)  
Error Tone—A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done  
something incorrectly.Try again.  
ERROR TONE—50 ms of tone 1/50 ms of tone 2  
FOR THREE SECONDS  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ITP-5107S  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET  
Soft Button  
LCD Panel  
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.  
Status Indicator  
Scroll Button  
Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the  
upper section of the bottom panel. Push towards the top of the keyset to lock  
in.  
Programmable  
Buttons (7)  
Keyset  
Support  
Volume Button  
Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the  
symbol.  
Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face  
Redial Button  
down.  
Conference Button  
Transfer Button  
Plug an eight-conductor ethernet cable, from the wall, into the jack marked  
LAN on the back of the keyset.(Connect the ITP keyset to any port on the local  
network).  
Hold Button  
Dial Button  
Microphone  
Speaker Button  
Plug the power connector, from the power adapter provided, into the power  
jack on the back of the keyset. The power adapter is not required if the ITP is  
connected to a LAN connection that provides power over the ethernet. The  
ITP-5107S supports the power over ethernet feature when it is connected to  
a IEEE 802.3af compliant LAN switch or power injector port.  
IMPORTANT NOTE:  
To prevent damaging the keyset, only use the Power Adapter that came with  
the 5107S keyset.  
This manual assumes that the ITP keysets are connected to a functioning local  
IP network. The local IP network must be able to communicate with the MCP  
and MGI card in the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, or in the OfficeServ 7000  
Series systems over IP. This is assumed regardless of whether the IP keyset is  
on a local or remote network.  
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
6.FACTORY RESET  
7.REBOOT  
ITP-5107S SETUP  
INITIALIZING THE ITP-5107S  
NAVIGATING THE MENUS  
Once the IP setup menu is displayed, you can move to each menu by using the  
buttons as described below:  
Initially the ITP-5107S IP keyset will need to be setup to operate within the users  
network.The Setup Menu is also used to make changes to the keyset, in the event  
that the system information should change. The option chosen via scroll key will  
be highlighted.  
The [0]~[9] dial buttons are used to directly choose a menu, or sub-menu  
options.  
The volume [M]~[L] buttons are used to move the cursor up or down to  
scroll through menu items.  
The SPEAKER button is used to select a menu item or to save data after entry.  
It functions as an “ENTER” or “OK” button.  
The HOLD button will take you out of the current sub-menu to one menu  
level up to previous screen. It functions as an “ESCAPE” or “CANCEL” button.  
In some entry fields, the HOLD button is used to backspace the cursor or to  
delete entered data.  
The station numbers will be automatically set by the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ  
500, and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems once the necessary information has  
been entered into the IP keyset. Enter ID and password of the server, as described  
below to register the phone.  
See your system administrator for specific Network and Server addresses. The  
addresses necessary to set up the ITP-5107S are:  
IP Address of the ITP  
Network Gateway Address  
Subnet Mask  
IP Address of System’s MCP  
User ID  
G
The [,] button on the dial pad is used to enter [ ] between IP address octets.  
Password  
SETUP MENU  
TO GET TO THE SET-UP MENU, UNPLUG THE POWER FROM THE ITP-5107S  
PHONE OR UNPLUG THE LAN CABLE IF USING POWER OVER ETHERNET,  
PRESS AND HOLD THE , BUTTON ON THE DIAL PAD WHILE PLUGGING IN THE  
POWER CORD OR LAN CABLE IF USING POWER OVER ETHERNET BACK INTO  
THE PHONE. NOW RELEASE THE , BUTTON.  
>1.SYSTEM EASY WIZARD  
2.SYSTEM INFORMATION  
Other items not shown on screen when scrolling down.  
3.NETWORK SETUP  
5.SYSTEM SERVER SETUP  
6.FACTORY RESET  
4.LOAD & UPGRADE SETUP  
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
MENU STRUCTURE  
SETTING THE NETWORK PARAMETERS  
The IP SETUP MENU is configured as follows:  
Utilize the following programming steps to program the ITP-5107S keyset to  
operate within the users network. YOU CAN SELECT THE SYSTEM EASY WIZARD  
TO PROGRAM ALL REQUIRED NETWORK PARAMETERS IF YOU WANT TO SET  
UP THESE PARAMETERS INDIVIDUALLY FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS BELOW.  
1. SYSTEM EASY WIZARD  
This option will guide you through setting up all required parameters for con-  
necting the ITP keyset to your system.  
Network Parameter Setup  
Get into the SETUP MODE as shown on page  
2. SYSTEM INFORMATION  
3.NETWORK MODE SET UP  
1. Version Info: Provides boot rom, software, DSP, and hardware version  
8. From the Setup,Main Menu,select [3. NET-  
information.  
WORK SETUP] to set or modify the network  
parameters. Scroll to this option using the  
volume [M]~[L] button and press SPEAKER.  
2. Network Info: Displays network mode, IP address of phone, network, and  
gateway information.  
3. Netmask  
4. Gateway  
Select the Network Mode Setup and press  
SPEAKER, the LCD will display this message.  
>1.MANUAL IP  
Note that items 2 to 4 are only displayed when setting Manual IP.  
2.DHCP  
3. NETWORK SETUP  
If [1. MANUAL IP] is selected, the user must enter the IP address of the IP key-  
set. Then enter the subnet mask, and gateway value for the customer net-  
work.  
This menu allows you to individually setup the same parameters found in the  
Easy Wizard.  
4. LOAD & UPGRADE SETUP  
If [2. DHCP] is selected, the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway value will  
be obtained automatically (if a DHCP server is present).  
1. Upgrade TFTP Server:The IP address of the TFTP server containing the ITP  
software.  
2. Upgrade Start: Starts the ITP software upgrade process.  
Setting IP Manually  
5. SYSTEM SERVER SETUP  
From the “Network Mode Setup” Menu,  
select [1. MANUAL IP] and press  
SPEAKER. Next, press the HOLD button  
twice to get to the NETWORK SETUP  
MENU as seen here.  
1.NETWORK MODE SET UP  
2.IP ADDRESS SET UP  
1. Server IP Address:The MCP’s IP address.  
2. Server ID: The ID assigned to your ITP (see your phone administrator for  
this information).  
3. Server Pass:The password assigned to your ITP (see your phone adminis-  
tratror for this information).  
3.NETMASK SETUP  
4.GATEWAY SETUP  
Enter the IP keyset’s IP address, the net-  
work’s netmask and gateway as shown.  
6. FACTORY RESET  
This option resets ITP to factory default settings.  
Select the [2. IP ADDRESS SET UP]  
menu and press SPEAKER, the LCD will  
display this message and the user can  
enter its IP address.  
INPUT IP ADDRESS& PRESS OK  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
7. REBOOT  
This option reboots the ITP.  
Check if there is any currently saved IP address of the phone on the LCD. If the IP  
address has not been set, the LCD displays nothing. The user can enter the IP  
address using [0]-[9] dial buttons and [,] button for entering a “.” Save that IP  
address by pressing the SPEAKER button. Use the HOLD button to backspace.  
10  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Select the [3. NETMASK SET UP] menu  
and press SPEAKER, the LCD will display  
the following message and the user can  
enter a new Netmask IP address. Use the  
HOLD button to backspace.  
System Server Setup  
INPUT NETMASK & PRESS OK  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
From the Main Setup Menu, the fifth item [5. SYSTEM SERVER SET UP] sets or  
modifies settings related to registering the phone to the MCP. You can obtain this  
information from your system administrator. The screen below is displayed.  
Check if there is any currently saved subnet mask address of the phone on the  
LCD. If the subnet mask address has not been set, the display will show nothing.  
Press any dial buttons from [0]-[9] and [,] button to enter the subnet mask IP  
address and then save that subnet mask IP address by pressing the SPEAKER but-  
ton. Use the HOLD button to backspace.  
1.SERVER IP ADDRESS  
You can set/modify the IP address of the MCP at the [1. SERVER IP ADDRESS] item.  
The screen below is displayed when you enter the item. The server IP is the IP  
address of the MCP2/MCP.  
Select [4. GATEWAY SET UP] menu and  
press SPEAKER, the LCD will display the  
following message and the user can  
enter a new gateway address.  
INPUT GATEWAY & PRESS OK  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
INPUT SERVER IP ADDRESS  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
Check if there is any currently saved Gateway IP address of the phone on the LCD.  
If the gateway IP address has not been set, the LCD displays nothing.The user can  
enter the gateway IP address by using [0]-[9] and [,] button and can save that IP  
address by pressing the SPEAKER button. Use the HOLD button to backspace.  
You can confirm the current IP address of the MCP at the LCD panel. The address  
is left blank if it is not set. Use the dial buttons from [0]-[9], and [,] to set the IP  
address and press the SPEAKER button to save and exit. Select the [2. SERVER  
ID] menu. Use the HOLD button to backspace.  
NOTE: In the [3. NETWORK SET UP MENU], [1. NETWORK MODE SETUP] option,  
when [2. DHCP] is selected the IP address, Netmask, and Gateway will not be dis-  
played on the LCD. Press HOLD to exit to Main Menu.  
INPUT SYSTEM ID  
Load and Upgrade Set/Modify  
The fourth item [4. LOAD & UPGRADE SET UP] sets or modifies the IP phone’s  
software version. Use extreme caution when upgrading the keyset. Only use this  
if you are upgrading your IP keyset firmware.  
You must input the ID assigned to your ITP phone. See your phone system admin-  
istrator to get this value. Press the SPEAKER button to save and exit. Select the [3.  
SERVER PASS] item.  
INPUT SYSTEM PASSWORD  
Select the [4. LOAD & UPGRADE SET UP] item and move to the lower level. The  
screen below is displayed.  
1.UPGRADE TFTP SERVER  
2.UPGRADE START  
You must input the password associated with your ID. See your phone system  
administrator to get this value. Press HOLD to backspace. Press the SPEAKER but-  
ton to save and exit.  
Select option [1. UPGRADE TFTP SERVER] and enter the IP address of the TFTP  
server containing the ITP software. Use [0]-[9] and [,] button to enter the IP  
address. Press SPEAKER to save.  
Completion of Settings  
From the main menu, select the seventh item [7. REBOOT] to save all modified  
settings and reboot the ITP-5107S phone.  
Select option [2. UPGRADE START] and press SPEAKER to start the upgrade  
process. Press HOLD to exit.  
12  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
RECALL DIAL TONE  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and then  
make a new call on the same line.  
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH button may be  
programmed to recall dial tone.  
Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button,line group button or dial  
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—press an idle outside line button,  
line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the  
speaker—OR—press SPEAKER, receive intercom dial tone and dial a line  
access code.  
SENDING A FLASH  
While on an outside call, press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone  
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.  
Dial the telephone number.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.  
NOTE: You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and  
there is no button available for that line.  
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK  
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that  
the line or group of lines is busy.  
If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may be  
labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).  
If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making  
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44. You will hear confirmation  
tone.  
a call, dial , plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.  
If your system is programmed to require an account code before making a  
call, press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the ACC  
button again and then select a C.O.line.See Account Codes for more information.  
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.  
Lift the handset to answer, wait for dial tone and dial the telephone number  
or speed dial number again.  
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system  
administrator.  
NOTES:  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, your CBK button will light.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
CANCELING CALLBACK  
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call.  
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your KeysetOR—press the FLASHING  
CALL button to automatically answer on the speakerphone.  
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a  
callback, your CBK button will light.  
Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and/or stations set at a  
time. To cancel a callback:  
NOTE: If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flash-  
ing button to answer.  
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44. You will hear confirmation  
tone.  
While you are listening to confirmation tone, press the HOLD button.This will  
cancel the oldest set callback.  
UNIVERSAL ANSWER  
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer  
calls ringing this device, dial 67 or press the UA button.This device can operate in  
any one of the six different ring plans.  
NOTE: If the hot keypad feature is turned off,you must first lift the handset or press  
the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
14  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
BUSY STATION CALLBACK  
INTERCOM CALLS  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:  
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44.  
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.  
Lift the handset to call the now idle station.  
CALLING OTHER STATIONS  
Dial the extension number or group number.  
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback  
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin  
speaking immediately after the tone.  
NOTES:  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, your CBK button will light.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
NOTES:  
1. If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may  
press this button instead of dialing the number.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to  
wait for a callback:  
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS  
MANUAL CAMP-ON  
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the FLASHING  
CALL button to be connected to the calling station.  
To finish the call, replace the handset.  
Press the CAMP button or dial 45.  
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds  
and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait-  
ing.  
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.  
Wait for the called party to answer.  
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer-  
ing your camp-on.  
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
you will hear the caller’s announcement.  
NOTES:  
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to  
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
Press the FLASHING CALL button to turn on the microphone and speak  
handsfree—OR— lift the handset to reply.  
To finish the call, replace the handset.  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
ON.  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the  
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for  
auto camp-on.  
AUTO ANSWER MODE  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
then automatically answer the call.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 081 to turn on auto camp-on or 080 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree.For  
privacy, use the handset.  
To finish the call, replace the handset.  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
ON.  
16  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR  
CALL PROCESSING  
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.  
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.  
SYSTEM HOLD  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD. The call will flash green at  
your keyset.If this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash red  
at those keysets.  
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the green flashing light will  
go steady green again. Resume the conversation.  
NOTE:While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing CALL button  
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See  
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.  
EXCLUSIVE HOLD  
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:  
Press the HOLD button twice.The call will flash green on your keyset and this  
line will show a steady red light on other keysets.  
To retrieve the call, press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD  
button a third time.  
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.  
REMOTE HOLD  
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station. Press TRANSFER and a  
dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS button). Press the HOLD  
button.This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line  
Button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.  
NOTES:  
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons  
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by press-  
ing the TRANSFER button (or the RETURN soft key in the display).  
2. Intercom calls cannot be remote held.  
HOLD RECALL  
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station.The  
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light.  
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the FLASHING CALL button  
to answer the recall.  
18  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
first station to hang up, simply press another DSS button. OR  
Home Page  
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will  
go to the system operator.  
Press the CALL button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and  
begin the transfer process again.  
CONSULTATION HOLD  
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto  
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.  
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth-  
er extension:  
NOTES:  
Press the TRANSFER button; you will receive transfer dial tone. Your call is  
placed on transfer hold.  
Dial the extension number.  
Consult with the internal party.  
Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.  
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the  
parties by pressing the TRANSFER button.  
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to re-  
ceive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the other party.  
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press  
the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number.  
NOTE:Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside  
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the  
parties by pressing the DROP button.  
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON  
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,  
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy  
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.  
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT  
ANOTHER STATION  
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to  
receive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller.  
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the line button with the  
red flashing light.  
TRANSFER TO VOICEMAIL  
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line  
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.  
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have  
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this.To transfer a call directly to  
a voice mailbox:  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.  
Hang up when dialing is completed.  
TRANSFERRING CALLS  
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You can  
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can  
do a blind transfer without notification.  
CALL WAITING  
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has  
camped-on to you:  
While on a call, press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or  
group number.Your call is automatically put on transfer hold. OR  
Press a DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on  
transfer hold.  
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer).  
OR  
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you  
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate  
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.  
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automati-  
cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press  
HOLD and then the flashing button OR  
Wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and hang up.  
If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line when the  
called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside  
party. If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the  
20  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.  
Lift the handset.  
FORWARDING CALLS  
You may forward your calls to another station, group of stations or an external  
telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as  
detailed below. If you have FWD ALL, FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER buttons,  
press one to turn that forward feature on. A steady red light reminds you what for-  
ward condition is activated.  
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.  
CONFERENCE CALLS  
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of  
outside lines and internal stations in any order.  
You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset  
and dialing 600.  
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONF button and receive confer-  
ence tone.  
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONF button and  
receive conference tone.  
Make another call or press the CONF button to join all parties.  
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.  
FORWARD ALL CALLS  
To forward all your calls under any condition to another station:  
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not  
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONF button again to  
return to your previous conversation.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for-  
warded station. This is useful when you are expecting an important call but  
you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.  
To drop a party from your conference call:  
Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped.  
Press CONF again to reestablish the conference.  
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she  
does not have a FORWARD ALL button, the TRANSFER button will light to in-  
dicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred  
elsewhere.  
NOTE:To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal sta-  
tion. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect-  
ed together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONF button plus the CALL  
button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use  
your extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release automatically.  
Press CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.  
FORWARD BUSY  
To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone:  
CONFERENCE SPLITTING  
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold  
feature turned on (See Customizing Your Keyset) and all of the outside lines involved  
in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset, you can split the conference  
into separate calls as follows:  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing.  
Press any one of the outside line buttons.That outside line will remain steady  
green to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines in the  
conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom callers  
in the conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each caller  
privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference.  
FORWARD NO ANSWER  
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer:  
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
22  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR  
Dial 1-5 to select the forward type OR  
FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER  
If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti-  
nation programmed, you may set both of these at the same time:  
Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type.  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.  
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
Dial 1 to set OR  
Dial 604.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO  
Press TRANSFER to store and exit  
FORWARD FOLLOW ME  
STATION CALL PICKUP  
When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you  
are now:  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65  
plus the extension number of the ringing phone.  
Dial 606 plus your extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this  
DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station.  
If you want a specific extension's calls forwarded to your phone (Remote Call  
Forward):  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Dial 606 plus the desired extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
GROUP CALL PICKUP  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66  
plus the desired group number or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP button if  
available.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
FORWARD DND  
GROUP NUMBERS  
01-20  
01-99  
01-99  
01-99  
OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100  
OfficeServ 500 M  
OfficeServ 500 L  
To forward your phone when you activate DND.  
Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
NOTES:  
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code.  
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS  
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call  
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea-  
tures. To review or change call forward options:  
MY GROUP PICKUP  
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same  
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the  
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access  
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.  
Press TRANSFER 102.  
The display will indicate the current call forward condition and destination  
OR  
Show 0:FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set.  
24  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PRIVACY RELEASE  
DIALING FEATURES  
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri-  
vacy on the C.O. from your phone.  
SPEED DIALING  
To Release Privacy:  
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide  
speed dial list of numbers 500~999 or from your personal list of numbers 00~49.  
While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other internal parties (or  
up to three) join the conversation.  
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial  
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.  
Press the PRB button (the PRB button will light steady red). Inform the other  
party that he/she may now join the conversation.  
With the handset on-hook, press the MEMORY button or dial 16.  
Dial the desired speed dial number.  
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.  
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to  
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the  
PRB button a second time, the PRB button will be off.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
To Join a Non-Private Conversation:  
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED  
DIAL NUMBERS  
When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation:  
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated.  
OR  
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.  
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial  
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system admin-  
istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 105.  
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).  
Dial a line or line group access code.  
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,  
,, FLASH and PAUSE.  
Press TRANSFER to store the number.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
26  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
For the purposes of pro-  
gramming speed dial num-  
bers, the programmable but-  
tons are known as A, B, C, D, E  
and F.  
A B C D E F  
MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL  
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial  
the same number dialed.  
Press the REDIAL button.  
The A button is not used.  
The B button inserts a  
flash.  
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.  
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.  
The C button inserts a  
pause.  
The D button is used for  
NOTE: If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will  
access the call log when pressed.  
pulse to tone conversion.If your system uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O.lines,  
pressing D while entering a speed dial number causes all subsequent digits to  
be sent as DTMF tones.  
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL  
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SNR button before  
hanging up.  
The E button is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide  
some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display. When you  
are entering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hid-  
den. Press E again to begin displaying digits.  
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SNR button or dial 17.The same  
line will be selected for you.  
The F button is used to enter a name. See Personal Speed Dial Names under  
Display Features.  
Use the HOLD button to clear a speed dial number.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another  
number.  
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING  
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed  
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.  
CHAIN DIALING  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.  
Dial the speed dial number (0049 or 500999) that you want assigned to  
this button.  
You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as  
many speed dial numbers together as required:  
After the first speed number is dialed, press MEMORY again and dial another  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num-  
ber.  
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.  
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system  
can automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-  
programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.  
LAST NUMBER REDIAL  
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the REDIAL buttonordial 19.  
When you hear a busy signal, press the RETRY button.  
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for  
you.You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker.The micro-  
phone is muted.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
28  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK-  
ER to begin speaking.  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
NOTES:  
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.  
2. To cancel a retry, lift and replace the handset.  
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE  
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:  
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the  
# with be sent as tones.  
MEMO REDIALING  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE  
and dial a zone number.  
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are  
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.  
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE  
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.  
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the keypad.  
Press SAVE to store the number.  
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8.  
OR  
To dial the number, press the SNR button. It will select the same line and dial the  
stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press the SNR  
button.  
Dial 9 to page all external zones.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE  
and dial a zone number.  
ALL PAGE  
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same  
time:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial , or press the ALL PAGE button.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
NOTE:The LED on the PAGE button will only light when an All Page is in progress.  
30  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
To retrieve an automatically parked call:  
MEET ME PAGE  
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,  
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK button,  
press it and dial the announced orbit number.  
Lift the handset.  
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.  
Dial the desired zone number.  
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.  
Press WAIT or TRANSFER.  
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.  
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
NOTES:  
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall  
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page  
intercom calls.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
CALL PARK AND PAGE  
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can  
park the call prior to paging. There are two different methods:  
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION  
MANUAL PARK ORBITS  
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy  
signal, you can leave a message indication:  
While in conversation, press the PARK button.  
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another  
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any  
available orbit number and see the number in the display.  
Remember the selected orbit number.  
Replace the handset when finished.  
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described  
(example:“John Smith park two”).  
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.  
Hang up. The MESSAGE button on the called station will light. Standard tele-  
phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message  
lamp,if the phone is equipped with one and they are connected to an 8MWSLI  
card (not available on the OfficeServ 100 or OfficeServ 7000 Series) or a  
16MWSLI card on the system.  
NOTES:  
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:  
1. A station can have up to five message indications.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
NOTES:  
CANCELING MESSAGES  
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls  
in park orbits.  
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it  
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park  
and page intercom calls.  
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the  
extension number of the station at which you left a message. To cancel all mes-  
sage indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension. Your MESSAGE  
light will go out.  
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON  
While in conversation, press the PAGE button.The call is automatically parked  
at your station.  
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.  
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.  
Hang up.  
RETURNING MESSAGES  
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43.The first station that left a message will  
be called automatically. If that station does not answer, your MESSAGE light  
will stay on.  
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.  
Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned.  
32  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NOTES:  
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any  
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must  
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
DO NOT DISTURB  
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.  
While on-hook, press the DND button or dial 401. The DND button lights  
steady red to remind you of this mode.  
To cancel DND, press the DND button again or dial 400. The DND light turns  
off.You can make calls while in the DND mode.  
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES  
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a  
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message  
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,  
your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status.  
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user  
guide.  
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
ONE TIME DND  
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you  
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you  
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your key-  
set will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.  
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can  
have a different message code:  
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the  
button will light red. Press the button again to turn off.  
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous  
one off and set a different programmed message.  
MUTE  
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa-  
tion:  
Press the MUTE button. It will light red.  
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The light turns off.  
BACKGROUND MUSIC  
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in  
your keyset:  
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.  
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.  
You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis-  
tening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.  
34  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP  
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE  
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a  
computer modem on your PC.  
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:  
You will receive three short rings repeated.  
Lift the handset.You are connected to the door phone.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati-  
cally moved to your keyset.  
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.  
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/  
ROOM MONITOR  
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for  
the single line station.  
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in  
another room.  
APPOINTMENT REMINDER/ALARM CLOCK  
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment  
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set  
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.  
Dial the extension number of the door phone.  
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con-  
versation.  
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the  
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times  
at five minute intervals.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
To set alarms:  
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM  
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Press TRANSFER to save.  
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.  
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secre-  
tary station.  
Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta-  
tion.  
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will light  
red when the other station is in use.  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
To cancel individual alarms:  
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Press the HOLD button.  
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button.  
Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete  
the transfer OR  
NOTE: Display keysets can show a reminder message. See Alarm Reminder  
Messages under Display Features.  
Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS button.  
EXECUTIVE DIVERT  
When the executive station is in DIVERT mode all of his/her calls will ring the  
secretary station.  
Press the DIVERT key to pass a call while ringing.  
36  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
To transfer all calls to the Secretary:  
1
2
0
LOCKED OUTGOING  
Hold Button LED Flashes  
LOCKED ALL CALLS  
Hold Button LED Solid  
UNLOCKED  
Press the DIVERT button while the phone is idle.The LED will be lit and all calls  
Make outside calls  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO (ACCESS DENIED)  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
will ring the secretary.  
Receive outside calls  
Make intercom calls  
Receive intercom calls  
YES  
YES  
YES  
The secretary can call the BOSS in the DIVERT mode but all other users will ring  
the secretary (the secretary can override the boss’ DIVERT).  
GROUP LISTENING  
MANUAL SIGNALLING  
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want  
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:  
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta-  
tion, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or  
ringing).  
Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker.The microphone is not in use,  
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.  
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.  
Repeat if necessary.  
To send a signal to another station:  
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.  
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the des-  
ignated station.  
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be  
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up.This will elim-  
inate a momentary squeal.  
NOTE: Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station  
number extender assigned to it.  
ACCOUNT CODES  
When equipped with optional equipment, your system will allow calls to be  
charged to a specific account.  
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE  
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling sta-  
tion must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA  
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.  
During any outside C.O. call, press the account (ACC) button.  
Enter the 3 digit account code bin number when prompted, OR  
If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code (maximum 12  
characters including Q and #) and press ACC000 again, OR  
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announce-  
ment in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF  
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the  
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be  
heard through the speaker.  
If your button has an extender other than 000 (001~999) account code con-  
tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your.  
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET  
To make an off-hook voice announcement:  
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away.You  
can unlock it when you return.Your default station passcode is 1234.  
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.  
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.  
After the attention tone, begin speaking.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 100.  
Dial your four digit station passcode.  
Dial 1 to locking outgoing, 2 for locked all calls, or 0 to unlock.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset. This will place the original  
party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.  
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original  
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.  
38  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NOTES:  
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to  
avoid an echo effect.  
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
AME PASSWORD  
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protec-  
tion. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being  
left.The passcode is the same as your station passcode.This feature only applies if  
there is an Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a  
programmed AME button.  
OHVA BLOCK  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) button. Pressing  
this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the  
button again and cancel the blocking.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
OHVA REJECT  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) button. Pressing  
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing  
party and return you to your original call.  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when  
a busy station is called.  
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP  
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from  
the group and then put it back in.While you are out of the group, you can receive  
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an  
IN/OUT button with the group number assigned.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Press the IN/OUT button. It will light red when your keyset is in the group.  
Press the IN/OUT button again to exit the group and turn the light off. Repeat  
as necessary.  
SELECT RING TONE  
Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies:  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 111.  
Dial 18 or press the UP and DOWN buttons to hear each tone.  
When you hear the tone that you prefer, press TRANSFER to save it.  
If you do not have an IN/OUT button:  
Dial the IN/OUT access code number ________________, then the group  
number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.  
NOTE: Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different  
tone than what you have selected for your keyset.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press SPEAKER button.  
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE  
The IN/OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that  
this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can de-  
cide for which groups you will receive calls.  
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station pass-  
code whenever you desire.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 101.  
Dial your old passcode.  
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters).You can use 09.  
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four  
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.  
Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode.  
40  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
HOT KEYPAD  
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)  
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be madeliveorhotso that it is  
not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin  
dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line  
number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code. To ac-  
tivate this feature:  
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls  
under Intercom Calls for descriptions):  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 103.  
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)  
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.  
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110  
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.  
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the  
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
AUTOMATIC HOLD  
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing CALL  
button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call.  
This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.  
REJOINING A PAGE  
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page  
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
NOTE: Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER.  
HEADSET OPERATION  
RING PREFERENCE  
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using  
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset. This  
method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at your keyset.When you  
turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button to answer a call, allow-  
ing you to answer calls in the order you choose.  
headset mode, press the FLASHING CALL button to answer and release calls.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button. If it is so equipped  
pressing this button while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset  
mode and the light will illuminate to indicate this. Pressing the button while the  
light is lit will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out.  
AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS  
This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer. When  
a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound  
two beeps, the same as when a screened transfer is completed, and you will be  
43  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
connected to the CO call. In order for this option to work the station must also be  
programmed for auto answer (see SET ANSWER MODE).  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
While on hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer CO on or 150 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS  
The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac-  
cess codes. Pressing one of these buttons has the same effect as pressing a pro-  
grammable button. These buttons are called soft keys as their functions are not  
fixed.They change to present you with the best options for that call condition.The  
use of soft keys allows the programmable buttons to be used for more DSS and  
speed dial buttons.  
NOTE: Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to  
work. Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer.  
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME  
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as  
it is dialed.  
The SCROLL button is used to display options available to the user at a particular  
time or during a specific procedure. Press this button once while in the idle state  
to view the three main categories available.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
201: STN NAME  
CALL OTHER ANS  
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL  
ANSWER: Guides you through the options to answer calls.  
OTHER: Guides you through features other than making or answering calls.  
CALL: Guides you through the options to make a call.  
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls  
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in,first out basis.  
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that  
you did not answer.When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the  
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.  
Select one of the main categories: CALL, OTHER or ANS (ANSWER). Press the  
SCROLL button to display additional options available under each of the three  
main categories.The symbol ¬ displayed as the last character on the lower line of  
the display indicates that there are additional options. Press the SCROLL button to  
display these additional options.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters. Options assigned to soft  
keys will be in upper case letters.  
SECURE OHVA  
This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the  
handset.  
DIRECTORY INFORMATION  
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.  
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an-  
swering.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP-ON on or 130 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be  
easily identified and answered with different greetings.  
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]  
where xxx is the station group number.This allows you to answer calls directed to  
you differently than calls directed to your group.  
45  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALL LOG  
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS  
The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele-  
phone. You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a  
review list.  
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is  
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER  
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall  
from 204], [Call for 501], [message frm 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you in-  
formed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are  
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.  
Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are assigned in  
blocks of 10 each.  
Press the LOG key.  
Press either the IN or OUT key.  
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED  
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the dis-  
play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is  
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed  
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.  
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of  
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll  
through your list of calls.  
Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list.  
Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name, Number, or Date associated  
with this call.  
CALL DURATION TIMER  
Press the DIAL key to call this number.  
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you  
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately  
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call dura-  
tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 min-  
utes, the timer restarts.  
These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.  
DIAL BY NAME  
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A sta-  
tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a  
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial  
any station or speed dial number in seconds.  
You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to  
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is  
restarted.  
AUTO TIMER  
Press the DIR button (DIRECTORY).  
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer  
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.  
Select the directory you wish to use: PERS (personal speed dial numbers), SYS  
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).  
Dial the key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you  
wish to search for.  
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.  
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
TIMER FUNCTION  
NOTE: A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above  
lists (PERS, SYS, or STN).  
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.  
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.  
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.  
Read the elapsed time in the display.  
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.  
46  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIAL 7  
DIAL 8  
DIAL 9  
DIAL ,  
NOTES:  
P
T
W
:
Q
U
X
=
R
V
Y
[
S
Q
Z
]
7
8
9
,
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS  
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:  
With the handset on-hook, press the MESSAGE button with the red flashing  
light.  
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.  
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes-  
sage indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next mes-  
sage.  
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-  
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.  
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.  
ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES  
(See also Special Application Menu-Name Search)  
To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message:  
When you use the alarm/appointment reminder feature, you create a 16 charac-  
ter reminder message. When the alarm rings, your message will appear instead of  
[ALARM REMINDER]. To program reminder messages:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Press the HOLD button.  
Press the TRANSFER button.  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 116.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off.Enter the time as HHMM (hours and  
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES  
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.  
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.  
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a char-  
acter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For exam-  
ple, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.”  
Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters  
from the following table to complete your message.  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 106.  
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.  
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes-  
sages.  
Press the TRANSFER button to store the speed dial name.  
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.  
Press the TRANSFER button to store the alarm and reminder message.  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
COUNT  
DIAL 0  
DIAL 1  
DIAL 2  
DIAL 3  
DIAL 4  
DIAL 5  
DIAL 6  
1
2
>
?
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
STATION NAMES  
You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset.This allows other display key-  
set users to call you using the directory dial feature.  
<
space  
,
!
To program a station name:  
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
Press TRANSFER and then dial 104.  
Enter the 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind-  
er Messages.  
H
K
N
Press TRANSFER to store the name.  
L
O
M
48  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS  
TEXT MESSAGING  
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program-  
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.  
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro-  
grammed text messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or  
Station Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk  
and listen to your outside party.The other station can view this message and take  
the appropriate action or respond back with another text message.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons  
OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender.  
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.  
Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming.  
You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature. See your System  
Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature. They will assign you ten  
(10) blank messages.You can create any 16 character messages (01 to 10) that are  
appropriate for your use.  
Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal-  
lation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders  
for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.  
NOTE: See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac-  
ters to create a text message.  
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.  
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will  
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the  
UP/DOWN button to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.  
LCR WITH CLEAR  
When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can  
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to  
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.  
The basics steps in text messaging are:  
1. Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging.  
2. Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.  
3. Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.  
4. Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)  
5. When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their  
previous call progress condition.  
BACKSPACE WITH LCR  
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by press-  
ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary.  
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps  
2.  
The following example will better demonstrate how to use Text Messaging.In this  
example station 201 is making an off hook voice announcement to station 205  
who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text message.  
STATION 201: LINDA  
STATION 205: JOHN  
received a call on line 702  
is talking on line 701  
Talking on line 702  
702:  
01:15  
701:  
05:25  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
50  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Press TRANSFER  
CALLER ID  
Transfer:  
RETURN  
WHAT IS CALLER ID?  
Dial 205  
Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company-provided feature that de-  
livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your  
phone. There are two types of Caller ID; the first delivers the calling party’s tele-  
phone number only and the second (sometimes referred to as “Deluxe” Caller ID)  
delivers both the calling party’s telephone number and name as listed in the tele-  
phone directory.  
205:busy  
OHVA  
CAMP ON  
OHVA to 205  
OHVA from 201  
TMSG REJECT  
The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID; in fact, in the case of num-  
ber only delivery, the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific  
telephone number. However, even though you are paying to receive Caller ID  
information, there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in-  
formation. The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display  
information that the system will provide.  
Wait for reply  
GIVE THE CALL  
TMSG:01  
SEND  
Dial 03 or press twice  
PRIVATE  
The caller does not wish his/her name or number to be re-  
vealed to you. This type of call can be stopped at the tele-  
phone company by dialing an access code on your outside  
lines. This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce-  
ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that  
have had Caller ID blocked.The code to block these calls can  
usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc-  
tory.  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
TMSG:03  
SEND  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
Wait for reply  
TMSG  
EXIT  
702:  
01:45  
701:  
05:55  
OUT OF AREA  
PAYPHONE  
The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller  
ID information (for example, international calls) or he/she is  
calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID  
information, for example, some outbound WATS lines.  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
The caller is calling from a coin-operated telephone. The  
telephone company will send this information as there are  
no directory listings for pay phones.The number will be de-  
livered as usual.  
INVALID CID INFO  
NO CID RECEIVED  
This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa-  
tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted.  
This is a message that will be displayed when there was no  
CID information sent on the line.  
52  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NO CID DSP  
Caller ID Digital Signal Processors (CIDDSP’s) are resources  
in the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000  
Series systems required for receiving CID data. If there are  
no CIDDSP’s available at the time a call comes in, this is the  
message you will see on your display.  
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL  
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you  
can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with  
the call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in  
the display depending on your Name/Number selection.  
NOTE: The Caller ID features may require optional software and/or hardware.  
Please see your service and installation company for details.  
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,  
press the NEXT button. If your keyset does not have a NEXT button, press the CID  
button and then the NEXT soft key.  
WHAT IS ANI?  
[T1/E&M NOT SUPPORTED ON THE OS 7100]  
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) is a feature offered by some telephone  
service providers that provides the calling party’s telephone number. This service  
is only available on E&M Tie Lines on a T1, digital trunk. ANI is similar to Caller  
Identification (CID) but the format and information of the calling person is differ-  
ent. CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses DTMF signalling. Usually, with ANI, a call-  
ing party’s identity is the Listed Directory Number (LDN) unless a separate bill-to-  
number has been specified, (in which case the bill-to-number will be sent). Note  
that ANI does not provide calling party NAME,only the number.The phone system  
can provide calling number to name translation table.  
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press  
the SAVE button to save the CID number.If your keyset does not have a SAVE but-  
ton,press the CID button,the SCROLL button and then the SAVE soft key.The sys-  
tem must be using LCR to dial the saved number.  
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID  
NUMBER  
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR button or dial 17.  
WHAT IS CLI?  
On ISDN circuits, calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both  
BRI (BRI not supported on the OfficeServ 7100) and PRI type circuits. On BRI cir-  
cuits the system only supports number delivery and, like ANI, a name can be  
attached to the telephone number of frequent callers via the Caller ID translation  
table. On 5ESS and NI2 PRI circuits both name and number support is provided on  
the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems.  
NOTES:  
1. Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER  
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID  
DISPLAY  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save  
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list.To store a  
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:  
Simultaneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both  
lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems. On Transferred CO  
calls you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in  
the display. Regardless of which one is selected, you can press the NND button to  
view the other pieces of Caller ID information.To select the type of Caller ID infor-  
mation you wish to view first:  
Press the STORE button. The system displays the speed dial bin in which the  
number was stored, OR  
Press the CID button and then press the SCROLL button.  
Press the STORE soft key.  
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 119.  
Dial 0 for CID options, 1 for ANI options, or 2 for CLI options.  
Dial 0 if you do not wish to view CID information, 1 to view the NUMBER first  
or 2 to view the NAME first.  
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to  
STORE CID numbers.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
54  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NOTES:  
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO  
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administra-  
tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.  
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num-  
bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.  
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,  
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This may influ-  
ence how you choose to handle the call.  
From an idle keyset:  
Press the INQUIRE button, OR  
Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key.  
Dial the trunk number.  
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
If you are on a call:  
Press the INQUIRE button.Your existing call will go on hold, OR  
Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on  
hold.  
Dial the trunk number.  
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
NOTES:  
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you  
must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.  
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer avail-  
able] display.  
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS  
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This  
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in,first-out basis.The list includes calls that you  
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer (missed  
calls). When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back.  
The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number. To access the CID infor-  
mation stored in your REVIEW list:  
Press the REVIEW button, OR  
Press the CID button and then press the REVIEW button.  
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.  
You can now CLEAR this entry, OR  
Use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
Press DIAL to call this person back, OR  
Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed  
dial bin.  
56  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX  
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]  
Samsung Voicemail  
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a  
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari-  
ous features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this  
section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as  
Subscriber Services.  
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]  
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring  
voicemail [VMMSG].  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
0000).  
Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voicemail box has the  
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending  
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes-  
sages.  
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the  
office environment]  
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main  
greeting will answer.  
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number  
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
0000).  
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you con-  
trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your  
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are  
referred to as “Call Conditions. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most com-  
monly used Call Conditions.  
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station  
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a  
different station)  
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones  
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be  
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.  
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be  
prompted to enter a password.  
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.  
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice.You will be prompted to  
enter you password.  
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all  
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature  
availability.  
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will  
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then  
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.  
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Access Manager - See Access Manager.  
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.  
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.  
Personal Services - See Personal Services.  
Return to Main Menu.  
58  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Subscriber Services Menu  
Group New  
Messages  
Group Saved  
Messages  
Listen to New Review Saved  
Record & Send  
Messages  
Access  
Manager  
Personal  
Greetings  
Mailbox  
Administration  
Personal  
Services  
Pause, Resume  
Play Menu  
Options  
Exit  
Messages  
Messages  
11  
33  
1
3
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
Assign and/or Edit  
Change  
Review  
Group Messages Menu  
Listen Menu  
Record Menu  
Follow Me  
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
1
Primary Greeting  
Message Alert  
Workload  
Group  
Urgent Messages  
Play  
For a Directory  
Assign and/or Edit  
Busy Greeting  
Change  
Pager Notification  
Edit Stored  
Telephone Numbers  
Block All Calls  
Call forwarding  
Call Screening  
Find Me  
1
1
11  
2
#
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
5
7
8
Message  
of Subscribers  
Play Previous  
Message  
To Create a  
Reminder  
Group  
Callback Requests  
Assign and/or Edit  
Blocking Greeting  
Review Deleted  
Messages  
Change  
Change  
Password  
##  
2
3
4
5
8
9
#
0
1
2
Weekly Schedule  
Save  
Group  
Reminders  
Assign and/or Edit  
Night Greeting  
Review Undelivered  
Messages  
Place a  
Record  
Name  
"Enter the Recipient's Number"  
Message  
Direct Call  
Discard  
Message  
Review  
Recording  
3
Group  
Private Messages  
1
Assign and/or Edit  
Screened Greeting  
Auto Play  
New Messages  
Name  
Enter Directory  
3
3
Reply to Sender  
4
Stop, Append to  
Recording  
2
Group  
Fax Only Messages  
Edit Only  
Personal Greetings  
Auto Play Message  
Information  
Extended  
Prompting  
Personal  
4
8
0
Administration  
Place  
5
Discard Recording  
and Rerecord  
Call to Sender  
3
Auto Set  
Night Intercept  
Edit Only  
Mailbox Greeting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Deliver Copy  
of Fax Message  
55  
6
Set  
4
Delivery Options  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
R
e
c
o
r
d
d
S
e
nd  
Play  
Forward a  
Copy of Message  
Broadcast Message  
Menu Options  
Specify  
Future Delivery  
5
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Play  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Record  
C
Cancel, Return  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
#
0
7
Access Coverage  
a Reminder  
t
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
be  
r
S
ervices  
SEND Message,  
Then Copy  
*
6
Change  
Playback Volume  
Group  
A Specific Sender  
Play  
Menu Options  
Cancel, Return  
Cancel, Return  
Play  
77  
8
t
o S cr r Services  
u
b
s
i
b
e
Menu Options  
to Subscriber Services  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
*
*
7
Pause, Resume  
Message Playback  
Play  
Cancel, Return  
Cancel, Return  
sc
Sub riber Services  
Message Inventory  
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
ri  
b
e
r Services  
o
Change  
Playback Volume  
*
*
77  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
9
Play  
Menu Options  
Pause, Resume  
Record/Playback  
8
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
#
Cancel, Return  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
to Subscriber Services  
9
Skip to  
Next Message  
*
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
Scan Messages  
##  
0
SEND Message,  
Then Exit Record  
Play  
#
0
*
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play Message  
Information  
00  
C
a
n
ce  
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
Ca  
n
c
e
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
t
t
o
S
u
b
s
crib  
e
r Services  
t
sc
Sub riber Services  
*
*
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available  
please speak to your system administrator.  
60  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PLAY MENU OPTIONS  
0
,
#
GETTING STARTED  
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following  
a few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a  
tutorial.You should start with the following steps:  
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.  
1 or 3  
From the Subscriber Services Menu:  
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES  
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].  
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].  
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].  
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].  
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.  
Play the previous message.  
11  
2
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].  
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
3
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
Reply to the message.  
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and  
ready to use.  
4
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the  
sender has a mailbox on this system).  
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES  
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.  
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the  
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your pass-  
word.You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new  
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.  
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is need-  
ed to use this feature on an outside call.  
55  
Deliver a fax copy.  
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail docu-  
ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out  
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically  
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.  
Note:After you enter your password, ifAutoplay of New Messagesis enabled and  
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them auto-  
matically.A subscriber can control this feature.From the Subscriber Services Menu  
[6] [5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.  
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.  
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU  
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),  
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it  
as a memo to yourself (##).  
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.  
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES  
GROUP NEW MESSAGES  
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES  
GROUP OLD MESSAGES  
ACCESS MANAGER  
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a mes-  
sage to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be  
left for each recipient.  
11  
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.  
3
77  
Change playback volume of the recording.  
33  
4
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will tog-  
gle between the two levels.  
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
8
9
Pause or resume during message playback.  
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.  
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
PAUSE / RESUME  
8
62  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
99  
0
Change playback speed of the recording.  
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear  
the Send Menu with the following functions:  
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle  
between the two speeds.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
Review  
Continue Recording  
Discard and Re-Record  
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)  
Schedule Future Delivery  
Play options.  
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this  
point.  
00  
#
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just  
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.  
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else  
Save and Send the Recording  
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current mes-  
sage - it is retained as new.  
Setting Message Attributes  
##  
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is  
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific mes-  
sage quickly. To stop scanning press [1].  
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the  
following delivery options:  
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery  
Return Receipt Requested  
Request a Call Back  
Private Delivery  
Reply Required  
Exit  
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.  
11 or 33  
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES  
Scheduling Future Delivery  
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a spe-  
cific sender, press [9].  
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be  
able to set message attributes and set this message as:  
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:  
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery  
Next Few Hours  
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
A Coming Day of the Week  
Specific Day / Time  
Exit  
a) Number of messages  
b) Number of reminders  
c) Number of urgent messages  
d) Number of messages needing a callback  
e) Number of private messages  
f) Number of fax messages  
2
4
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
ACCESS MANAGER  
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:  
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,  
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials  
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their cur-  
rent status when you access them.  
a) Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use  
the system directory.  
64  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System  
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:  
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are  
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet-  
ing during the night (when you are not available).  
1
Follow Me  
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It  
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new  
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an  
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or  
changing the number where you can be reached.  
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.  
8
,
0
#
Pause / Resume  
Exit from Access Manager  
Play All Options  
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.  
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at  
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.  
Play Access Coverage  
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.  
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions  
you have setup.  
3
4
Call Blocking  
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,  
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your  
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.  
5
Call Forwarding  
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter-  
nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to  
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of  
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If  
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow  
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.  
The Caller will hearForwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}before actually being  
forwarded.  
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System  
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest sys-  
tems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be acces-  
sible in more complex systems.  
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension  
and you do not answer.  
5
6
Call Screening  
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them  
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you  
may assign any of your 9 greetings.The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,  
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to  
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of  
your telephone.  
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung  
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option  
to accept or reject the call.  
Find Me  
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list  
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered  
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored tele-  
phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.  
The Find Me feature only use the first five.  
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select-  
ed by the following digits:  
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting  
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you  
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will  
play for all call coverage conditions.  
7
Night Intercept  
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is  
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When  
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic  
Greeting' feature.  
66  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Edit Personal Greetings  
Example:“Hi this is John Smith.I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.  
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to  
leave me a message, press 1.”  
6
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.  
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your  
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to lis-  
ten to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return  
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the  
greeting.  
2
Busy Greeting  
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension  
or the telephone at your Designated Location.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy  
Greeting' feature.  
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call  
Coverage Condition,then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage  
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,  
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else  
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,  
press 1.”  
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting  
3
Call Blocking Greeting  
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any  
of the Call Coverage greetings.The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox  
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail-  
box using the VT (VoiceMail Transfer) key.  
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone  
is forwarded ALL or DND.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Blocking' feature.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be  
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please  
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as  
soon as I can.”  
4
Night Greeting  
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has  
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another  
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans-  
fer the caller directly to your Mailbox.  
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after  
business hours during the evening and at night.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Scheduling' feature.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would  
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave  
me a message, press 1.”  
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
5
Call Screening Greeting  
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening  
to the caller's record name.  
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica-  
tion, message alert options and other message control features.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Screening' feature.  
1
Message Alert  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside  
or inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with  
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension  
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail  
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed  
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your pass-  
word and you will now be logged in.  
68  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Setting Up Message Alert:  
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet  
been picked up by the recipient.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [1] for Message Alert.  
5
6
Auto Play New Messages  
There are 4 options available to you:  
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new  
messages will immediately begin to play.To enable (or if already enabled tog-  
gle and disable) this feature:  
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.  
2
Pager Notification  
Auto Play Message Information  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper  
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played auto-  
matically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be  
requested manually by pressing ‘00. To enable (or if already enabled toggle  
and disable) this feature:  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [2] for pager notification.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
There are 4 options available to you:  
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.  
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.  
9
MESSAGE BROADCAST  
3
Undelete  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to  
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the pro-  
grammed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the fol-  
lowing morning).  
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System  
Administrator.  
Broadcast to All Mailboxes  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a  
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.  
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.  
Deleted voicemail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.  
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously delet-  
ed messages, during this period of time.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.  
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned  
Subscriber Administration privileges.  
4
Undelivered Retrieval  
When this function is activated,the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall  
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip-  
ient.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.  
70  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS  
#
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely  
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.  
You probably will not need to change them after that.  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your  
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.  
1
Setting your Password  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].  
1
Workload Management  
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to  
change it.  
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized  
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for bet-  
ter organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending  
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).  
2
Recording your Name  
Use this option to record your name.Your recorded name is played in several  
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation  
of the Samsung Voicemail system.  
2
Stored Numbers  
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are  
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using  
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features  
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert, “Pager  
Alert, and “Direct Call”).  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].  
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change  
it.  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your  
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
3
5
Schedule Availability  
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal  
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions  
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to  
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.  
3
Entering your Directory Name  
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by  
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].  
Place a Direct Call  
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are  
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the  
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last  
name and then your first name.  
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any-  
where. You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corre-  
sponds to a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This  
feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited  
or opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.  
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)  
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
7
Personal Administration  
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next  
section).  
4
Extended Prompting  
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the  
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are  
very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail.  
72  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any  
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled  
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber  
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find  
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.  
AME Password  
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your  
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized  
people from listening to messages being left for you.  
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flash-  
ing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your Samsung Voicemail  
password).You will then hear the message being left.  
KEYSET USER FEATURES  
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup  
by the System Administrator.  
Call Record  
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any  
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will  
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.  
Message Waiting Lights  
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voicemail message light on your  
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to  
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber  
Main Menu.  
Answer Machine Emulation  
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you  
can use it to monitor calls going to your voicemail, and optionally answer them.  
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering  
machine.  
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voicemail. After ringing your  
station the caller will be connected to your voicemail and hear your personal  
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the  
connection between the caller and your voicemail box. At this time you will only  
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You  
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.  
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit  
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (dur-  
ing forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.  
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:  
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.  
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to  
leave a message normally.  
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.  
74  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
SHORTCUTS  
Calling  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately  
send the call to the called parties mailbox.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
Call Divert to Voicemail  
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller  
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer set-  
ting.  
Direct Messaging  
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav-  
ing to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a  
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly.If you dial a busy exten-  
sion press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.  
Self Memo (Reminder)  
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind  
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future  
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.  
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS  
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays  
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the vol-  
ume, get message information, or help.  
Viewing Mailbox Contents  
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you  
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the  
Samsung Voicemail.  
76  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ITP-5107S  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home Page  
Table of Contents  
DS 5000  
DS 5000 Series User Guide  
For OfficeServ100, OfficeServ500, and  
OfficeServ7000 Series  
04/2007  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
ABOUT THIS BOOK ....................................................................................1  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ................................................2–8  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET ........................................................9  
DS 5000 KEYSETS SETUP..................................................................10  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
Making an Outside Call................................................................................................11  
Answering an Outside Call..........................................................................................11  
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................11  
Recall/Flash ......................................................................................................................12  
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ............................................................................12  
Canceling Callback ........................................................................................................12  
INTERCOM CALLS  
Calling Other Stations ..................................................................................................13  
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................13  
Answer Modes ................................................................................................................13  
Busy Station Callback....................................................................................................14  
Busy Station Camp-on..................................................................................................14  
Calling Your System Operator....................................................................................17  
CALL PROCESSING  
Holding Calls ............................................................................................................16–17  
Transferring Calls ....................................................................................................17–18  
Transfer with Camp-On................................................................................................18  
Transfer to Voicemail ....................................................................................................18  
Call Waiting ......................................................................................................................18  
Conference Calls ............................................................................................................19  
Forwarding Calls......................................................................................................20–21  
Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................22  
My Group Pickup............................................................................................................22  
Privacy Release................................................................................................................23  
Copyright 2007 Samsung Telecommunications America.  
All rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means—graphic,  
electronic or mechanical, including recording, taping, photocopying or information retrieval systems—  
without express written permission of the publisher of this material.  
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in  
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior  
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing  
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from  
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIALING FEATURES  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
Speed Dialing ..................................................................................................................24  
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..............................................24–25  
One Touch Speed Dialing............................................................................................25  
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................25  
Manual Retry with Redial ............................................................................................26  
Save Number with Redial............................................................................................26  
Chain Dialing....................................................................................................................26  
Automatic Redial/Retry................................................................................................26  
Pulse to Tone Changeover ..........................................................................................27  
Memo Redialing..............................................................................................................27  
AME Password ................................................................................................................38  
Auto Camp-On ................................................................................................................38  
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................38  
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................38  
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ....................................................................................39  
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................39  
Automatic Hold ..............................................................................................................39  
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................39  
Hot Keypad ......................................................................................................................40  
Key Confirmation Tone ................................................................................................40  
Rejoining a Page ............................................................................................................40  
Ring Preference ..............................................................................................................40  
Auto Answer CO Calls ..................................................................................................41  
Display Speed Dial Name............................................................................................41  
Caller ID Review All........................................................................................................41  
Secure OHVA ....................................................................................................................41  
Enblock Dialing ..............................................................................................................42  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
Making an Internal Page..............................................................................................28  
Making an External Page ............................................................................................28  
All Page ..............................................................................................................................28  
Meet Me Page..................................................................................................................29  
Call Park and Page..........................................................................................................29  
Messages—Set and Cancel ........................................................................................30  
Returning Messages......................................................................................................30  
Programmed Messages................................................................................................31  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
Interactive Display Keys ..............................................................................................43  
Directory Information ................................................................................................ 43  
Call Log ..............................................................................................................................44  
Dial by Name....................................................................................................................44  
Call Progress Displays ..................................................................................................45  
Display Number Dialed ................................................................................................45  
Call Duration Timer........................................................................................................45  
Auto Timer ........................................................................................................................45  
Timer Function ................................................................................................................45  
Viewing Message Indications ....................................................................................46  
Alarm Reminder Messages..................................................................................46–47  
Personal Speed Dial Names........................................................................................47  
Station Names .................................................................................................................47  
Managing Key Assignments .......................................................................................48  
LCR with Clear .................................................................................................................48  
Backspace with LCR ......................................................................................................48  
Text Messaging ......................................................................................................49–50  
Caller ID .....................................................................................................................51–55  
ANI .............................................................................................................................52–55  
CLI ..............................................................................................................................52–55  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................................................32  
One Time DND ................................................................................................................32  
Mute ....................................................................................................................................32  
Background Music ........................................................................................................32  
Established Call Pick-Up ..............................................................................................33  
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock ....................................................................33  
Door Phone Calls............................................................................................................34  
Executive/Secretary Hotline ......................................................................................34  
Executive Divert..............................................................................................................34  
Group Listening ..............................................................................................................35  
Account Codes ................................................................................................................35  
Locking Your Keyset ......................................................................................................35  
Manual Signalling ..........................................................................................................36  
Off-Hook Voice Announce ..........................................................................................36  
OHVA Block ......................................................................................................................37  
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................37  
In Group/Out of Group ................................................................................................37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU ..................................................56  
Menu Options.........................................................................................................56–58  
Outgoing Call Log ....................................................................................................56  
Incoming Call Log ...................................................................................................56  
Speed Dial...................................................................................................................57  
Directory Dial ..........................................................................................................57  
Forward Set .........................................................................................................57  
Alarm Reminder .......................................................................................................58  
Samsung Voicemail..................................................................................59  
ABOUT THIS BOOK  
Subscriber Services Menu Diagram..................................................................60–61  
Accessing your Mailbox ............................................................................................63  
Getting Started ...............................................................................................................63  
Listen to your Messages .............................................................................................63  
Subscriber Services Menu .........................................................................................63  
Listening to Old or New Messages .........................................................................64  
Group New or Old Messages .....................................................................................64  
Record and Send a Message ..............................................................................65–66  
Access Manager ......................................................................................................66–68  
Personal Greetings ................................................................................................68  
Mailbox Administration .......................................................................................70  
Message Broadcast ......................................................................................................72  
Personal Services ....................................................................................................73  
Personal Administration Settings ............................................................................74  
Keyset User Features ....................................................................................................75  
Shortcuts ..........................................................................................................................77  
Interactive Displays .......................................................................................................77  
Samsung’s new DS 5000 Series is part of the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and  
OfficeServ 7000 Series.  
The DS 5000 keysets incorporate an LCD screen, which provides important infor-  
mation for the user, to make using the keyset easier and more convenient.  
Your keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system. Please take the time  
to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation of your keyset. Keep  
this guide handy, as you may need to look up instructions for infrequently used  
features.  
Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica-  
tions a breeze.  
This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access  
codes. Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be  
changed. If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book,  
please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct  
code.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ............................78–79  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Some simple rules to remember:  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW  
Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use.  
A fast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in.  
A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold.  
A slow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset.  
USER ORIENTATION  
The DS Series keysets incorporate buttons orkeysthat are used to access or acti-  
vate the many features of your office phone system. The DS 5021D keysets incor-  
porate 21 programmable buttons.These 21 buttons are arranged in three rows of  
seven across the face of the keyset. Any of the system features or functions can be  
programmed to these buttons.  
SPEAKERPHONE  
All DS keysets are speakerphones. Pressing the SEND button will answer an  
incoming call on the speakerphone. Pressing the END button will release the call  
on the speakerphone.  
The three buttons above the top row of programmable buttons are soft keys.  
These buttons assist in the use of the system features and functions.  
Switching from the handset to the speakerphone is easy. Simply press the SPEAK-  
ER button and hang up the handset.  
Lines from the telephone company areC.O. lines.Calls on these lines are referred  
to as “outside calls.Your system can have individual C.O. line keys or lines may be  
assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an  
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press a “LOCALbut-  
ton to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing theLCRbut-  
ton will automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits  
are dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703,  
etc.  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
The DS 5000 keysets use the UP and DOWN buttons to adjust the ringer volume  
while the keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use  
and the handset volume while you are listening. These three levels will be stored  
in memory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset, the vol-  
ume buttons will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard  
through the speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by  
using the volume buttons.There are 16 levels for each volume setting.The volume  
of off-hook ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.  
Direct Station Selection (DSS) buttons are programmed to ring specific stations.  
You can press a DSS button instead of dialing the extension number.  
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR  
CALL INDICATIONS  
The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key-  
set above the display.The terminal status indicator is a tri-colored (red, green, and  
amber) light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi-  
vidual button LEDs. The terminal status indicator provides the following indica-  
tions:  
The buttons on your phone have light emitting diodes (LEDs).These are tri-colored  
LEDs that light green, red or amber (green and red together).  
Intercom calls, also called internal calls, always appear on your CALL buttons.They  
will always light green.You can have up to eight CALL buttons, but at least two are  
recommended.  
Busy/Off Hook  
Intercom Ring  
Outside Call Ring  
Recall Ring  
Message Waiting  
Do Not Disturb  
Steady Red  
Flashing Red  
Flashing Green  
Flashing Amber  
Flashing Red  
Outside calls appear on individual line buttons if they are assigned. When an indi-  
vidual line is not assigned to its own button, it will appear on a CALL button.  
Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets. You  
never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold.They stay right where you put  
them and are identified with a green flashing light.  
Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals  
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SEND BUTTON: If the station is programmed for Enblok Dial Mode, when  
dialing an outside telephone number or internal station number, you must  
press the SEND button to initiate the call. This button is also used when  
reviewing recently received or called numbers and answering incoming calls.  
CONFERENCE BUTTON  
The CONFERENCE button allows the user to set up a call with up to 5 parties (sta-  
tion or trunk).  
When reviewing recently received calls, continue to press the SEND button  
for more than 2 seconds and the last outside number called will be redialed.  
TRANSFER BUTTON  
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways.You can  
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can  
do a blind transfer without notification.  
The SEND button operates as the ANS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An  
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.  
ENTER BUTTON: This button is used to select a menu option, or to save  
changes made to a menu or submenu option.  
HOLD BUTTON  
DIRECTION BUTTON: The DIRECTION BUTTON is the donut shaped ring,  
which surrounds the ENTER button. This button is used to navigate within  
the menus.There are directional arrows stenciled into this button, which indi-  
cate which direction the cursor will be moved.  
The HOLD button maintains the call at your keyset, while enabling you to call  
other stations or consult coworkers in confidence.  
SPEAKER BUTTON  
END BUTTON: This button is used to disconnect a call after a conversation or  
to move to the initial screen.  
The SPEAKER button allows you to have a conversation from the keyset without  
lifting the handset.  
The END button operates as the RLS portion of the ANS/RLS button. An  
ANS/RLS button may be assigned to the station as a programmable button.  
NAVIGATION BUTTON  
CANCEL BUTTON: This button is used to erase any characters or numbers  
entered by the dial pad or to move to the previous screen.  
The DS 5000 keysets incorporate a NAVIGATION button.This button is designed to  
assist the user in activating and using various station features, more easily. These  
features include:  
FEATURE ACCESS CODES  
This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea-  
tures. If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes  
may not be correct.Your installing company can inform you of the correct codes.  
Outgoing Logs  
Incoming Logs  
Speed Dial  
Directory Dial  
Forward Set  
Alarm Reminder  
With the NAVIGATION button the station user is no longer required to enter sta-  
tion level programming to activate these frequently used features. A few button  
presses and these features are activated.  
The NAVIGATION button is divided into separate feature buttons. These buttons  
are described below.  
MENU BUTTON: This button displays the station feature main menu so that  
the users can easily utilize various settings and helpful functions.  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DS 5021D  
SYSTEM TONES  
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already  
familiar to you.  
Soft Button  
Programmable Buttons (21)  
LCD Panel  
Status Indicator  
Scroll Button  
Intercom Dial Tone—A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing.  
DIAL TONE  
CONTINUOUS  
Speaker  
Volume Button  
Keyset  
Support  
Redial Button  
Ringback Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is ringing.  
RINGBACK TONE—1000 ms ON/3000 ms OFF  
Navigation Button  
CONTINUOUS  
Dial Button  
Microphone  
Speaker Button  
Busy Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is busy.  
Conference Button  
BUSY TONE—500 ms ON/500 ms OFF  
Hold Button  
Transfer Button  
CONTINUOUS  
DS 5014D  
DND/No More Calls Tone—Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed  
is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls.  
Programmable Buttons (14)  
Soft Button  
LCD Panel  
DND/NO MORE CALLS TONE—250 ms ON/250 ms OFF  
Status Indicator  
Scroll Button  
FOR TEN SECONDS  
Speaker  
Transfer/Conference Tone—Indicates your call is being held and you  
can dial another party.  
Volume Button  
Redial Button  
Keyset  
Support  
TRANSFER/CONF TONE—100 ms ON/100 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
Navigation  
Button  
Microphone  
Confirmation Tone—Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you  
have correctly set or canceled a system feature.  
Dial Button  
Speaker Button  
Conference Button  
Transfer Button  
CONFIRMATION TONE—50 ms ON/50 ms OFF  
FOR ONE SECOND  
(programmable)  
Hold Button  
Error Tone—A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done  
something incorrectly.Try again.  
ERROR TONE—50 ms of tone 1/50 ms of tone 2  
FOR THREE SECONDS  
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DS 5007S  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET  
Soft Button  
LCD Panel  
Status Indicator  
Scroll Button  
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.  
Insert notched ends of the support bracket into the channels located in the  
upper section of the bottom panel. Push towards the top of the keyset to lock  
in.  
Programmable  
Buttons (7)  
Keyset  
Support  
Volume Button  
Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the  
symbol.  
Redial Button  
Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face  
Conference Button  
Transfer Button  
down.  
Hold Button  
Plug the four-conductor line cord, from the wall, into the jack with the  
symbol on the bottom of the keyset.  
Dial Button  
Microphone  
Speaker Button  
DS 5064B AOM  
64 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH  
RED LIGHTS Used to call stations  
directly, to indicate busy conditions of  
other stations, for One Touch dialing  
and many other system features.  
KEYSET DAUGHTER MODULE  
[5021D & 5014D ONLY]  
DS 5021D keysets can have one type of daughter module installed to enhance the  
operation of the keyset, the FDBF. The standard speakerphone mode of operation  
for the DS 5021D is “half duplex.This means that you cannot transmit and receive  
speech at the same time. Adding a FDBF to your keyset will convert the speaker-  
phone into full duplex mode enhancing it operation. In addition the FDBF may  
have up to three (3) external microphones attached to it for conference room type  
applications. These microphones require an “EXTMIC” key programmed on the  
keyset to activate or deactivate them.  
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
DS 5000 SETUP  
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
MENU STRUCTURE  
Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button,line group button or dial  
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—press an idle outside line button,  
line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the  
speaker—OR—press SPEAKER, receive intercom dial tone and dial a line  
access code.  
The SETUP MENU is configured as follows:  
1. INFORMATION  
1. Outgoing  
2. Incoming Log  
3. Speed Dial  
4. Directory Dial  
5. Forward Set  
4. Alarm Reminder  
Dial the telephone number.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the END button.  
NOTE: You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and  
there is no button available for that line.  
If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may be  
labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).  
If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making  
NAVIGATING THE MENUS  
When programming within various menu options, information can be entered via  
the dial pad keys using [0]-[9] and [,] dial keys, as well as utilizing the navigation  
button assembly.  
a call, dial , plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.  
If your system is programmed to require an account code before making a  
call, press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the ACC  
button again and then select a C.O.line.See Account Codes for more information.  
The button used for editing and their features are summarized below.  
BUTTON  
FEATURES  
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system  
administrator.  
Left and Right ......................To move a cursor (highlighted area) or to erase what is  
entered.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
Enter ........................................To save the current setting and end programming.  
End............................................To cancel the current programming and return to the  
Main Menu.  
ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call.  
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your KeysetOR—press the SEND but-  
ton to automatically answer on the speakerphone.  
Cancel......................................To move back to the previous screen or delete the last  
digit of the displayed option value.  
[0]-[9] ......................................To enter numerical values.  
NOTE: If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flash-  
ing button to answer.  
NOTE:The DS5007S keysets do not support the navigation key function.  
UNIVERSAL ANSWER  
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer  
calls ringing this device, dial 67 or press the UA button.This device can operate in  
any one of the six different ring plans.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
10  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
RECALL DIAL TONE  
INTERCOM CALLS  
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and then  
make a new call on the same line.  
CALLING OTHER STATIONS  
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH button may be  
programmed to recall dial tone.  
Dial the extension number or group number.  
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback  
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin  
speaking immediately after the tone.  
SENDING A FLASH  
While on an outside call, press the FLASH button to send a flash to the telephone  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or press the END button.  
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.  
NOTES:  
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.  
1. If you have a DSS button assigned to an extension or station group, you may  
press this button instead of dialing the number.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK  
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that  
the line or group of lines is busy.  
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS  
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44. You will hear confirmation  
tone.  
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.  
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer,wait for dial tone and dial  
the telephone number or speed dial number again.  
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the SEND button  
to be connected to the calling station.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.  
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.  
NOTES:  
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, your CBK button will light.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
you will hear the caller’s announcement.  
Press SEND to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—OR— lift the  
handset to reply.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.  
CANCELING CALLBACK  
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
ON.  
callback, your CBK button will light.  
Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and/or stations set at a  
time. To cancel a callback:  
AUTO ANSWER MODE  
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44. You will hear confirmation  
tone.  
While you are listening to confirmation tone, press the HOLD button.This will  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
then automatically answer the call.  
cancel the oldest set callback.  
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree.For  
privacy, use the handset.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the END button.  
NOTE: If the hot keypad feature is turned off,you must first lift the handset or press  
the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
ON.  
12  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
BUSY STATION CALLBACK  
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:  
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.  
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.  
Press the CBK button, if programmed, or dial 44.  
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.  
Lift the handset or press SEND to call the now idle station.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
NOTES:  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, your CBK button will light.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to  
wait for a callback:  
MANUAL CAMP-ON  
Press the CAMP button or dial 45.  
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds  
and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait-  
ing.  
Wait for the called party to answer.  
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer-  
ing your camp-on.  
NOTES:  
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available button to  
accept your call. Hang up or leave a message.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing.  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the  
camp on button every time you call a busy station, you can set your phone for  
auto camp-on.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 081 to turn on auto camp-on or 080 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
14  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will  
go to the system operator.  
CALL PROCESSING  
CONSULTATION HOLD  
SYSTEM HOLD  
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth-  
er extension:  
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD. The call will flash green at  
your keyset.If this call appears on a line button at other keysets, it will flash red  
at those keysets.  
Press the TRANSFER button; you will receive transfer dial tone. Your call is  
placed on transfer hold.  
To take the caller off hold, press that button and the green flashing light will  
go steady green again. Resume the conversation.  
Dial the extension number.  
Consult with the internal party.  
Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.  
NOTE:While on a call, pressing a line button, route button or flashing CALL button  
will automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See  
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.  
NOTE:Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER button will toggle between the outside  
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the  
parties by pressing the DROP button.  
EXCLUSIVE HOLD  
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:  
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT  
ANOTHER STATION  
Press the HOLD button twice.The call will flash green on your keyset and this  
line will show a steady red light on other keysets.  
To retrieve the call, press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD  
button a third time.  
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the line button with the  
red flashing light.  
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.  
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line  
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.  
REMOTE HOLD  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station. Press TRANSFER and a  
dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS button). Press the HOLD  
button.This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line  
Button at the remote station and return you to dial tone.  
TRANSFERRING CALLS  
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You can  
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can  
do a blind transfer without notification.  
NOTES:  
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line buttons  
you will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by press-  
ing the TRANSFER button (or the RETURN soft key in the display).  
2. Intercom calls cannot be remote held.  
While on a call, press the TRANSFER button and dial an extension number or  
group number.Your call is automatically put on transfer hold. OR  
Press a DSS button or station group button. Your call is automatically put on  
transfer hold.  
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer).  
OR  
HOLD RECALL  
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station.The  
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light.  
Wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and hang up.  
If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line when the  
called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside  
party. If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the  
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer  
the recall.  
16  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Lift the handset or press the SEND button to answer.  
Home Page  
first station to hang up, simply press another DSS button. OR  
Press the CALL button or C.O. line button to return to the outside party and  
begin the transfer process again.  
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.  
CONFERENCE CALLS  
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto  
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.  
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of  
outside lines and internal stations in any order.  
NOTES:  
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the  
parties by pressing the TRANSFER button.  
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to re-  
ceive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the other party.  
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS button.You must press  
the TRANSFER button and dial the destination extension number.  
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONF button and receive confer-  
ence tone.  
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONF button and  
receive conference tone.  
Make another call or press the CONF button to join all parties.  
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.  
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not  
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONF button again to  
return to your previous conversation.  
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON  
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,  
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy  
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.  
To drop a party from your conference call:  
Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped.  
Press CONF again to reestablish the conference.  
NOTE: If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no button available to  
receive another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller.  
NOTE:To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal sta-  
tion. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect-  
ed together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONF button plus the CALL  
button that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use  
your extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release automatically.  
Press CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.  
TRANSFER TO VOICEMAIL  
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have  
a correctly programmed VT button to accomplish this.To transfer a call directly to  
a voice mailbox:  
While on a call, press the VT button and dial the mailbox number.  
Hang up when dialing is completed.  
CONFERENCE SPLITTING  
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold  
feature turned on (See Customizing Your Keyset) and all of the outside lines involved  
in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset, you can split the conference  
into separate calls as follows:  
CALL WAITING  
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has  
camped-on to you:  
Press any one of the outside line buttons.That outside line will remain steady  
green to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines in the  
conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom callers  
in the conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each caller  
privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference.  
You will hear a tone in the earpiece and the call that is waiting for you  
(camped-on) will flash. In addition the bottom line of the display will indicate  
the number of the station or trunk party camped-on.  
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automati-  
cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press  
HOLD and then the flashing button OR  
Finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.  
18  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
FORWARDING CALLS  
FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER  
You may forward your calls to another station, group of stations or an external  
telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as  
detailed below. If you have FWD ALL, FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER buttons,  
press one to turn that forward feature on. A steady red light reminds you what for-  
ward condition is activated.  
If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti-  
nation programmed, you may set both of these at the same time:  
Dial 604.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset  
and dialing 600.  
FORWARD FOLLOW ME  
FORWARD ALL CALLS  
When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you  
are now:  
To forward all your calls under any condition to another station:  
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
Dial 606 plus your extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTES:  
If you want a specific extension's calls forwarded to your phone (Remote Call  
Forward):  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for-  
warded station. This is useful when you are expecting an important call but  
you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.  
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she  
does not have a FORWARD ALL button, the TRANSFER button will light to in-  
dicate Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred  
elsewhere.  
Dial 606 plus the desired extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
FORWARD DND  
To forward your phone when you activate DND.  
FORWARD BUSY  
Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone:  
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS  
or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing.  
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call  
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea-  
tures. To review or change call forward options:  
FORWARD NO ANSWER  
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer:  
Press TRANSFER 102.  
The display will indicate the current call forward condition and destination  
OR  
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
Show 0:FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
20  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR  
Dial 1-5 to select the forward type OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the forward type.  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.  
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
Dial 1 to set OR  
PRIVACY RELEASE  
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri-  
vacy on the C.O. from your phone.  
To Release Privacy:  
While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other internal parties (or  
up to three) join the conversation.  
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO  
Press TRANSFER to store and exit  
Press the PRB button (the PRB button will light steady red). Inform the other  
party that he/she may now join the conversation.  
STATION CALL PICKUP  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65  
plus the extension number of the ringing phone.  
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to  
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the  
PRB button a second time, the PRB button will be off.  
If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this  
DP key with the flashing light to answer this ringing station.  
To Join a Non-Private Conversation:  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation:  
Press the C.O. line button that he/she has indicated.  
OR  
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.  
GROUP CALL PICKUP  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66  
plus the desired group number or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP button if  
available.  
GROUP NUMBERS  
01-20  
01-99  
01-99  
01-99  
OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100  
OfficeServ 500 M  
OfficeServ 500 L  
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400  
NOTES:  
1. A group pickup button can have an extender for a specific pickup group.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before dialing the access code.  
MY GROUP PICKUP  
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same  
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the  
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access  
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.  
22  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
For the purposes of pro-  
A B C D E F  
gramming speed dial num-  
bers, the programmable but-  
tons are known as A, B, C, D, E  
and F.  
DIALING FEATURES  
All “DIALING FEATURESinstructions are written to support Overlap Dialing mode.  
This is the technical name for dialing from a telephone as it has been for many  
years. In recent years the cell phone industry has changed the cell phones to use  
Enblock Dialing. With this dialing mode all the digits are dialed and then sent to  
the carrier after pressing the SEND key. Please check your telephone setup to con-  
firm what dialing mode is used.  
The A button is not used.  
The B button inserts a  
flash.  
The C button inserts a  
pause.  
The D button is used for  
pulse to tone conversion.If your system uses rotary (or pulse) dialing C.O.lines,  
pressing D while entering a speed dial number causes all subsequent digits to  
be sent as DTMF tones.  
The E button is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide  
some speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display. When you  
are entering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hid-  
den. Press E again to begin displaying digits.  
SPEED DIALING  
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide  
speed dial list of numbers 500~999 or from your personal list of numbers 00~49.  
Your system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial  
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.  
With the handset on-hook, press the MEMORY button or dial 16.  
Dial the desired speed dial number.  
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.  
The F button is used to enter a name. See Personal Speed Dial Names under  
Display Features.  
Use the HOLD button to clear a speed dial number.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING  
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed  
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.  
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED  
DIAL NUMBERS  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.  
Dial the speed dial number (0049 or 500999) that you want assigned to  
this button.  
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial  
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system admin-  
istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 105.  
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).  
Dial a line or line group access code.  
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,  
,, FLASH and PAUSE.  
Press TRANSFER to store the number.  
LAST NUMBER REDIAL  
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the REDIAL buttonordial 19.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
24  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK-  
ER to begin speaking.  
MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL  
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial  
the same number dialed.  
NOTES:  
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.  
2. To cancel a retry, lift and replace the handset.  
Press the REDIAL button.  
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.  
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.  
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER  
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the  
# with be sent as tones.  
NOTE: If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will  
access the call log when pressed.  
MEMO REDIALING  
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL  
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are  
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SNR button before  
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.  
hanging up.  
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.  
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the keypad.  
Press SAVE to store the number.  
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SNR button or dial 17.The same  
line will be selected for you.  
NOTES:  
To dial the number, press the SNR button. It will select the same line and dial the  
stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press the SNR  
button.  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another  
number.  
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
CHAIN DIALING  
You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as  
many speed dial numbers together as required:  
After the first speed number is dialed, press MEMORY again and dial another  
speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num-  
ber.  
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY  
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system  
can automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-  
programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.  
When you hear a busy signal, press the RETRY button.  
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for  
you.You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker.The micro-  
phone is muted.  
26  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
MEET ME PAGE  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
Lift the handset.  
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) button or dial 54.  
Dial the desired zone number.  
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.  
Press WAIT or TRANSFER.  
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.  
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.  
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE  
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
CALL PARK AND PAGE  
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can  
park the call prior to paging. The system offers two different methods:  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE  
and dial a zone number.  
MANUAL PARK ORBITS  
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE  
While in conversation, press the PARK button.  
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another  
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any  
available orbit number and see the number in the display.  
Remember the selected orbit number.  
Replace the handset when finished.  
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described  
(example:“John Smith park two”).  
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8.  
OR  
Dial 9 to page all external zones.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone button, it is not necessary to press PAGE  
and dial a zone number.  
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
NOTES:  
ALL PAGE  
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls  
in park orbits.  
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it  
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park  
and page intercom calls.  
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same  
time:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE button or dial 55.  
Dial , or press the ALL PAGE button.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE BUTTON  
NOTE:The LED on the PAGE button will only light when an All Page is in progress.  
While in conversation, press the PAGE button.The call is automatically parked  
at your station.  
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.  
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.  
Hang up.  
28  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
To retrieve an automatically parked call:  
NOTES:  
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any  
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK button,  
press it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK button,  
press it and dial the announced orbit number.  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must  
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.  
NOTES:  
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall  
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page  
intercom calls.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES  
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a  
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message  
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.  
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION  
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user  
guide.  
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy  
signal, you can leave a message indication:  
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.  
Hang up. The MESSAGE button on the called station will light. Standard tele-  
phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message  
lamp,if the phone is equipped with one and they are connected to an 8MWSLI  
card (not available on the OfficeServ 100 or OfficeServ 7000 Series) or a  
16MWSLI card on the system.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
You can have multiple programmed message buttons (PMSG) and each one can  
have a different message code:  
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the  
button will light red. Press the button again to turn off.  
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous  
one off and set a different programmed message.  
NOTES:  
1. A station can have up to five message indications.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
CANCELING MESSAGES  
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the  
extension number of the station at which you left a message. To cancel all mes-  
sage indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension. Your MESSAGE  
light will go out.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
RETURNING MESSAGES  
Press the MESSAGE button or dial 43.The first station that left a message will  
be called automatically. If that station does not answer, your MESSAGE light  
will stay on.  
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.  
Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned.  
30  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a  
computer modem on your PC.  
DO NOT DISTURB  
Press the EP button for that station on your keyset and the call is automati-  
cally moved to your keyset.  
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.  
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.  
While on-hook, press the DND button or dial 401. The DND button lights  
steady red to remind you of this mode.  
To cancel DND, press the DND button again or dial 400. The DND light turns  
off.You can make calls while in the DND mode.  
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP button) button on your regular keyset, for  
the single line station.  
APPOINTMENT REMINDER/ALARM CLOCK  
NOTES:  
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment  
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set  
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND button,  
your TSI button will flash to indicate DND status.  
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the  
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times  
at five minute intervals.  
ONE TIME DND  
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you  
can press the DND button and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you  
hang up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your key-  
set will be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND button.  
To set alarms:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM  
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Press TRANSFER to save.  
MUTE  
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa-  
tion:  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
Press the MUTE button. It will light red.  
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The light turns off.  
To cancel individual alarms:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Press the HOLD button.  
BACKGROUND MUSIC  
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in  
your keyset:  
NOTE: Display keysets can show a reminder message. See Alarm Reminder  
Messages under Display Features.  
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.  
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.  
You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME buttons while lis-  
tening to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.  
32  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
To transfer all calls to the Secretary:  
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE  
Press the DIVERT button while the phone is idle.The LED will be lit and all calls  
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:  
will ring the secretary.  
You will receive three short rings repeated.  
Lift the handset or press SEND button.You are connected to the door phone.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
The secretary can call the BOSS in the DIVERT mode but all other users will ring  
the secretary (the secretary can override the boss’ DIVERT).  
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/  
ROOM MONITOR  
GROUP LISTENING  
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want  
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:  
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in  
another room.  
Press the LISTEN button to turn on the speaker.The microphone is not in use,  
so the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.  
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.  
Repeat if necessary.  
Dial the extension number of the door phone.  
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con-  
versation.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be  
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up.This will elim-  
inate a momentary squeal.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button.  
ACCOUNT CODES  
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE  
When equipped with optional equipment, your system will allow calls to be  
charged to a specific account.  
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.  
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secre-  
tary station.  
During any outside C.O. call, press the account (ACC) button.  
Enter the 3 digit account code bin number when prompted, OR  
If your button has an extender of 000 enter the account code (maximum 12  
characters including Q and #) and press ACC000 again, OR  
Either person can press the BOSS button to make a voice call to the other sta-  
tion.  
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This button will light  
red when the other station is in use.  
If your button has an extender other than 000 (001~999) account code con-  
tained in that bin will automatically be entered for your.  
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:  
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET  
Press the TRANSFER button followed by the BOSS button.  
Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete  
the transfer OR  
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away.You  
can unlock it when you return.Your default station passcode is 1234.  
1
2
Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS button.  
0
LOCKED OUTGOING  
LOCKED ALL CALLS  
UNLOCKED  
Hold Button LED Flashes Hold Button LED Solid  
EXECUTIVE DIVERT  
NO  
Make outside calls  
YES  
NO  
ACCESS DENIED  
When the executive station is in the DIVERT mode all of his/her calls will ring the  
Receive outside calls  
Make intercom calls  
Receive intercom calls  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO  
NO  
NO  
secretary station.  
Press the DIVERT button to pass a call while ringing.  
34  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 100.  
Dial your four digit station passcode.  
Dial 1 to locking outgoing, 2 for locked all calls, or 0 to unlock.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
OHVA BLOCK  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) button. Pressing  
this button will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the  
button again and cancel the blocking.  
MANUAL SIGNALLING  
OHVA REJECT  
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another sta-  
tion, regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or  
ringing).  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) button. Pressing  
this button while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing  
party and return you to your original call.  
To send a signal to another station:  
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP  
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) button.  
You may press the MS button repeatedly to send multiple signals to the des-  
ignated station.  
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from  
the group and then put it back in.While you are out of the group, you can receive  
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an  
IN/OUT button with the group number assigned.  
NOTE: Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) button with a station  
number extender assigned to it.  
Press the IN/OUT button. It will light red when your keyset is in the group.  
Press the IN/OUT button again to exit the group and turn the light off. Repeat  
as necessary.  
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE  
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling sta-  
tion must have an OHVA button. When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA  
calls. The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.  
If you do not have an IN/OUT button:  
Dial the IN/OUT access code number ________________, then the group  
number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.  
When you receive an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announce-  
ment in the handset receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF  
then you will hear the announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the  
handset. If you are using the speakerphone the announcement will always be  
heard through the speaker.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press SPEAKER button.  
The IN/OUT button can include an extender to indicate the specific group that  
this button will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can de-  
cide for which groups you will receive calls.  
To make an off-hook voice announcement:  
Dial the extension number or press the DSS button.  
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA button.  
After the attention tone, begin speaking.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset. This will place the original  
party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.  
To return to your first party, press the button corresponding to your original  
call. This will disconnect the OHVA call.  
NOTES:  
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to  
avoid an echo effect.  
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.  
36  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls  
under Intercom Calls for descriptions):  
AME PASSWORD  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 103.  
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protec-  
tion. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being  
left.The passcode is the same as your station passcode.This feature only applies if  
there is an Samsung Voicemail card installed in the system and your keyset has a  
programmed AME button.  
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)  
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110  
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.  
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward  
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the  
SEND button before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.  
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when  
a busy station is called.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
AUTOMATIC HOLD  
While on an outside call, pressing a line button, route button or a flashing CALL  
button will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call.  
This feature can be turned on or off at your keyset.  
SELECT RING TONE  
Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies:  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 111.  
Dial 18 or press the UP and DOWN buttons to hear each tone.  
When you hear the tone that you prefer, press TRANSFER to save it.  
NOTE: Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER.  
NOTE: Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different  
tone than what you have selected for your keyset.  
HEADSET OPERATION  
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using  
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE  
headset mode, press the SEND/END button to answer and release calls.  
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station pass-  
code whenever you desire.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 101.  
Dial your old passcode.  
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters).You can use 09.  
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four  
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.  
Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode.  
38  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode button. If it is so equipped  
pressing this button while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset  
mode and the light will illuminate to indicate this. Pressing the button while the  
light is lit will cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out.  
AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS  
This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer.When  
a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound  
two beeps, the same as when a screened transfer is completed, and you will be  
connected to the CO call. In order for this option to work the station must also be  
programmed for auto answer (see SET ANSWER MODE).  
HOT KEYPAD  
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be madeliveorhotso that it is  
not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER button before you begin  
dialing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line  
number, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code. To ac-  
tivate this feature:  
While on hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer CO on or 150 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
NOTE: Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to  
work. Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME  
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as  
it is dialed.  
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE  
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the  
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL  
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls  
sent to their stations.This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in,first out basis.  
The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station but that  
you did not answer.When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the  
person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number.  
REJOINING A PAGE  
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page  
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
RING PREFERENCE  
SECURE OHVA  
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press  
the SEND button.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at  
your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button  
to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.  
This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the  
handset.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP-ON on or 130 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
40  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ENBLOCK DIALING  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
This option allows you to dial digits then press the SEND button to make the call  
(like a cellphone).  
INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS  
While the handset on-hook press TRANSFER then dial 110.  
Dial 161 to turn Enblock Dialing ON or 160 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac-  
cess codes. Pressing one of these buttons has the same effect as pressing a pro-  
grammable button. These buttons are called soft keys as their functions are not  
fixed.They change to present you with the best options for that call condition.The  
use of soft keys allows the programmable buttons to be used for more DSS and  
speed dial buttons.  
The SCROLL button is used to display options available to the user at a particular  
time or during a specific procedure. Press this button once while in the idle state  
to view the three main categories available.  
201: STN NAME  
CALL OTHER ANS  
ANSWER: Guides you through the options to answer calls.  
OTHER: Guides you through features other than making or answering calls.  
CALL: Guides you through the options to make a call.  
Select one of the main categories: CALL, OTHER or ANS (ANSWER). Press the  
SCROLL button to display additional options available under each of the three  
main categories.The symbol ¬ displayed as the last character on the lower line of  
the display indicates that there are additional options. Press the SCROLL button to  
display these additional options.  
User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters. Options assigned to soft  
keys will be in upper case letters.  
DIRECTORY INFORMATION  
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.  
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an-  
swering.  
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be  
easily identified and answered with different greetings.  
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]  
where xxx is the station group number.This allows you to answer calls directed to  
you differently than calls directed to your group.  
43  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALL LOG  
(See also Special Application Menu-Outgoing Call Log)  
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS  
The system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele-  
phone. You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a  
review list.  
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is  
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER  
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall  
from 204], [Call for 501], [message frm 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you in-  
formed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are  
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.  
Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are assigned in  
blocks of 10 each.  
Press the LOG key.  
Press either the IN or OUT key.  
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED  
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the dis-  
play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is  
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed  
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.  
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of  
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll  
through your list of calls.  
Press the CLEAR button to erase this number from the list.  
Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name, Number, or Date associated  
with this call.  
CALL DURATION TIMER  
Press the DIAL key to call this number.  
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you  
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately  
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call dura-  
tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 min-  
utes, the timer restarts.  
These options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.  
DIAL BY NAME  
(See also Special Application Menu-Name Search)  
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A sta-  
tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a  
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial  
any station or speed dial number in seconds.  
You can press the TIMER button to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to  
stop timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is  
restarted.  
AUTO TIMER  
Press the DIR button (DIRECTORY).  
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer  
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.  
Select the directory you wish to use: PERS (personal speed dial numbers), SYS  
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).  
Dial the key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you  
wish to search for.  
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.  
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
TIMER FUNCTION  
NOTE: A DIR button can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above  
lists (PERS, SYS, or STN).  
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.  
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.  
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.  
Read the elapsed time in the display.  
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.  
44  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIAL 7  
DIAL 8  
DIAL 9  
DIAL ,  
NOTES:  
P
T
W
:
Q
U
X
=
R
V
Y
[
S
Q
Z
]
7
8
9
,
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS  
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:  
With the handset on-hook, press the MESSAGE button with the red flashing  
light.  
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.  
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes-  
sage indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next mes-  
sage.  
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-  
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.  
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.  
Press the END button to return your keyset to the idle condition.  
ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES  
To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message:  
(See also Special Application Menu-Name Search)  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Press the HOLD button.  
When you use the alarm/appointment reminder feature, you create a 16 charac-  
ter reminder message. When the alarm rings, your message will appear instead of  
[ALARM REMINDER]. To program reminder messages:  
Press the TRANSFER button.  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 116.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off.Enter the time as HHMM (hours and  
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES  
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.  
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.  
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a char-  
acter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For exam-  
ple, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.”  
Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters  
from the following table to complete your message.  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 106.  
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.  
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes-  
sages.  
Press the TRANSFER button to store the speed dial name.  
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.  
Press the TRANSFER button to store the alarm and reminder message.  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
STATION NAMES  
COUNT  
DIAL 0  
DIAL 1  
DIAL 2  
DIAL 3  
DIAL 4  
DIAL 5  
DIAL 6  
1
2
>
?
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset.This allows other display key-  
set users to call you using the directory dial feature.  
<
To program a station name:  
space  
,
!
Press TRANSFER and then dial 104.  
Enter the 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind-  
er Messages.  
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
Press TRANSFER to store the name.  
H
K
N
L
O
M
46  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS  
TEXT MESSAGING  
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program-  
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.  
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro-  
grammed text messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or  
Station Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk  
and listen to your outside party.The other station can view this message and take  
the appropriate action or respond back with another text message.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Use the VOLUME buttons to scroll through all of your programmable buttons  
OR press the programmable button to which you want to add the extender.  
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.  
Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming.  
You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature. See your System  
Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature. They will assign you ten  
(10) blank messages.You can create any 16 character messages (01 to 10) that are  
appropriate for your use.  
Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your instal-  
lation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and extenders  
for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.  
NOTE: See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac-  
ters to create a text message.  
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.  
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will  
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the  
UP/DOWN button to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.  
LCR WITH CLEAR  
When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can  
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to  
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.  
The basics steps in text messaging are:  
1. Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging.  
2. Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.  
3. Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.  
4. Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)  
5. When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their  
previous call progress condition.  
BACKSPACE WITH LCR  
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by press-  
ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary.  
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps  
2.  
The following example will better demonstrate how to use Text Messaging.In this  
example station 201 is making an off hook voice announcement to station 205  
who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text message.  
STATION 201: LINDA  
STATION 205: JOHN  
received a call on line 702  
is talking on line 701  
Talking on line 702  
702:  
01:15  
701:  
05:25  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
48  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Press TRANSFER  
CALLER ID  
Transfer:  
RETURN  
WHAT IS CALLER ID?  
Dial 205  
Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company-provided feature that de-  
livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your  
phone. There are two types of Caller ID; the first delivers the calling party’s tele-  
phone number only and the second (sometimes referred to as “Deluxe” Caller ID)  
delivers both the calling party’s telephone number and name as listed in the tele-  
phone directory.  
205:busy  
OHVA  
CAMP ON  
OHVA to 205  
OHVA from 201  
TMSG REJECT  
The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID; in fact, in the case of num-  
ber only delivery, the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific  
telephone number. However, even though you are paying to receive Caller ID  
information, there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in-  
formation. The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display  
information that the system will provide.  
Wait for reply  
GIVE THE CALL  
TMSG:01  
SEND  
Dial 03 or press twice  
PRIVATE  
The caller does not wish his/her name or number to be re-  
vealed to you. This type of call can be stopped at the tele-  
phone company by dialing an access code on your outside  
lines. This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce-  
ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that  
have had Caller ID blocked.The code to block these calls can  
usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc-  
tory.  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
TMSG:03  
SEND  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
Wait for reply  
TMSG  
EXIT  
702:  
01:45  
701:  
05:55  
OUT OF AREA  
PAYPHONE  
The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller  
ID information (for example, international calls) or he/she is  
calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID  
information, for example, some outbound WATS lines.  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
The caller is calling from a coin-operated telephone. The  
telephone company will send this information as there are  
no directory listings for pay phones.The number will be de-  
livered as usual.  
INVALID CID INFO  
NO CID RECEIVED  
This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa-  
tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted.  
This is a message that will be displayed when there was no  
CID information sent on the line.  
50  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NO CID DSP  
Caller ID Digital Signal Processors (CIDDSP’s) are resources  
in the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000  
Series systems required for receiving CID data. If there are  
no CIDDSP’s available at the time a call comes in, this is the  
message you will see on your display.  
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL  
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you  
can press the NEXT button to display the Caller ID information associated with  
the call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in  
the display depending on your Name/Number selection.  
NOTE: The Caller ID features may require optional software and/or hardware.  
Please see your service and installation company for details.  
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,  
press the NEXT button. If your keyset does not have a NEXT button, press the CID  
button and then the NEXT soft key.  
WHAT IS ANI?  
[T1/E&M NOT SUPPORTED ON OS 7100]  
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) is a feature offered by some telephone  
service providers that provides the calling party’s telephone number. This service  
is only available on E&M Tie Lines on a T1, digital trunk. ANI is similar to Caller  
Identification (CID) but the format and information of the calling person is differ-  
ent. CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses DTMF signalling. Usually, with ANI, a call-  
ing party’s identity is the Listed Directory Number (LDN) unless a separate bill-to-  
number has been specified, (in which case the bill-to-number will be sent). Note  
that ANI does not provide calling party NAME,only the number.The phone system  
can provide calling number to name translation table.  
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press  
the SAVE button to save the CID number.If your keyset does not have a SAVE but-  
ton,press the CID button,the SCROLL button and then the SAVE soft key.The sys-  
tem must be using LCR to dial the saved number.  
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID  
NUMBER  
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR button or dial 17.  
WHAT IS CLI?  
On ISDN circuits, calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both  
BRI (BRI not supported on the OfficeServ 7100] and PRI type circuits. On BRI cir-  
cuits the system only supports number delivery and, like ANI, a name can be  
attached to the telephone number of frequent callers via the Caller ID translation  
table. On 5ESS and NI2 PRI circuits both name and number support is provided on  
the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and on the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems.  
NOTES:  
1. Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER button before you begin dialing.  
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER  
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID DISPLAY  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save  
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list.To store a  
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:  
Simulteneous display of Caller ID and Number on Incoming CO calls on both lines  
of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems. On Transferred CO calls,  
you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in the  
display.Regardless of which one is selected,you can press the NND button to view  
the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of Caller ID informa-  
tion you wish to view first:  
Press the STORE button. The system displays the speed dial bin in which the  
number was stored, OR  
Press the CID button and then press the SCROLL button.  
Press the STORE soft key.  
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 119.  
Dial 0 for CID options, 1 for ANI options, or 2 for CLI options.  
Dial 0 if you do not wish to view CID information, 1 to view the NUMBER first  
or 2 to view the NAME first.  
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to  
STORE CID numbers.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
52  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.  
You can now CLEAR this entry, OR  
Use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
Press DIAL to call this person back, OR  
Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed  
dial bin.  
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO  
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,  
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This may influ-  
ence how you choose to handle the call.  
From an idle keyset:  
NOTES:  
Press the INQUIRE button, OR  
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administra-  
tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.  
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num-  
bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.  
Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key.  
Dial the trunk number.  
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button, OR  
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
If you are on a call:  
Press the INQUIRE button.Your existing call will go on hold, OR  
Press the CID button and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on  
hold.  
Dial the trunk number.  
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS button, OR  
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
NOTES:  
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you  
must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.  
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer avail-  
able] display.  
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS  
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This  
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in,first-out basis.The list includes calls that you  
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer (missed  
calls). When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back.  
The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number. To access the CID infor-  
mation stored in your REVIEW list:  
Press the REVIEW button, OR  
Press the CID button and then press the REVIEW button.  
54  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
OR  
Press END to exit programming.  
SPECIAL APPLICATION MENU  
3. SPEED DIAL: Allows you to search through Station and System Speed Dial  
Below are instructions for additional call processing and special applications that  
can be accomplished via the LCD programming.These features and functions can  
be accessed by pressing the MENU button. Follow the user instructions below to  
utilize these features and functions.  
Numbers.You may dial the number directly from the displayed status.  
Scroll or dial option number 3. Speed Dial.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll to option or dial desired option.  
After pressing the MENU button, use the direction button to scroll to the desired  
menu option. Press ENTER to access the menu. To navigate within the menu you  
may scroll to the desired option/function or dial the associated option function  
number.  
1. Personal Speed  
2. System Speed  
Press ENTER.  
OR  
Press END button to exit programming.  
Scroll to the desired number and press the SEND button to automatical-  
ly dial the number.  
OR  
OR  
MENU OPTIONS  
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.  
Note that some of the features listed here may require system programming and  
configuration in order to function. See your system administrator for details.  
Press END to exit programming.  
Press the MENU button to access the options below. Use the UP/DOWN direc-  
tional button to scroll to, and within option menus and sub menus. You may also  
dial the option number, after pressing the MENU button.  
4. DIRECTORY DIAL: Allows you to search for station speed, system speed and  
station numbers based on their associated programmed name.  
Scroll or dial option number 4. Directory Dial.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll to option or dial desired option.  
1. OUTGOING LOGS: Allows you to view a list of the 30 most recent outgoing  
calls from the keyset. You may return the call directly from the displayed sta-  
tus.  
1. Personal Speed  
2. System Speed  
3. Station Number  
Scroll or dial option number 1. Outgoing Call Log.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to  
automatically dial the number.  
Enter the name associated with that speed number or station number.  
Press the SEND button to automatically dial the number.  
OR  
OR  
Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu.  
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.  
OR  
OR  
Press END to exit programming.  
Press END to exit programming.  
2. INCOMING LOGS: Allows you to view a list of the 30 most recent incoming  
5. FORWARD SET: Allows you to assign station call forward condition for the  
phone.You must first set the forward type and destination (Options 2-5) then  
activate the forwarding in option 1.  
calls to the keyset.You may return the call directly from the displayed status.  
Scroll or dial option number 2. Incoming Call Log.  
Scroll to the desired PHONE NUMBER and press the SEND button to  
automatically dial the number.  
Scroll or dial option number 5. Forward Set.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll to or dial the desired forward option and assign station number to  
forward your station to.  
OR  
Press CANCEL to return to Main Menu.  
56  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
2. ALL FWD NO.  
3. BUSY FWD NO.  
4. NOANS FWD NO.  
5. DND FWD NO.  
0. FWD CANCEL  
Samsung Voicemail  
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a  
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari-  
ous features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this  
section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as  
Subscriber Services.  
Press ENTER.  
Scroll to or dial 1. FORWARD TYPE and scroll to or dial the desired for-  
ward type.  
Press ENTER to activate the desired call forward type.  
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.  
Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voicemail box has the  
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending  
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes-  
sages.  
OR  
Press END to exit programming.  
6. ALARM REMINDER: Allows you to set an Alarm Reminder. Up to three alarms  
may be set.  
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you con-  
trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your  
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are  
referred to as “Call Conditions. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most com-  
monly used Call Conditions.  
Scroll or dial option number 6. Alarm Reminder.  
Scroll or dial the desired Alarm number (Alarm 1-3).  
Press ENTER.  
Enter Alarm Type.  
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones  
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be  
different. See the Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more  
details.  
0. NOT SET: Disables alarm.  
1. TODAY: Rings alarm one time only, on the day set.  
2. DAILY: Rings alarm daily at time set.  
Press ENTER.  
Display confirms setting and returns to that alarm set menu.  
Scroll up to set ALARM TIME.  
Press ENTER.  
Enter ALARM TIME (Military Format).  
Press ENTER.  
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all  
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature  
availability.  
Display confirms setting.  
Press CANCEL to return to main menu.  
OR  
Press END to exit programming.  
58  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services Menu  
Group New  
Messages  
Group Saved  
Messages  
Listen to New Review Saved  
Record & Send  
Messages  
Access  
Manager  
Personal  
Greetings  
Mailbox  
Administration  
Personal  
Services  
Pause, Resume  
Play Menu  
Options  
Exit  
Messages  
Messages  
11  
33  
1
3
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
Assign and/or Edit  
Change  
Review  
Group Messages Menu  
Listen Menu  
Record Menu  
Follow Me  
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
1
Primary Greeting  
Message Alert  
Workload  
Group  
Urgent Messages  
Play  
For a Directory  
Assign and/or Edit  
Busy Greeting  
Change  
Pager Notification  
Edit Stored  
Telephone Numbers  
Block All Calls  
Call forwarding  
Call Screening  
Find Me  
1
1
11  
2
#
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
5
7
8
Message  
of Subscribers  
Play Previous  
Message  
To Create a  
Reminder  
Group  
Callback Requests  
Assign and/or Edit  
Blocking Greeting  
Review Deleted  
Messages  
Change  
Change  
Password  
##  
2
3
4
5
8
9
#
0
1
2
Weekly Schedule  
Save  
Group  
Reminders  
Assign and/or Edit  
Night Greeting  
Review Undelivered  
Messages  
Place a  
Record  
Name  
"Enter the Recipient's Number"  
Message  
Direct Call  
Discard  
Message  
Review  
Recording  
3
Group  
Private Messages  
1
Assign and/or Edit  
Screened Greeting  
Auto Play  
New Messages  
Name  
Enter Directory  
3
3
Reply to Sender  
4
Stop, Append to  
Recording  
2
Group  
Fax Only Messages  
Edit Only  
Personal Greetings  
Auto Play Message  
Information  
Extended  
Prompting  
Personal  
4
8
0
Administration  
Place  
5
Discard Recording  
and Rerecord  
Call to Sender  
3
Auto Set  
Night Intercept  
Edit Only  
Mailbox Greeting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Deliver Copy  
of Fax Message  
55  
6
Set  
4
Delivery Options  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
R
e
c
o
r
d
d
S
e
nd  
Play  
Forward a  
Copy of Message  
Broadcast Message  
Menu Options  
Specify  
Future Delivery  
5
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Play  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Record  
C
Cancel, Return  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
#
0
7
Access Coverage  
a Reminder  
t
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
be  
r
S
ervices  
SEND Message,  
Then Copy  
*
6
Change  
Playback Volume  
Group  
A Specific Sender  
Play  
Menu Options  
Cancel, Return  
Cancel, Return  
Play  
77  
8
t
o S cr r Services  
u
b
s
i
b
e
Menu Options  
to Subscriber Services  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
*
*
7
Pause, Resume  
Message Playback  
Play  
Cancel, Return  
Cancel, Return  
sc
Sub riber Services  
Message Inventory  
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
ri  
b
e
r Services  
o
Change  
Playback Volume  
*
*
77  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
9
Play  
Menu Options  
Pause, Resume  
Record/Playback  
8
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
#
Cancel, Return  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
to Subscriber Services  
9
Skip to  
Next Message  
*
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
Scan Messages  
##  
0
SEND Message,  
Then Exit Record  
Play  
#
0
*
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play Message  
Information  
00  
C
a
n
ce  
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
Ca  
n
c
e
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
t
t
o
S
u
b
s
crib  
e
r Services  
t
sc
Sub riber Services  
*
*
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available  
please speak to your system administrator.  
60  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX  
GETTING STARTED  
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following  
a few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a  
tutorial.You should start with the following steps:  
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]  
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]  
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring  
the Samsung Voicemail [VMMSG].  
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
From the Subscriber Services Menu:  
0000).  
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].  
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].  
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].  
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].  
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the  
office environment]  
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the Samsung Voicemail.The  
main greeting will answer.  
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number  
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
0000).  
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].  
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and  
ready to use.  
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES  
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the  
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your pass-  
word.You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new  
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.  
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station  
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a  
different station)  
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be  
prompted to enter a password.  
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.  
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice.You will be prompted to  
enter you password.  
Note:After you enter your password, ifAutoplay of New Messagesis enabled and  
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them auto-  
matically.A subscriber can control this feature.From the Subscriber Services Menu  
[6] [5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.  
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will  
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then  
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:  
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU  
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.  
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES  
GROUP NEW MESSAGES  
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES  
GROUP OLD MESSAGES  
ACCESS MANAGER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.  
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Access Manager - See Access Manager.  
11  
2
3
33  
4
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.  
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.  
Personal Services - See Personal Services.  
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
PAUSE / RESUME  
8
Return to Main Menu.  
62  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Change playback speed of the recording.  
Home Page  
0
,
#
PLAY MENU OPTIONS  
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
99  
0
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle  
between the two speeds.  
Play options.  
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this  
point.  
1 or 3  
00  
#
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just  
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.  
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES  
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current mes-  
sage - it is retained as new.  
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.  
Play the previous message.  
11  
2
##  
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is  
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific mes-  
sage quickly. To stop scanning press [1].  
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
Reply to the message.  
3
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.  
4
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the  
sender has a mailbox on this system).  
11 or 33  
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.  
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is need-  
ed to use this feature on an outside call.  
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES  
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a spe-  
cific sender, press [9].  
55  
Deliver a fax copy.  
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail docu-  
ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out  
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically  
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.  
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:  
a) Number of messages  
b) Number of reminders  
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.  
c) Number of urgent messages  
d) Number of messages needing a callback  
e) Number of private messages  
f) Number of fax messages  
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),  
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it  
as a memo to yourself (##).  
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a mes-  
sage to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be  
left for each recipient.  
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.  
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
77  
Change playback volume of the recording.  
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will tog-  
gle between the two levels.  
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:  
8
9
Pause or resume during message playback.  
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.  
a) Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use  
the system directory.  
64  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear  
the Send Menu with the following functions:  
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System  
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
Review  
Continue Recording  
Discard and Re-Record  
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)  
Schedule Future Delivery  
1
Follow Me  
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new  
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an  
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or  
changing the number where you can be reached.  
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else  
Save and Send the Recording  
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.  
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at  
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.  
Setting Message Attributes  
3
4
Call Blocking  
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the  
following delivery options:  
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,  
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your  
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.  
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery  
Return Receipt Requested  
Request a Call Back  
Private Delivery  
Reply Required  
Exit  
Call Forwarding  
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter-  
nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to  
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of  
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If  
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow  
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.  
The Caller will hearForwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}before actually being  
forwarded.  
Scheduling Future Delivery  
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be  
able to set message attributes and set this message as:  
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery  
Next Few Hours  
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
A Coming Day of the Week  
Specific Day / Time  
Exit  
5
6
Call Screening  
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung  
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option  
to accept or reject the call.  
Find Me  
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list  
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered  
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored tele-  
phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.  
The Find Me feature only use the first five.  
4
ACCESS MANAGER  
7
Night Intercept  
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,  
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials  
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their cur-  
rent status when you access them.  
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is  
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When  
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension  
66  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are  
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet-  
ing during the night (when you are not available).  
Example:“Hi this is John Smith.I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.  
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to  
leave me a message, press 1.”  
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It  
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.  
2
Busy Greeting  
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension  
or the telephone at your Designated Location.  
8
,
0
#
Pause / Resume  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy  
Greeting' feature.  
Exit from Access Manager  
Play All Options  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else  
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,  
press 1.”  
Play Access Coverage  
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.  
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions  
you have setup.  
3
Call Blocking Greeting  
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone  
is forwarded ALL or DND.  
5
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Blocking' feature.  
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be  
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please  
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System  
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest sys-  
tems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be acces-  
sible in more complex systems.  
4
Night Greeting  
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after  
business hours during the evening and at night.  
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension  
and you do not answer.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Scheduling' feature.  
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them  
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you  
may assign any of your 9 greetings.The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,  
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to  
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of  
your telephone.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would  
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave  
me a message, press 1.”  
5
Call Screening Greeting  
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening  
to the caller's record name.  
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select-  
ed by the following digits:  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Screening' feature.  
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with  
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension  
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you  
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will  
play for all call coverage conditions.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic  
Greeting' feature.  
68  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Setting Up Message Alert:  
6
Edit Personal Greetings  
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [1] for Message Alert.  
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your  
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to lis-  
ten to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return  
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the  
greeting.  
There are 4 options available to you:  
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.  
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call  
Coverage Condition,then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage  
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,  
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.  
2
Pager Notification  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper  
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting  
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any  
of the Call Coverage greetings.The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox  
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail-  
box using the VT (Voicemail Transfer) key.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [2] for pager notification.  
There are 4 options available to you:  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.  
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as  
soon as I can.”  
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has  
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another  
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans-  
fer the caller directly to your Mailbox.  
3
Undelete  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to  
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the pro-  
grammed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the fol-  
lowing morning).  
6
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.  
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
Deleted voicemail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.  
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously delet-  
ed messages, during this period of time.  
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica-  
tion, message alert options and other message control features.  
1
Message Alert  
4
Undelivered Retrieval  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside  
or inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
When this function is activated,the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall  
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip-  
ient.  
To hear your message at the remote location when the voicemail calls you,  
after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed that there  
is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your password and  
you will now be logged in.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.  
70  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet  
been picked up by the recipient.  
#
5
6
Auto Play New Messages  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new  
messages will immediately begin to play.To enable (or if already enabled tog-  
gle and disable) this feature:  
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your  
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
1
Workload Management  
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.  
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized  
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for bet-  
ter organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending  
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).  
Auto Play Message Information  
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played auto-  
matically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be  
requested manually by pressing ‘00. To enable (or if already enabled toggle  
and disable) this feature:  
2
Stored Numbers  
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are  
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using  
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features  
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert, “Pager  
Alert, and “Direct Call”).  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.  
9
3
5
Schedule Availability  
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal  
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions  
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to  
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.  
MESSAGE BROADCAST  
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System  
Administrator.  
Broadcast to All Mailboxes  
Place a Direct Call  
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any-  
where. You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corre-  
sponds to a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This  
feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited  
or opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.  
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a  
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.  
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned  
Subscriber Administration privileges.  
7
Personal Administration  
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next  
section).  
72  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any  
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled  
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber  
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find  
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.  
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS  
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely  
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.  
You probably will not need to change them after that.  
KEYSET USER FEATURES  
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup  
by the System Administrator.  
1
Setting your Password  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].  
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to  
change it.  
Message Waiting Lights  
2
Recording your Name  
When new messages are left in your mailbox, the voicemail message light on your  
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to  
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber  
Main Menu.  
Use this option to record your name.Your recorded name is played in several  
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation  
of the Samsung Voicemail.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].  
Answer Machine Emulation  
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change  
it.  
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you  
can use it to monitor calls going to your voicemail, and optionally answer them.  
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering  
machine.  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your  
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voicemail. After ringing your  
station the caller will be connected to your voicemail and hear your personal  
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the  
connection between the caller and your voicemail box. At this time you will only  
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You  
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.  
3
Entering your Directory Name  
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by  
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].  
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are  
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the  
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last  
name and then your first name.  
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit  
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing (dur-  
ing forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.  
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.  
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)  
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.  
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to  
leave a message normally.  
4
Extended Prompting  
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.  
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the  
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are  
very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail.  
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).  
74  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
AME Password  
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your  
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized  
people from listening to messages being left for you.  
SHORTCUTS  
Calling  
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately  
send the call to the called parties mailbox.  
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flash-  
ing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your Samsung Voicemail  
password).You will then hear the message being left.  
Call Divert to Voicemail  
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller  
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer  
setting.  
Call Record  
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any  
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will  
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.  
Direct Messaging  
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav-  
ing to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a  
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly.If you dial a busy exten-  
sion press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.  
Self Memo (Reminder)  
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind  
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future  
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.  
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS  
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays  
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the vol-  
ume, get message information, or help.  
Viewing Mailbox Contents  
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you  
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the  
Samsung Voicemail.  
76  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
78  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DS 5000  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
N O T E S  
N O T E S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home Page  
Table of Contents  
iDCS Keyset  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
ABOUT THIS BOOK ....................................................................................1  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ..............................................2–10  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET ......................................................11  
ADDING AN iDCS 14B KEY STRIP ........................................12  
iDCS KEYSET  
USER GUIDE  
ADDING A KEYSET DAUGHTERBOARD  
MODULE ..........................................................................................................13  
for  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
OfficeServ100, OfficeServ500 and  
OfficeServ7000 Series  
Making an Outside Call................................................................................................14  
Answering an Outside Call..........................................................................................14  
Universal Answer ..........................................................................................................14  
Recall/Flash ......................................................................................................................15  
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ............................................................................15  
Canceling Callback ........................................................................................................15  
INTERCOM CALLS  
Calling Other Stations ..................................................................................................16  
Answering Intercom Calls ..........................................................................................16  
Answer Modes ................................................................................................................16  
Busy Station Callback....................................................................................................17  
Busy Station Camp-on..................................................................................................17  
Calling Your System Operator....................................................................................18  
April 2007  
CALL PROCESSING  
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in  
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior  
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing  
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from  
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.  
Holding Calls ............................................................................................................19–20  
Transferring Calls ....................................................................................................20–21  
Transfer with Camp-On................................................................................................21  
Transfer to Voice Mail....................................................................................................21  
Call Waiting ......................................................................................................................21  
Conference Calls ............................................................................................................22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Forwarding Calls......................................................................................................23–25  
Call Pickup ........................................................................................................................25  
My Group Pickup............................................................................................................25  
Privacy Release................................................................................................................26  
Manual Signalling ..........................................................................................................39  
Off-Hook Voice Announce ..................................................................................39–40  
OHVA Block ......................................................................................................................40  
OHVA Reject ....................................................................................................................40  
In Group/Out of Group ................................................................................................40  
DIALING FEATURES  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
Speed Dialing ..................................................................................................................27  
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ..............................................27–28  
One Touch Speed Dialing............................................................................................28  
Last Number Redial ......................................................................................................28  
Manual Retry with Redial ............................................................................................29  
Save Number with Redial............................................................................................29  
Chain Dialing....................................................................................................................29  
Automatic Redial/Retry................................................................................................29  
Pulse to Tone Changeover ..........................................................................................30  
Memo Redialing..............................................................................................................30  
AME Password ................................................................................................................41  
Auto Camp-On ................................................................................................................41  
Select Ring Tone ............................................................................................................41  
Change Your Passcode ................................................................................................41  
Set Answer Mode (Intercom) ....................................................................................42  
Set Answer Mode (CO) ................................................................................................42  
Automatic Hold ..............................................................................................................42  
Headset Operation ........................................................................................................42  
Hot Keypad ......................................................................................................................43  
Key Confirmation Tone ................................................................................................43  
Rejoining a Page ............................................................................................................43  
Ring Preference ..............................................................................................................43  
Auto Answer CO Calls ..................................................................................................44  
Display Speed Dial Name............................................................................................44  
Caller ID Review All........................................................................................................44  
Secure OHVA ....................................................................................................................44  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
Making an Internal Page..............................................................................................31  
Making an External Page ............................................................................................31  
All Page ..............................................................................................................................31  
Meet Me Page..................................................................................................................32  
Call Park and Page..........................................................................................................32  
Messages—Set and Cancel ........................................................................................33  
Returning Messages......................................................................................................33  
Programmed Messages................................................................................................34  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
Interactive Display Keys ..............................................................................................45  
Directory Information ................................................................................................ 45  
Call Log ..............................................................................................................................46  
Dial by Name....................................................................................................................46  
Call Progress Displays ..................................................................................................46  
Display Number Dialed ................................................................................................47  
Call Duration Timer........................................................................................................47  
Auto Timer ........................................................................................................................47  
Timer Function ................................................................................................................47  
Viewing Message Indications ....................................................................................48  
Alarm Reminder Messages..................................................................................48–49  
Personal Speed Dial Names........................................................................................49  
Station Names ................................................................................................................49  
Managing Key Assignments ......................................................................................50  
LCR with Clear .................................................................................................................50  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
Do Not Disturb ................................................................................................................35  
One Time DND ................................................................................................................35  
Mute ....................................................................................................................................35  
Background Music ........................................................................................................35  
Established Call Pick-Up ..............................................................................................36  
Appointment Reminder/Alarm Clock ....................................................................36  
Door Phone Calls............................................................................................................37  
Executive/Secretary Hotline ......................................................................................37  
Executive Divert..............................................................................................................37  
Group Listening ..............................................................................................................38  
Account Codes ................................................................................................................38  
Locking Your Keyset ......................................................................................................38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Backspace with LCR ......................................................................................................50  
Text Messaging ......................................................................................................51–52  
Caller ID .....................................................................................................................53–57  
ANI .............................................................................................................................54–57  
CLI ..............................................................................................................................54–57  
iDCS 64B MODULE WITH KEYSET ........................................58  
Samsung Voice Mail ..............................................................................59  
Subscriber Services Menu Diagram .................................................................60–61  
Accessing your Mailbox ............................................................................................62  
Getting Started ...............................................................................................................63  
Listen to your Messages .............................................................................................63  
Subscriber Services Menu .........................................................................................63  
Listening to Old or New Messages .........................................................................64  
Group New or Old Messages ....................................................................................65  
Record and Send a Message......................................................................................65  
Access Manager ............................................................................................................66  
Personal Greetings ........................................................................................................68  
Mailbox Administration ..............................................................................................70  
Message Broadcast ......................................................................................................72  
Personal Services ...........................................................................................................73  
Personal Administration Settings ............................................................................74  
Keyset User Features ...................................................................................................75  
Shortcuts .........................................................................................................................77  
Interactive Displays .......................................................................................................77  
ABOUT THIS BOOK  
Your iDCS keyset is the most visible part of your telephone system.No matter what  
model keyset you are using telephone calls are handled the same way. The 28D  
and 18D keysets have additional conveniences that are not available to 8D keyset  
users. These are noted throughout this guide.  
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation  
of your keyset. Keep this guide handy. You may need to look up instructions for  
infrequently used features.  
Learning to use your keyset correctly will make everyday telephone communica-  
tions a breeze.  
This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access  
codes. Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be  
changed. If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book,  
please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct  
code.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS ............................78–79  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Your outside calls will light green on your keyset and red on other keysets. You  
never lose sight of your calls while they are on hold.They stay right where you put  
them and are identified with a green flashing light.  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW  
Some simple rules to remember:  
USER ORIENTATION  
iDCS telephones are called “keysets.They contain buttons or “keys” that are used  
to access or activate the many features of your office phone system.The keys with  
paper designation strips are programmable keys. This means they can be pro-  
grammed for a specific function on your keyset and that same button can be  
something different on another keyset. See the system manager to get your most  
frequently used features assigned to your programmable keys. When changes are  
made, be sure that your programmable keys are relabeled properly.  
Any steady LED indicates the line or feature is in use.  
A fast flashing green LED indicates a new call ringing in.  
A slow flashing green or red LED indicates a call is on hold.  
A slow flashing amber LED indicates a recall to your keyset.  
SPEAKERPHONE  
All iDCS keysets are speaker phones. Pressing the ANS/RLS key will answer or  
release a call on the speakerphone. Switching from the handset to the speaker-  
phone is easy. Press the SPEAKER key and hang up the handset.  
Lines from the telephone company areC.O. lines.Calls on these lines are referred  
to as “outside calls.Your system can have individual C.O. line keys or lines may be  
assigned to groups. When they are in a group, you access a line by dialing an  
access code or pressing a route button. For example, dial 9 or press a “LOCAL” key  
to get a local outside line. If Least Cost Routing is used, pressing the “LCR” key will  
automatically select a preprogrammed C.O. line according to what digits are  
dialed. Each line in the system is numbered, beginning with 701, then 702, 703, etc.  
VOLUME CONTROLS  
The iDCS keysets use the UP and DOWN keys to adjust the ringer volume while the  
keyset is ringing, the speaker volume while the speakerphone is in use and the  
handset volume while you are listening. These three levels will be stored in mem-  
ory until changed. If background music is turned on at your keyset, the volume  
keys will also control the level of music. The volume of pages heard through the  
speaker of a keyset can be adjusted during a page announcement by using the  
volume keys. There are 16 levels for each volume setting. The volume of off-hook  
ring is controlled by a user-programmable setting.  
Direct Station Selection (DSS) keys are programmed to ring specific stations. You  
can press a DSS key instead of dialing the extension number. A DSS key lights red  
when that station is busy (Busy Lamp Indication).  
iDCS keysets provide distinctive ring patterns:  
Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated.  
Internal calls have a double ring tone repeated.  
Door phone calls and alarm/appointment reminders have a triple ring tone  
repeated.  
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR  
The terminal status indicator light is positioned on the top right corner of the key-  
set above the display.The terminal status indicator is a tri-colored (red, green, and  
amber) light that provides greater visibility of your keysets status than the indi-  
vidual key LEDs. The terminal status indicator provides the following indications:  
CALL INDICATIONS  
Busy/Off Hook  
Intercom Ring  
Outside Call Ring  
Recall Ring  
Message Waiting  
Do Not Disturb  
Steady Red  
Flashing Red  
Flashing Green  
Flashing Amber  
Flashing Red  
The keys on your phone have light emitting diodes (LEDs). These are tri-colored  
LEDs that light green, red or amber (green and red together).  
Intercom calls, also called internal calls, always appear on your CALL buttons.They  
will always light green.You can have up to eight CALL buttons, but at least two are  
recommended.  
Fast Flash Red at 1 Second Intervals  
Outside calls appear on individual line keys if they are assigned. When an individ-  
ual line is not assigned to its own key, it will appear on a CALL button.  
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
iDCS 28D KEYSET  
FEATURE ACCESS CODES  
This user guide is written based on the default access code for using system fea-  
tures. If the system numbering plan has been changed some of the access codes  
may not be correct.Your installing company can inform you of the correct codes.  
32 CHARACTER DISPLAY  
Two lines with 16 characters each.  
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR Used  
to provide your keyset status.  
SYSTEM TONES  
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already  
familiar to you.  
SOFT KEYS  
Used to activate  
features via the  
display.  
Intercom Dial Tone—A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing.  
DIAL TONE  
CONTINUOUS  
iDCS 28D  
Scroll  
Ringback Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is ringing.  
Call 1  
Call 2  
Message  
RINGBACK TONE—1000 ms ON/3000 ms OFF  
SCROLL KEY  
Used to scroll  
through dis-  
plays.  
CONTINUOUS  
Busy Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is busy.  
BUSY TONE—500 ms ON/500 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
SPEAKER  
For handsfree  
operation and  
ringing.  
1
2
ABC  
JKL  
3
6
DEF  
DND/No More Calls Tone—Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed  
is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls.  
4
GHI  
5
8
MNO  
DND/NO MORE CALLS TONE—250 ms ON/250 ms OFF  
FOR TEN SECONDS  
Memory Redial  
Transfer Speaker  
7PQRS  
TUV  
9WXYZ  
Transfer/Conference Tone—Indicates your call is being held and you  
can dial another party.  
0OPER  
ANS/RLS  
Volume  
HOLD  
TRANSFER/CONF TONE—100 ms ON/100 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
ANSWER/RELEASE KEY  
HOLD KEY  
Confirmation Tone—Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you  
have correctly set or canceled a system feature.  
MICROPHONE  
For handsfree  
operation.  
CONFIRMATION TONE—50 ms ON/50 ms OFF  
FOR ONE SECOND  
(programmable)  
20 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH  
TRI-COLORED LIGHTS Used for CALL  
buttons, intercom calls, outside lines  
and many other system features.  
VOLUME CONTROL KEYS  
Used to set independent  
levels for handset, speaker,  
background music, ring and  
page volumes.  
8 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH TRI-  
COLORED LIGHTS Used to call  
stations directly, to indicate busy  
conditions of other stations, for One  
Touch dialing and many other system  
features.  
Error Tone—A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done  
something incorrectly.Try again.  
ERROR TONE—50 ms of tone 1/50 ms of tone 2  
FOR THREE SECONDS  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
iDCS 18D KEYSET  
iDCS 8D KEYSET  
32 CHARACTER DISPLAY  
32 CHARACTER DISPLAY  
Two lines with 16 characters each.  
Two lines with 16 characters each.  
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR Used  
to provide your keyset status.  
TERMINAL STATUS INDICATOR Used  
to provide your keyset status.  
SOFT KEYS  
Used to activate  
features via the  
display.  
SCROLL KEY Used to scroll  
through displays.  
iDCS 8D  
iDCS 18D  
Scroll  
Scroll  
SOFT KEYS Used to  
activate features via the  
display.  
VOLUME  
SCROLL KEY  
Used to scroll  
through dis-  
plays.  
Call 1  
Call 2  
Message  
VOLUME CONTROL KEYS  
Used to set independent  
levels for handset, speaker,  
background music, ring  
and page volumes.  
Call 1  
Call 2  
Message  
Transfer  
Speaker  
SPEAKER  
1
4
2
5
8
ABC  
3
6
DEF  
For handsfree  
operation and  
ringing.  
1
2
ABC  
JKL  
3
6
DEF  
GHI  
JKL  
MNO  
4
GHI  
5
8
MNO  
Memory Redial  
7PQRS  
TUV  
9WXYZ  
7PQRS  
TUV  
9WXYZ  
Transfer Speaker  
0OPER  
ANS/RLS  
0OPER  
HOLD  
ANS/RLS  
Volume  
HOLD  
MICROPHONE  
For handsfree operation.  
ANSWER/RELEASE KEY  
HOLD KEY  
MICROPHONE  
For handsfree  
operation.  
HOLD KEY  
ANSWER/  
RELEASE KEY  
SPEAKER  
For handsfree  
operation and  
ringing.  
8 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH  
TRI-COLORED LIGHTS Used to call  
stations directly, to indicate busy  
conditions of other stations, for One  
Touch dialing and many other system  
features.  
10 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH  
TRI-COLORED LIGHTS Used for CALL  
buttons, intercom calls, outside lines  
and many other system features.  
VOLUME CONTROL KEYS  
Used to set independent  
levels for handset, speaker,  
background music, ring and  
page volumes.  
8 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH TRI-  
COLORED LIGHTS Used to call  
stations directly, to indicate busy  
conditions of other stations, for One  
Touch dialing and many other system  
features.  
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
iDCS 64B AOM  
iDCS 14B STRIP  
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
9
5
10  
11  
16  
12  
17  
13  
18  
14  
19  
15  
20  
21  
26  
22  
27  
23  
28  
24  
29  
25  
30  
31  
36  
32  
37  
33  
38  
34  
39  
35  
40  
14 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH  
RED LIGHTS Used to call stations  
directly, to indicate busy conditions of  
other stations, for One Touch dialing  
and many other system features.  
41  
46  
42  
47  
43  
48  
44  
49  
45  
50  
51  
56  
52  
57  
53  
58  
54  
59  
55  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
64 PROGRAMMABLE KEYS WITH  
RED LIGHTS Used to call stations  
directly, to indicate busy conditions of  
other stations, for One Touch dialing  
and many other system features.  
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
KEYSET DAUGHTER MODULES  
ASSEMBLING YOUR KEYSET  
[28 AND 18 BUTTON KEYSETS ONLY]  
iDCS 28D and 18D button keysets can have one of three different types of daugh-  
ter module installed on them to enhance the operation of the keyset or to provide  
an additional local port depending on the type of module.  
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.  
Remove the base pedestal by placing your thumbs over the attachment clips  
and press outward while simultaneously pressing down on the keyset body  
with your fingertips.  
iDCS KDB-DIGITAL LINE  
Plug the handset cord into the jack marked with the symbol.  
INTERFACE (FKDBD)  
[NOT SUPPORTED ON OS 7100]  
If your keyset is connected to a Digital Line Interface (DLI) port that supports 2B+D  
operation (your installing company can determine this) you may install a daugh-  
ter module that provides a Digital Line Interface (DLI) port for connection of a dig-  
ital station device such as a keyset or 64 button module.  
Route the handset cord out the RIGHT side of the keyset as you look at it face  
down.  
Reattach the base pedestal.  
Plug the line cord into the jack on the base of the keyset marked with the  
symbol and route it through one of the cable channels in the bottom  
of the base pedestal.  
iDCS KDB-SINGLE LINE  
INTERFACE (FKDBS)  
[NOT SUPPORTED ON OS 7100]  
If your keyset is connected to a Digital Line Interface (DLI) port that supports 2B+D  
operation (your installing company can determine this) you may install a daugh-  
ter module that provides a Single Line Interface (SLI) port for connection of a stan-  
dard telephone device such as a cordless phone. [NOT SUPPORTED ON OfficeServ  
7100]  
iDCS KDB-FULL DUPLEX (FKDBF)  
The standard speakerphone mode of operation for a iDCS keyset is “half duplex.  
This means that you cannot transmit and receive speech at the same time. Adding  
a FKDBF to your keyset will convert the speakerphone into full duplex mode  
enhancing its operation. In addition the FKDBF may have up to three (3) external  
microphones attached to it for conference room type applications. These micro-  
phones require an “EXTMIC” key programmed on the keyset to activate or deacti-  
vate them.  
10  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ADDING AN  
ADDING A KEYSET  
iDCS 14 BUTTON KEY STRIP  
DAUGHTERBOARD MODULE  
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.  
Place the keyset face down on a flat surface.  
Remove the base pedestal by placing your thumbs over the attachment clips  
and press outward while simultaneously pressing down on the keyset body  
with your fingertips.  
Remove the base pedestal by placing your thumbs over the attachment clips  
and press outward while simultaneously pressing down on the keyset body  
with your fingertips.  
Remove the ribbon cable knockout from the bottom of the keyset.  
Clip the 14 button strip to the side of the keyset.  
Plug one end of the ribbon cable into the keyset and the other end into the  
14 button strip.  
Remove the two knockouts from the bottom of the keyset.  
Plug in the daughter module and secure with the two screws provided.  
Place the support bracket over the ribbon cable and secure with the six  
screws provided.  
Reattach the base pedestal.  
SECURING  
SCREWS  
REMOVE  
KNOCKOUTS  
REMOVE KNOCKOUTS  
CONNECT RIBBON CABLE  
12  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
RECALL DIAL TONE  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
Press the NEW button to disconnect your existing call, wait for dial tone and then  
make a new call on the same line.  
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
NOTE: If this button does not appear on your keyset, the FLASH key may be pro-  
grammed to recall dial tone.  
Lift the handset and press an idle outside line button,line group button or dial  
a line access code to receive dial tone—OR—press an idle outside line button,  
line group button or dial a line access code to receive dial tone through the  
speaker—OR—press SPEAKER, receive intercom dial tone and dial a line  
access code.  
SENDING A FLASH  
While on an outside call, press the FLASH key to send a flash to the telephone  
company. This is required for some custom calling features or CENTREX use.  
Dial the telephone number.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS key.  
NOTE: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.  
NOTE: You will receive No More Calls tone when you attempt to make a call and  
there is no key available for that line.  
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH CALLBACK  
If you receive a busy signal when you are selecting an outside line, this means that  
the line or group of lines is busy.  
If Least Cost Routing is enabled on your phone system, this button may be  
labeled LCR or accessed by dialing an access code (usually 9).  
If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making  
a call, dial Q plus a valid code before selecting a C.O. line.  
If your system is programmed to require an account code before making a  
call, press the ACC button or dial 47 plus a valid bin number, press the ACC  
button again and then select a C.O. line. See Account Codes for more informa-  
tion.  
Press the CBK key, if programmed, or dial 44.You will hear confirmation tone.  
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.  
Lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS key to answer,wait for dial tone and dial  
the telephone number or speed dial number again.  
NOTES:  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, your CBK key will light.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.  
For more information on authorization and account codes, see your system  
administrator.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.  
CANCELING CALLBACK  
ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set a  
callback, your CBK key will light.  
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call.  
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your KeysetOR—press the ANS/RLS  
key to automatically answer on the speakerphone.  
Your phone may have a maximum of five callbacks to lines and/or stations set at a  
time. To cancel a callback:  
NOTE: If a call is flashing at your keyset but not ringing, you must press the flash-  
ing button to answer.  
Press the CBK key, if programmed, or dial 44.You will hear confirmation tone.  
While you are listening to confirmation tone, press the HOLD key. This will  
cancel the oldest set callback.  
UNIVERSAL ANSWER  
NOTES:  
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer  
calls ringing this device, dial 67 or press the UA key.This device can operate in any  
one of the six different ring plans.  
1. If the hot keypad feature is turned off, you must first lift the handset or press  
the SPEAKER key before dialing.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.  
14  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
BUSY STATION CALLBACK  
INTERCOM CALLS  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal:  
Press the CBK key, if programmed, or dial 44.  
When the busy station becomes free, your keyset will ring.  
Lift the handset or press ANS/RLS to call the now idle station.  
CALLING OTHER STATIONS  
Dial the extension number or group number.  
Wait for the party to answer. If you hear a brief tone burst instead of ringback  
tone, the station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer. Begin  
speaking immediately after the tone.  
NOTES:  
1. A callback will be canceled if not answered within 30 seconds. If you have set  
a callback, your CBK key will light.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS key.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.  
NOTES:  
1. If you have a DSS key assigned to an extension or station group, you may  
press this key instead of dialing the number.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to  
wait for a callback:  
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS  
MANUAL CAMP-ON  
When your keyset rings, simply lift the handset—OR—press the ANS/RLS key  
to be connected to the calling station.  
Press the CAMP key or dial 45.  
The called station will receive off-hook ring tone repeated every few seconds  
and its first available CALL button will flash green to indicate your call is wait-  
ing.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS key.  
See Ring Preference under Customizing Your Keyset.  
Wait for the called party to answer.  
The called station must release its first call or place it on hold before answer-  
ing your camp-on.  
VOICE ANNOUNCE MODE  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
you will hear the caller’s announcement.  
NOTES:  
1. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no available key to accept  
your call. Hang up or leave a message.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing.  
Press ANS/RLS to turn on the microphone and speak handsfree—OR— lift  
the handset to reply.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the ANS/RLS key.  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
ON.  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
When you want to automatically camp on to a busy station without pressing the  
camp on button every time you call a busy station,you can set your phone for auto  
camp-on.  
AUTO ANSWER MODE  
When another station calls you, your keyset will sound a brief attention tone and  
then automatically answer the call.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 081 to turn on auto camp-on or 080 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Your microphone and speaker are turned on and you can speak handsfree.For  
privacy, use the handset.  
To finish the call, replace the handset or press the ANS/RLS key.  
NOTE: In order for C.O. calls to be answered handsfree, AUTO ANS CO must be set  
ON.  
16  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR  
CALL PROCESSING  
Dial 0 to call your system operator or group of operators.  
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.  
SYSTEM HOLD  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
When you are connected to any call, press HOLD. The call will flash green at  
your keyset. If this call appears on a line key at other keysets, it will flash red at  
those keysets.  
To take the caller off hold, press that key and the green flashing light will go  
steady green again. Resume the conversation.  
NOTE: While on a call, pressing a line key, route key or flashing CALL button will  
automatically put your first call on hold and connect you to the new call. See  
Automatic Hold under Customizing Your Keyset.  
EXCLUSIVE HOLD  
To place an outside call on hold at your phone so that other users cannot get it:  
Press the HOLD button twice.The call will flash green on your keyset and this  
line will show a steady red light on other keysets.  
To retrieve the call, press the flashing green line button or press the HOLD  
button a third time.  
NOTE: Intercom calls will always be placed on exclusive hold.  
REMOTE HOLD  
When you wish to place a call on hold at another station. Press TRANSFER and a  
dial the station number (or press the appropriate DSS key). Press the HOLD key.  
This will place the call on system hold on an available CALL button or Line Key at  
the remote station and return you to dial tone.  
NOTES:  
1. If the destination station does not have any free CALL buttons or line keys you  
will hear No More Calls tone and must return to the other party by pressing  
the TRANSFER key (or the RETURN soft key in the display).  
2. Intercom calls cannot be remote held.  
HOLD RECALL  
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, it will recall your station.The  
button that the call appears on will have a slow flashing amber light.  
When your phone rings, lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS key to answer  
the recall.  
18  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
first station to hang up, simply press another DSS button. OR  
Home Page  
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it will  
go to the system operator.  
Press the CALL button or C.O.line key to return to the outside party and begin  
the transfer process again.  
CONSULTATION HOLD  
When you are transferring a call to a keyset set for Voice Announce or Auto  
Answer, the transferred call will always ring.  
When you are talking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with anoth-  
er extension:  
NOTES:  
Press the TRANSFER key; you will receive transfer dial tone.Your call is placed  
on transfer hold.  
Dial the extension number.  
Consult with the internal party.  
Press TRANSFER to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.  
1. After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between the  
parties by pressing the TRANSFER key.  
2. If you receive No More Calls tone, that station has no key available to receive  
another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the other party.  
3. You cannot transfer an Intercom call by pressing a DSS key.You must press the  
TRANSFER key and dial the destination extension number.  
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the TRANSFER key will toggle between the outside  
party and internal extension. If necessary you may disconnect either one of the  
parties by pressing the DROP button.  
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON  
When you are transferring a call to another station and you receive a busy signal,  
you may camp the call on to this station. Simply hang up when you hear the busy  
signal. The called party will be alerted that a call is waiting for them.  
RETRIEVING CALLS HELD AT  
ANOTHER STATION  
NOTE:If you receive No More Calls tone,that station has no key available to receive  
another call. Press TRANSFER to return to the outside caller.  
When a line is on hold and it appears on your keyset, press the line button with the  
red flashing light.  
TRANSFER TO VOICE MAIL  
When a line is on hold and it does not appear on your keyset, dial 12 plus the line  
number or the extension number of the station that placed the call on hold.  
This feature is used to send a call directly to a voice mailbox.Your keyset must have  
a correctly programmed VT key to accomplish this. To transfer a call directly to a  
voice mailbox:  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
While on a call, press the VT key and dial the mailbox number.  
Hang up when dialing is completed.  
TRANSFERRING CALLS  
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You can  
do a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you can  
do a blind transfer without notification.  
CALL WAITING  
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station has  
camped-on to you:  
While on a call, press the TRANSFER key and dial an extension number or  
group number.Your call is automatically put on transfer hold. OR  
Press a DSS key or station group key.Your call is automatically put on transfer  
hold.  
Hang up when you hear ringing (this is an unscreened or blind transfer).  
OR  
Your keyset will ring and the call that is waiting for you (camped-on) will flash  
green.  
Press the flashing button to answer; your other call will go on hold automati-  
cally if your station has the Automatic Hold feature set. If not, you must press  
HOLD and then the flashing button. OR  
Wait for the called party to answer and advise him/her of the call and hang up.  
If the transfer is refused, you will be reconnected to the outside line when the  
called station hangs up or you can press TRANSFER to return to the outside  
party. If you wish to send the call to another extension without waiting for the  
Finish the first call and hang up; the waiting call will ring.  
Lift the handset or press the ANS/RLS key to answer.  
NOTE: Intercom calls will not go on Automatic Hold.  
20  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CONFERENCE CALLS  
FORWARDING CALLS  
You may conference up to five parties (you and four others) in any combination of  
outside lines and internal stations in any order.  
You may forward your calls to another station, group of stations or an external  
telephone number. Program a destination for the type of forwarding you want as  
detailed below. If you have FWD ALL, FWD BUSY and FWD NO ANSWER keys,  
press one to turn that forward feature on. A steady red light reminds you what for-  
ward condition is activated.  
While engaged in a conversation, press the CONF key and receive conference  
tone.  
Make another call, either intercom or outside, press the CONF key and receive  
conference tone.  
You can clear all call forward conditions set at your station by lifting the handset  
Make another call or press the CONF key to join all parties.  
Repeat the last step until all parties are added.  
and dialing 600.  
FORWARD ALL CALLS  
NOTE: When attempting to add another party to the conference and you are not  
able to reach the desired person, hang up. Simply press the CONF key again to  
return to your previous conversation.  
To forward all your calls under any condition to another station:  
Dial 601 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
To drop a party from your conference call:  
Press CONF and dial the extension or line number that is to be dropped.  
Press CONF again to reestablish the conference.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
2. The station that receives a Forwarded All call can transfer the call to the for-  
warded station. This is useful when you are expecting an important call but  
you do not wish to be disturbed by other calls.  
3. When a station user places his/her keyset in Forward All mode and he/she  
does not have a FORWARD ALL key, the TRANSFER key will light to indicate  
Forward All has been set and calls to this station have been transferred else-  
where.  
NOTE:To leave the conference, hang up. Control is passed to the next internal sta-  
tion. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave outside lines connect-  
ed together in a trunk to trunk conference, press the CONF key plus the CALL but-  
ton that the call appears on or follow the instructions to drop a party and use your  
extension number. When they hang up, the lines will release automatically. Press  
CONF to rejoin a trunk to trunk conference.  
CONFERENCE SPLITTING  
If you are the controlling party of a conference and your keyset has the Auto Hold  
feature turned on (See Customizing Your Keyset) and all of the outside lines involved  
in the conference appear as buttons on your keyset, you can split the conference  
into separate calls as follows:  
FORWARD BUSY  
To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone:  
Dial 602 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
Press any one of the outside line buttons.That outside line will remain steady  
green to indicate you are still connected to it. All other outside lines in the  
conference will be placed on system hold at your keyset. All intercom callers  
in the conference will be disconnected. You may now speak with each caller  
privately and transfer them as usual or reestablish another conference.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press SPEAKER before you begin dialing.  
FORWARD NO ANSWER  
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer:  
Dial 603 plus the extension or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
22  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Dial 0 to cancel current condition OR  
Dial 1-5 to select forward type OR  
FORWARD BUSY/NO ANSWER  
If you have both a Forward on Busy destination and a Forward No Answer desti-  
nation programmed, you may set both of these at the same time:  
Press UP or DOWN to select forward type.  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor.  
Dial the destination number (e.g., 202) OR  
Press UP or DOWN to select the destination  
Press the right soft key to move the cursor  
Dial 1 to set OR  
Dial 604.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
Press UP or DOWN to select YES or NO  
Press TRANSFER to store and exit  
FORWARD FOLLOW ME  
STATION CALL PICKUP  
When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you  
are now:  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station, lift the handset and dial 65  
plus the extension number of the ringing phone.  
Dial 604 plus your extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
If you have a DP key assigned with a station number, you only need to press this  
DP key with the flashing light to answer the ringing station.  
If you want a specific extension's calls forwarded to your phone (Remote Call  
Forward):  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
Dial 606 plus the desired extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
GROUP CALL PICKUP  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group, lift the handset and dial 66  
plus the desired group number or press the flashing GROUP PICKUP key if avail-  
able.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
FORWARD DND  
GROUP NUMBERS  
01-20  
01-99  
01-99  
01-99  
OfficeServ 100 & OfficeServ 7100  
OfficeServ 500 M  
OfficeServ 500 L  
To forward your phone when you activate DND.  
Dial 605 plus the extension number or group number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
OfficeServ 7200 & OfficeServ 7400  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
NOTES:  
1. A group pickup key can have an extender for a specific pickup group.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before dialing the access code.  
CALL FORWARD OPTIONS  
A display keyset may review or change call forward options and destinations. Call  
forward access can be done via the keypad or by accessing the keyset display fea-  
tures. To review or change call forward options:  
MY GROUP PICKUP  
If desired, a new access code can be assigned to pickup ringing calls in the same  
pickup group as you are in. Like “66” above except you do not need to dial the  
desired group number. See your installation company for the assigned access  
code. MY GROUP PICKUP: __________________.  
Press TRANSFER 102.  
The display will indicate the current current call forward condition and desti-  
nation OR  
Show 0:FORWARD CANCEL to indicate no forward is set.  
24  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PRIVACY RELEASE  
DIALING FEATURES  
This feature will allow another station to join in our conversation by releasing pri-  
vacy on the C.O. from your phone.  
SPEED DIALING  
To Release Privacy:  
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide  
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.  
While you are talking on a C.O. line and you wish to have other internal parties (or  
up to three) join the conversation.  
You system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed dial  
access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.  
Press the PRB key (the PRB key will light steady red). Inform the other party  
that he/she may now join the conversation.  
With the handset on-hook, press the MEMORY key or dial 16.  
Dial the desired speed dial number.  
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.  
After the other party (or parties) has joined the conversation and you wish to  
return privacy to the line so that no one else can join the conversation, press the  
PRB key a second time, the PRB key LED will be off.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
To Join a Non-Private Conversation:  
When someone has informed you that you can join a conversation:  
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL SPEED  
DIAL NUMBERS  
Press the C.O. line key that he/she has indicated.  
OR  
Dial the C.O. line number that he/she has indicated.  
You can program frequently dialed telephone numbers in a personal speed dial  
list. A station may be assigned up to fifty numbers, 00–49. See your system admin-  
istrator to determine the amount assigned to your station.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 105.  
Dial a speed dial number (00–49).  
Dial a line or line group access code.  
Dial the telephone number to be stored (24 digits maximum). It can include #,  
,, FLASH and PAUSE.  
Press TRANSFER to store the number.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
8D KEYSET DEFAULT  
PROGRAMMING  
A
C
E
B
D
F
KEYS LAYOUT  
28D KEYSET  
18D KEYSET  
DEFAULT  
VOLUME  
PROGRAMMING KEYS  
LAYOUT  
Transfer  
Speaker  
C
E
F
A
B
Transfer Speaker  
D
26  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
For the purposes of programming speed dial numbers, the programmable keys  
are known as A, B, C, D, E and F and are defined below.  
MANUAL RETRY WITH REDIAL  
While you are on an outside call listening to a busy signal and you want to redial  
the same number dialed.  
The A key is not used.  
The B key inserts a flash.  
The C key inserts a pause.  
The D key is used for pulse to tone conversion. If your system uses rotary (or  
pulse) dialing C.O. lines, pressing D while entering a speed dial number caus-  
es all subsequent digits to be sent as DTMF tones.  
The E key is used to hide digits. Display keyset users may want to hide some  
speed dial numbers so that they will not show in the display.When you are en-  
tering a telephone number, press E. All subsequent digits will be hidden. Press  
E again to begin displaying digits.  
Press the REDIAL key.  
This will hang up your existing call and manually redial the same number dialed.  
You can repeat this operation for a limited number of attempts.  
NOTE: If your keyset is programmed with Call Log Blocks then the Redial will  
access the call log when pressed.  
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL  
The F key is used to enter a name. See Personal Speed Dial Names under  
Display Features.  
Use the HOLD key to clear a speed dial number.  
To save the number you just dialed for later use, press the SNR key before hang-  
ing up.  
To redial this saved number at any time, press the SNR key or dial 17. The same  
line will be selected for you.  
ONE TOUCH SPEED DIALING  
You may assign any speed dial number to an already existing One Touch Speed  
Dial button for quick and easy dialing of frequently used numbers.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
2. The saved telephone number is stored in memory until you save another  
number.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Press a One Touch Speed Dial button.  
Dial the speed dial number (0049 or 500999) that you want assigned to  
this button.  
3. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
CHAIN DIALING  
To call this telephone number, just press the One Touch Speed Dial button.  
You may manually dial additional digits following a speed dial number or chain as  
many speed dial numbers together as required:  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
After the first speed number is dialed, press MEMORY again and dial another  
speed number OR manually dial additional digits following a speed dial num-  
ber.  
LAST NUMBER REDIAL  
To redial the last telephone number you dialed, press the REDIAL key or dial 19.  
AUTOMATIC REDIAL/RETRY  
NOTES:  
When you are making an outside call and you receive a busy signal, the system  
can automatically redial the number for you. It will automatically redial at a pre-  
programmed interval for up to 15 attempts.  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
2. Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
When you hear a busy signal, press the RETRY button.  
The system will reserve the line and automatically redial the same number for  
you.You will hear the call being made through the keyset speaker.The micro-  
phone is muted.  
28  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
When the called party answers, lift the handset or press the flashing SPEAK-  
ER to begin speaking.  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
NOTES:  
1. If you make another call, auto-redial is canceled.  
2. To cancel a retry, lift and replace the handset.  
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE  
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:  
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE key or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the  
# with be sent as tones.  
MEMO REDIALING  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone key, it is not necessary to press PAGE and  
dial a zone number.  
When you are calling directory information, you can store the number you are  
given using the SAVE feature. There is no need for pencil and paper.  
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE  
While you are talking on an outside call, press SAVE.  
Dial the telephone number as it is dictated to you on the key pad.  
Press SAVE to store the number.  
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE key or dial 55.  
Dial the desired zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8.  
OR  
To dial the number, press the SNR button. It will select the same line and dial the  
stored number. If necessary, you can select a different line and then press the SNR  
button.  
Dial 9 to page all external zones.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
NOTE: If you have a dedicated page zone key, it is not necessary to press PAGE and  
dial a zone number.  
ALL PAGE  
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and external page zones at the  
same time:  
Lift the handset.  
Press the PAGE key or dial 55.  
Dial , or press the ALL PAGE key.  
After the attention tone, make your announcement.  
NOTE:The LED on the PAGE key will only light when an All Page is in progress.  
30  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
To retrieve an automatically parked call:  
MEET ME PAGE  
Dial 10 plus the number that was announced. If you have a PAGPK key, press  
it and dial the number that was announced. If you have a PARK key, press it  
and dial the announced orbit number.  
Lift the handset.  
Press the Meet Me Page (MMPG) key or dial 54.  
Dial the desired zone number.  
After the attention tone, instruct the paged person to dial 56.  
Press WAIT or TRANSFER.  
Remain off-hook until the person dials 56 from any phone.  
The paged person will be automatically connected with you.  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
NOTES:  
1. If the call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it will recall  
your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park and page  
intercom calls.  
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
CALL PARK AND PAGE  
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can  
park the call prior to paging. The iDCS offers two different methods:  
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION  
MANUAL PARK ORBITS  
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy  
signal, you can leave a message indication:  
While in conversation, press the PARK button.  
Entered a desired orbit number (0-9), if the orbit number is busy dial another  
orbit number. Display users can press , to automatically place the call in any  
available orbit number and see the number in the display.  
Remember the selected orbit number.  
Replace the handset when finished.  
Lift the handset and make a page announcement as previously described  
(example:“John Smith park two”).  
Press the MESSAGE key or dial 43 and receive confirmation tone.  
Hang up. The MESSAGE key on the called station will light. Standard tele-  
phones receive special dial tone as a message indication or a lit message  
lamp,if the phone is equipped with one and they are connected to an 8MWSLI  
card or a 16MWSLI card on the system.  
NOTES:  
1. A station can have up to five message indications.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
To retrieve a parked call from orbit:  
Press the PARK button and dial the announced orbit number (0-9).  
You will be connected to the parked call.  
CANCELING MESSAGES  
NOTES:  
1. You must have a PARK button or park access code to retrieve and place calls  
in park orbits.  
2. If the parked call is not retrieved within a pre-programmed period of time, it  
will recall your keyset and have a slow flashing amber light. You cannot park  
and page intercom calls.  
To cancel a message indication that you left at another station, dial 42 plus the  
extension number of the station at which you left a message.  
To cancel all message indications left at your keyset, dial 42 plus your extension.  
Your MESSAGE light will go out.  
3. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
AUTOMATIC PARK WITH PAGE KEY  
RETURNING MESSAGES  
While in conversation, press the PAGE button.The call is automatically parked  
at your station.  
Receive page tone and dial a desired page zone number.  
Make announcement indicating your extension number or the line number.  
Hang up.  
Press the MESSAGE key or dial 43.The first station that left a message will be  
called automatically. If that station does not answer, your MESSAGE light will  
stay on.  
Repeat until all messages have been returned in the order received.  
32  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Your MESSAGE light will turn off when all messages have been returned.  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
NOTES:  
1. Display keyset users can view message indications and return them in any  
order. See Viewing Message Indications under Display Features.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
DO NOT DISTURB  
Use this feature when you want to block calls to your keyset.  
3. If a message has been left at your keyset by a keyset in Auto Answer, you must  
manually cancel the message after it has been returned.  
While on-hook, press the DND key or dial 401. The DND key lights steady red  
to remind you of this mode.  
To cancel DND, press the DND key again or dial 400. The DND light turns off.  
You can make calls while in the DND mode.  
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES  
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you can leave a  
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message  
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.  
NOTES:  
1. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key.  
Dial 48 plus any of the message codes (01–20) listed on the back of this user  
guide.  
2. If you place your keyset in DND mode and you do not have a DND key, your  
TSI key will flash to indicate DND status.  
To cancel any of these messages you might have selected, dial 48 plus 00.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
ONE TIME DND  
If you are on a call and you do not wish to be interrupted while on that call, you  
can press the DND key and place your station in Do Not Disturb. When you hang  
up at the end of the call, DND will be automatically canceled and your keyset will  
be able to receive new calls. This feature requires a DND key.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key.  
You can have multiple programmed message keys (PMSG) and each one can have  
a different message code:  
MUTE  
Press any programmed message (PMSG) button. The message is set and the  
button will light red. Press the button again to turn off.  
Pressing another programmed message (PMSG) button will turn the previous  
one off and set a different programmed message.  
You can mute the handset transmitter or the microphone during any conversa-  
tion:  
Press the MUTE key. It will light red.  
To resume speaking, press the MUTE button again. The light turns off.  
BACKGROUND MUSIC  
When a music source is supplied, you may listen to music through the speaker in  
your keyset:  
While on-hook, press the HOLD button to hear music.  
Press the HOLD button again to turn music off.  
You can set the level of background music by using the VOLUME keys while listen-  
ing to the music. This does not affect the speakerphone level.  
34  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ESTABLISHED CALL PICKUP  
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE  
To pick up an established call in progress at a single line extension connected to a  
computer modem on your PC.  
When you are programmed to receive calls from a door phone:  
You will receive three short rings repeated.  
Lift the handset or press ANS/RLS key.You are connected to the door phone.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
Press the EP key for that station on your keyset and the call is automatically  
moved to your keyset.  
The single line extension on your modem will be disconnected.  
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE/  
ROOM MONITOR  
NOTE: You must have an assigned (EP key) button on your regular keyset, for the  
single line station.  
You may call the door phone and listen to what may be happening outside or in  
another room.  
APPOINTMENT REMINDER/ALARM CLOCK  
This feature works like an alarm clock. Use it to remind yourself of an appointment  
later in the day (TODAY ONLY) or as a daily reminder every day (DAILY).You can set  
up to three alarms. Each one can be either a TODAY ONLY or a DAILY alarm.  
Dial the extension number of the door phone.  
You will be connected to the door phone and you can listen or have a con-  
versation.  
When the alarm rings, you will hear three short rings repeated three times. Lift the  
handset to answer the alarm. If you do not, the alarm will alert you two more times  
at five minute intervals.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, dial 13 to unlock the door.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key.  
To set alarms:  
EXECUTIVE/SECRETARY HOT LINE  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time at which you want the alarm to sound. Enter the time as HHMM  
(hours and minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY ONLY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Press TRANSFER to save.  
If programmed, an executive and a secretary can have a hot line between them.  
When the executive station is in the DND mode, all of its calls will ring the secre-  
tary station.  
Either person can press the BOSS key to make a voice call to the other station.  
Using the hot line will override DND at the other station.This key will light red  
when the other station is in use.  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
To cancel individual alarms:  
To transfer a call to a Boss in DND:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Press the HOLD key.  
Press the TRANSFER key followed by the BOSS key.  
Wait for the BOSS to answer to announce the call and hang up to complete  
the transfer OR  
Hang up to complete a blind transfer after pressing the BOSS key.  
NOTE: Display keysets can show a reminder message. See Alarm Reminder  
Messages under Display Features.  
EXECUTIVE DIVERT  
When the executive station is in the DIVERT mode all of his/her calls will ring the  
secretary station.  
Press the DIVERT key to pass a call while ringing.  
36  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
To transfer all calls to the Secretary:  
1
2
0
LOCKED OUTGOING  
Hold Button LED Flashes  
LOCKED ALL CALLS  
Hold Button LED Solid  
UNLOCKED  
Press the DIVERT key while the phone is idle. The LED will be lit and all calls  
will ring the secretary.  
Make outside calls  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO (ACCESS DENIED)  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Receive outside calls  
Make intercom calls  
Receive intercom calls  
YES  
YES  
YES  
The secretary can call the BOSS in the DIVERT mode but all other users will ring the  
secretary (the secretary can override the boss’ DIVERT).  
GROUP LISTENING  
MANUAL SIGNALLING  
When you are engaged on a call and you are using the handset, you may want  
other people to hear the distant party’s voice over the speaker:  
Use this feature when you want to send a brief 500ms ring burst to another station,  
regardless of the status of your phone (on-hook, off-hook, handsfree, DND, or ringing).  
Press the LISTEN key to turn on the speaker. The microphone is not in use, so  
the distant party does not hear other parties present in your office.  
Press LISTEN again to turn the speaker off and resume private conversation.  
Repeat if necessary.  
To send a signal to another station:  
Press the Manual Signalling (MS) key.  
You may press the MS key repeatedly to send multiple signals to the desig-  
nated station.  
NOTE: Depending on speaker volume and the acoustics of your office, it may be  
advisable to turn the group listening feature off before hanging up.This will elim-  
inate a momentary squeal.  
NOTE: Your phone must have a Manual Signalling (MS) key with a station  
number extender assigned to it.  
ACCOUNT CODES  
OFF-HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCE  
When equipped with optional equipment, your system will allow calls to be  
charged to a specific account.  
Keysets may receive a voice announcement while on another call. The calling sta-  
tion must have an OHVA key.When you are in DND, you cannot receive OHVA calls.  
The OHVA feature will work with intercom and transferred calls.When you receive  
an OHVA and secure OHVA is ON, you will hear the announcement in the handset  
receiver, if you are using the handset. If secure OHVA is OFF then you will hear the  
announcement on the speaker, if you are talking on the handset. If you are using  
the speakerphone the announcement will always be heard through the speaker.  
During any outside C.O. call, press the account (ACC) key.  
Enter the 3 digit account code bin number when prompted, OR  
If your key has an extender of 000 enter the account code (maximum 12 char-  
acters including Q and #) and press ACC000 again, OR  
If your key has an extender other than 000 (001~999) account code contained  
in that bin will automatically be entered for your.  
To make an off-hook voice announcement:  
Dial the extension number or press the DSS key.  
When you receive a busy signal, press the OHVA key.  
After the attention tone, begin speaking.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS key.  
Press the flashing CALL button on your keyset. This will place the original  
party on hold and allow you to talk to the announcing party.  
To return to your first party, press the key corresponding to your original call.  
This will disconnect the OHVA call.  
LOCKING YOUR KEYSET  
You can lock your keyset to control misuse of your phone while you are away.You  
can unlock it when you return.Your default station passcode is 1234.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 100.  
Dial your four digit station passcode.  
Dial 1 to locking outgoing, 2 for locked all calls, or 0 to unlock.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
NOTES:  
1. When you are voice announcing to a station close to you, use the handset to  
avoid an echo effect.  
2. You cannot off-hook voice announce to single line telephones.  
38  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
If your keyset is associated with a DCS 32 Button Add-On Module (DCS 32 AOM is  
not supported on the OfficeServ 7100), you can receive Executive OHVA calls.  
Executive Off-Hook Voice Announce allows you to engage in conversation on  
your keyset and simultaneously receive and reply handsfree to an OHVA through  
your DCS 32 Button Add-On Module (AOM). Use caution because the conversa-  
tion through the AOM may possibly be heard by the caller on the keyset. When  
you receive an executive OHVA through your AOM:  
CUSTOMIZING YOUR KEYSET  
AME PASSWORD  
This feature allows customers using the AME feature to enable password protec-  
tion. This will prevent unauthorized users from listening to your messages being  
left.The passcode is the same as your station passcode.This feature only applies if  
there is an Samsung voicemail installed in the system and your keyset has a pro-  
grammed AME key.  
Reply by speaking in the direction of the microphone in the AOM unit.  
Adjust the volume with the VOLUME keys on the AOM unit.  
Press the SPK key on the AOM to disconnect the announcing party.  
NOTES:  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 101 to turn on AME PASSCODE or 100 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
1. Executive off-hook voice announce can only be accomplished when an AOM  
is attached to your phone.  
2. If the MUTE key on the AOM is lit, you must press the AOM’s SPK key to  
answer the OHVA call.  
AUTO CAMP-ON  
OHVA BLOCK  
This option allows intercom calls to be automatically camped on, if possible, when  
a busy station is called.  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Block (BLOCK) key. Pressing this  
key will prevent anyone from making an OHVA to you until you press the button  
again and cancel the blocking.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 081 to turn CAMP-ON on or 080 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
OHVA REJECT  
Your keyset can be programmed with an OHVA Reject (REJECT) key. Pressing this  
key while receiving an OHVA call will disconnect the voice announcing party and  
return you to your original call.  
SELECT RING TONE  
Each keyset user can select any one of eight ring frequencies:  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 111.  
Dial 18 or press the UP and DOWN keys to hear each tone.  
When you hear the tone that you prefer, press TRANSFER to save it.  
IN GROUP/OUT OF GROUP  
If your keyset is assigned to a station ring group, you can remove your keyset from  
the group and then put it back in.While you are out of the group, you can receive  
calls to your extension number but not calls to the group number. If you have an  
IN/OUT key with the group number assigned.  
NOTE: Specific lines or stations may be programmed to ring with a different  
tone than what you have selected for your keyset.  
Press the IN/OUT key. It will light red when your keyset is in the group.  
Press the IN/OUT key again to exit the group and turn the light off. Repeat as  
necessary.  
CHANGE YOUR PASSCODE  
From the factory, your station passcode is 1234.You can change your station pass-  
code whenever you desire.  
If you do not have an IN/OUT key:  
Dial the IN/OUT access code number ________________, then the group  
number, then 0 to exit the group or 1 to enter the group.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 101.  
Dial your old passcode.  
Dial a new passcode (must be four characters).You can use 09.  
Redial the new passcode to verify. If successful, you will hear two beeps. Four  
beeps indicate an incorrect code. Reenter the code again.  
Press TRANSFER to store the new passcode.  
NOTE: If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the hand-  
set or press SPEAKER key.  
The IN/OUT key can include an extender to indicate the specific group that this  
key will affect. This means that if you are in multiple groups, you can decide for  
which groups you will receive calls.  
40  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Your keyset may be equipped with a Headset mode key. If it is so equipped press-  
ing this key while the light is out will cause the keyset to enter headset mode and  
the light will illuminate to indicate this. Pressing the key while the light is lit will  
cause the keyset to return to handset mode and the light will go out.  
SET ANSWER MODE (INTERCOM)  
You can receive internal calls in one of three modes (see Answering Intercom Calls  
under Intercom Calls for descriptions):  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 103.  
Dial 0 for Ringing, 1 for Auto Answer or 2 for Voice Announce.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
HOT KEYPAD  
On your phone system your keyset’s keypad can be madeliveorhotso that it is  
not necessary to lift the handset or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dial-  
ing. Calls can be made and features activated by simply dialing the C.O. line num-  
ber, trunk group access code, intercom number or feature access code.To activate  
this feature:  
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward  
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the  
ANS/RLS key before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 031 to turn the Hot Keypad on or 030 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
SET ANSWER MODE (CO)  
Your incoming CO calls can be set to follow the intercom answer mode.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 15 to access AUTO ANS CO.  
Press the VOLUME UP or DOWN key to change status.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
KEY CONFIRMATION TONE  
You can hear a short beep (confirmation tone) each time you press a button on the  
dial pad. This tone can be turned on or off.  
NOTE: When your keyset is programmed for Auto Answer and you have Forward  
No Answer (FNA) turned on, you must answer screened transfers by pressing the  
ANS/RLS key before your FNA timer expires or the call will forward.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 040 to turn tones off or 041 to turn tones on.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
AUTOMATIC HOLD  
REJOINING A PAGE  
While on an outside call, pressing a line key, route key or a flashing CALL button  
will automatically put your call on hold and connect you to the next call. This fea-  
ture can be turned on or off at your keyset.  
This feature allows you to hear the remaining portion of an ongoing internal page  
after you return your keyset to idle. To enable this feature:  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 051 to turn this feature on or 050 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 001 to turn Automatic Hold on or 000 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
RING PREFERENCE  
NOTE: Intercom calls can be automatically put on hold by pressing TRANSFER.  
This feature automatically answers ringing calls when you lift the handset or press  
the ANS/RLS key.This method will always answer calls in the order they arrived at  
your keyset.When you turn ring preference off, you must press the flashing button  
to answer a call, allowing you to answer calls in the order you choose.  
HEADSET OPERATION  
Keyset users can switch between headset mode and handset mode. When using  
headset mode, press the ANS/RLS key to answer and release calls.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 061 to turn ring preference on or 060 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 021 to use the headset or 020 to use the handset.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
42  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
AUTO ANSWER CO CALLS  
DISPLAY FEATURES  
This option will allow CO calls that directly ring your phone to auto answer.When  
a CO call arrives at your station and this option set for ON your phone will sound  
two beeps, the same as when a screened transfer is completed, and you will be  
connected to the CO call. In order for this option to work the station must also be  
programmed for auto answer (see SET ANSWER MODE).  
INTERACTIVE DISPLAY KEYS  
The three keys below the display are substitutes for dedicated feature keys and ac-  
cess codes. Pressing one of these keys has the same effect as pressing a program-  
mable key. These keys are called soft keys as their functions are not fixed. They  
change to present you with the best options for that call condition.The use of soft  
keys allows the programmable keys to be used for more DSS and speed dial keys.  
While on hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 151 to turn Auto Answer CO on or 150 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
The SCROLL key is used to display options available to the user at a particular time  
or during a specific procedure. Press this key once while in the idle state to view  
the three main categories available.  
NOTE: Outside lines must ring your station directly for the Auto Answer CO to  
work. Lines ringing a station group will not cause your phone to Auto Answer the  
call.  
201: STN NAME  
CALL OTHER ANS  
DISPLAY SPEED DIAL NAME  
This option allows you to view the name associated with a speed dial number as  
it is dialed.  
ANSWER: Guides you through the options to answer calls.  
OTHER: Guides you through features other than making or answering calls.  
CALL: Guides you through the options to make a call.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 111 to turn DISP SPDNAME on or 110 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Select one of the main categories: CALL, OTHER or ANS (ANSWER). Press the  
SCROLL key to display additional options available under each of the three main  
categories. The symbol ¬ displayed as the last character on the lower line of the  
display indicates that there are additional options.Press the SCROLL key to display  
these additional options.  
CALLER ID REVIEW ALL  
This feature allows display keyset users to review Caller ID information for calls  
sent to their stations. This list can be from ten to fifty calls in a first in, first out  
basis. The list includes calls that you answered and calls that rang your station  
but that you did not answer. When reviewing this list, you can press one button  
to dial the person back. The system must be using LCR to dial the stored num-  
ber.  
User instructions will be displayed in lower case letters. Options assigned to soft  
keys will be in upper case letters.  
DIRECTORY INFORMATION  
An 11 character directory name can be assigned to each extension number.  
Display keyset users can view the name of the called or calling station before an-  
swering.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 121 to turn CID REVIEW ALL on or 120 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Each outside line can have an 11 character directory name. Incoming calls can be  
easily identified and answered with different greetings.  
SECURE OHVA  
This option allows you to receive OHVA calls via the speaker while you are on the  
handset.  
Outside and internal calls ringing to a station group will display [CALL FOR xxx]  
where xxx is the station group number.This allows you to answer calls directed to  
you differently than calls directed to your group.  
With you handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Press 131 to turn AUTO CAMP-ON on or 130 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
44  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALL LOG  
CALL PROGRESS DISPLAYS  
This system can log both incoming and outgoing calls placed from or to your tele-  
phone. You must have a LOG button programmed on your keyset and assigned a  
review list.  
During everyday call handling, your keyset display will provide information that is  
helpful and in some cases invaluable. Displays like [CALL FROM 203], [TRANSFER  
TO 202], [701: RINGING], [TRANSFER FM 203], [708 busy], [Camp on to 204], [Recall  
from 204], [Call for 501], [message frm 204] and [FWD ALL to 204] keep you in-  
formed of what is happening and where you are. In some conditions you are  
prompted to take an action and in other cases you receive directory information.  
Each IN and OUT list can be up to 50 numbers maximum. They are assigned in  
blocks of 10 each.  
To view your incoming and outbound call logs:  
DISPLAY NUMBER DIALED  
Display keysets begin showing digits as they are dialed. They will stay in the dis-  
play until the call duration timer comes on automatically or the TIMER button is  
pressed. If the call duration timer is not used, the number dialed will be displayed  
until the call is released, transferred or put on hold.  
Press the LOG key.  
Press either the IN or OUT key.  
View the first IN/OUT telephone number. At this point you may select one of  
the three options related to this number or use the UP/DOWN keys to scroll  
through your list of calls.  
CALL DURATION TIMER  
Press the CLEAR key to erase this number from the list.  
Press the NND key repeatedly to view the Name, Number, or Date associated  
with this call.  
The system can be set to automatically time outside calls. A few seconds after you  
dial a telephone number, the timer appears in the display. It appears immediately  
for incoming calls. The call timer continues for the duration of the call. Call dura-  
tion times are displayed in minutes and seconds. If a call lasts longer than 60 min-  
utes, the timer restarts.  
Press the DIAL key to call this number.  
This options are the same for the incoming or outgoing call logs.  
You can press the TIMER key to manually begin timing a call. Press it again to stop  
timing. If you press it while the automatic timer is on, the call duration time is  
restarted.  
DIAL BY NAME  
Each station or speed dial number can have an associated directory name. A sta-  
tion or speed dial number can be selected by scrolling alphabetically through a  
directory name list. This on-line “phone book” allows the user to look up and dial  
any station or speed dial number in seconds.  
AUTO TIMER  
Display keyset users may have the timer automatically start when they answer  
incoming calls or after a short delay on an outgoing call.  
Press the DIR key (DIRECTORY).  
Select the directory you wish to use: PERS (personal speed dial numbers), SYS  
(system speed dial numbers) or STN (station names).  
Dial the key on the keypad that corresponds to the first letter of the name you  
wish to search for.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 110.  
Dial 011 to turn the auto timer on or 010 to turn it off.  
Press TRANSFER to store your selection.  
Use the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the names.  
Press the DIAL soft key to dial the number.  
TIMER FUNCTION  
Display keyset users may use this feature as a simple stopwatch.  
NOTE:A DIR key can have an extender to take you directly to one of the above lists  
(PERS, SYS, or STN).  
When the keyset is idle, press the TIMER button to start timing.  
Press the TIMER button again to stop timing.  
Read the elapsed time in the display.  
Lift the handset and replace it. The display will return to date and time.  
46  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIAL 8  
DIAL 9  
DIAL ,  
NOTES:  
T
W
:
U
X
=
V
Y
[
Q
Z
]
8
VIEWING MESSAGE INDICATIONS  
9
You can view all of your message indications before you return them:  
With the handset on-hook, press the MESSAGE key with the red flashing light.  
The first station that left a message indication will be displayed.  
Press the UP and DOWN arrows to scroll through the stations that left mes-  
sage indications. Use the soft keys to reply, clear or advance to the next mes-  
sage.  
,
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-  
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.  
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.  
Press the ANS/RLS key to return your keyset to the idle condition.  
To cancel an individual alarm and reminder message:  
ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES  
When you use the alarm/appointment reminder feature, you create a 16 charac-  
ter reminder message. When the alarm rings, your message will appear instead of  
[ALARM REMINDER]. To program reminder messages:  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 112.  
Dial alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Press the HOLD key.  
Press the TRANSFER key.  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 116.  
Dial the alarm number 1, 2 or 3.  
Dial the time you want the alarm to go off.Enter the time as HHMM (hours and  
minutes) using the 24 hour clock.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES  
Each personal speed dial number can have an 11 character name assigned to it.  
This name is used to select the speed dial bin when you are dialing by directory.  
Dial 0 (NOT SET), 1 (TODAY) or 2 (DAILY) to select the alarm type.  
Write your message using the dial pad keys. Each press of a key selects a char-  
acter. Pressing the next key moves the cursor to the next position. For exam-  
ple, if your message is “TAKE MEDICATION,” press 8 once to get the letter “T.”  
Press 2 once to get “A.” Press 5 twice to get “K.” Continue selecting characters  
from the following table to complete your message.  
Press TRANSFER and then dial 106.  
Dial the speed dial bin number 00–49.  
Write your message using the procedure described in Alarm Reminder Mes-  
sages.  
Press the TRANSFER key to store the speed dial name.  
Repeat for each speed dial bin if necessary.  
Press the TRANSFER key to store the alarm and reminder message.  
Repeat for each alarm if needed.  
STATION NAMES  
COUNT  
DIAL 0  
DIAL 1  
DIAL 2  
DIAL 3  
DIAL 4  
DIAL 5  
DIAL 6  
DIAL 7  
1
2
>
?
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
You can assign an 11 character name to your keyset.This allows other display key-  
set users to call you using the directory dial feature.  
<
space  
,
!
To program a station name:  
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
S
Press TRANSFER and then dial 104.  
Enter the 11 character name using the procedure described in Alarm Remind-  
er Messages.  
H
K
N
Q
Press TRANSFER to store the name.  
L
O
R
M
P
48  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS  
TEXT MESSAGING  
You can view your key assignments and add extenders to some of your program-  
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.  
This feature allows two digital keyset users to respond to each other with prepro-  
grammed text messages. After receiving an Off Hook Voice Announcement or  
Station Camp-On, you may respond with a text message while continuing to talk  
and listen to your outside party.The other station can view this message and take  
the appropriate action or respond back with another text message.  
While on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 107.  
Use the VOLUME keys to scroll through all of your programmable keys OR  
Press the programmable key to which you want to add the extender.  
When you reach a key listed below, dial the corresponding extender.  
Press TRANSFER to store and exit programming.  
You must be permitted to use the Text Messaging feature. See your System  
Administrator or Technician to be assigned this feature. They will assign you ten  
(10) blank messages.You can create any 16 character messages (01 to 10) that are  
appropriate for your use.  
Please refer to the Enhanced Display Programming Section provided by your  
installation company when requested for a complete list of descriptions and  
extenders for any keys you may have programmed on your keyset.  
NOTE: See ALARM REMINDER MESSAGES for instructions on how to enter charac-  
ters to create a text message.  
NOTE: Confirm that the cursor is placed correctly before you enter the extender.  
Familiarization with the two digit message numbers you will use the most will  
make this procedure quick and easy. However if you do not know them, use the  
UP/DOWN key to scroll to the desired message, then press SEND.  
LCR WITH CLEAR  
When you are making an outside call using LCR and dial an incorrect digit, you can  
press the CLEAR soft key to reenter the telephone number. You do not need to  
redial 9 to reaccess LCR.  
The basics steps in text messaging are:  
1. Press TMSG soft key to begin text messaging.  
BACKSPACE WITH LCR  
2. Dial the 2 digit number for the desired message.  
3. Confirm this is the intended message then press SEND.  
4. Wait for a reply from the other station (steps 1, 2 & 3)  
5. When any station presses EXIT the displays at both stations return to their  
previous call progress condition.  
If you misdial while using LCR, you can delete digits shown in the display by press-  
ing the BSPC soft key as many times as necessary.  
At all times after step 1 you can talk and listen to your caller while repeating steps  
2.  
The example on the following page will better demonstrate how to use Text  
Messaging. In this example station 201 is making an off hook voice announce-  
ment to station 205 who after hearing the announcement will respond with a text  
message.  
50  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
STATION 201: LINDA  
STATION 205: JOHN  
received a call on line 702  
is talking on line 701  
CALLER ID  
Talking on line 702  
WHAT IS CALLER ID?  
702:  
01:15  
701:  
05:25  
Caller ID is the name given to the telephone company-provided feature that de-  
livers the telephone number and sometimes the name of the person calling your  
phone. There are two types of Caller ID; the first delivers the calling party’s tele-  
phone number only and the second (sometimes referred to as “Deluxe” Caller ID)  
delivers both the calling party’s telephone number and name as listed in the tele-  
phone directory.  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
Press TRANSFER  
Transfer:  
RETURN  
Dial 205  
The phone system can handle both types of Caller ID; in fact, in the case of num-  
ber only delivery, the system can be programmed to insert a name for a specific  
telephone number. However, even though you are paying to receive Caller ID  
information, there are some circumstances that mean you will not receive this in-  
formation. The six most common reasons are listed below along with the display  
information that the system will provide.  
205:busy  
OHVA  
CAMP ON  
OHVA to 205  
OHVA from 201  
TMSG  
REJECT  
PRIVATE  
The caller does not wish his/her name or number to be re-  
vealed to you. This type of call can be stopped at the tele-  
phone company by dialing an access code on your outside  
lines. This will redirect these PRIVATE calls to an announce-  
ment that states that you do not wish to receive calls that  
have had Caller ID blocked.The code to block these calls can  
usually be found in the front section of the telephone direc-  
tory.  
Wait for reply  
GIVE THE CALL  
TMSG:01  
SEND  
Dial 03 or press twice  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
OUT OF AREA  
PAYPHONE  
The caller is calling from an area that cannot provide Caller  
ID information (for example, international calls) or he/she is  
calling from a type of circuit that cannot provide Caller ID  
information, for example, some outbound WATS lines.  
TMSG:03  
SEND  
ASK THEM TO HOLD  
Wait for reply  
TMSG  
EXIT  
The caller is calling from a coin-operated telephone. The  
telephone company will send this information as there are  
no directory listings for pay phones.The number will be de-  
livered as usual.  
702:  
01:45  
701:  
05:55  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
CONF PAGE MUTE  
INVALID CID INFO  
NO CID RECEIVED  
This is a message that will be displayed when CID informa-  
tion is sent on the line but was somehow corrupted.  
This is a message that will be displayed when there was no  
CID information sent on the line.  
52  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NO CID DSP  
Caller ID Digital Signal Processors (CIDDSP’s) are resources  
in the OfficeServ 100, the OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ  
7000 Series systems required for receiving CID data. If there  
are no CIDDSP’s available at the time a call comes in, this is  
the message you will see on your display.  
VIEWING THE NEXT CALLER ID CALL  
In the event that you have a call waiting or a camped-on call at your keyset, you  
can press the NEXT key to display the Caller ID information associated with the  
call in queue at your keyset. Either the CID name or CID number will show in the  
display depending on your Name/Number selection.  
NOTE: The Caller ID features may require optional software and/or hardware.  
Please see your service and installation company for details.  
To view Caller ID information for calls that have been camped-on to your keyset,  
press the NEXT key. If your keyset does not have a NEXT key, press the CID key  
and then the NEXT soft key.  
WHAT IS ANI?  
[T1/E&M NOT SUPPORTED ON OS 7100]  
ANI (Automatic Number Identification) is a feature offered by some telephone  
service providers that provides the calling party’s telephone number. This service  
is only available on E&M Tie Lines on a T1, digital trunk. ANI is similar to Caller  
Identification (CID) but the format and information of the calling person is differ-  
ent. CID uses FSK signalling and ANI uses DTMF signalling. Usually, with ANI, a call-  
ing party’s identity is the Listed Directory Number (LDN) unless a separate bill-to-  
number has been specified, (in which case the bill-to-number will be sent). Note  
that ANI does not provide calling party NAME,only the number.The phone system  
can provide calling number to name translation table.  
SAVING THE CALLER ID NUMBER  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may press  
the SAVE key to save the CID number. If your keyset does not have a SAVE key,  
press the CID key, the SCROLL key and then the SAVE soft key. The system must  
be using LCR to dial the saved number.  
REDIALING A SAVED CALLER ID  
NUMBER  
WHAT IS CLI?  
To redial a number that has been saved, press the SNR key or dial 17.  
On ISDN circuits, calling party information is called CLI and is supported on both  
BRI (not supported on OS 7100) and PRI type circuits on the OfficeServ 100 and on  
the OfficeServ 500 systems. On BRI circuits the OfficeServ 100 and the OfficeServ  
500 only support number delivery and, like ANI, a name can be attached to the  
telephone number of frequent callers via the Caller ID translation table. On 5ESS  
and NI2 PRI circuits both name and number support is provided on the OfficeServ  
100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 Series systems.  
NOTES:  
1. Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number.  
2. If the Hot Keypad feature has been turned off, you must first lift the handset  
or press the SPEAKER key before you begin dialing.  
STORING A CALLER ID NUMBER  
At any time during an incoming call that provides CID information, you may save  
the CID number as a speed dial number in your personal speed dial list.To store a  
Caller ID number in a personal speed dial bin:  
SELECTING YOUR CALLER ID  
DISPLAY  
Simulteneous display of Caller ID name and number on incoming CO calls on both  
lines of display keysets is supported on all OfficeServ systems, on transferred CO  
calls, you can decide if you want to see the Caller ID name or Caller ID number in  
the first line of the display. Regardless of which one is selected, you can press the  
NND key to view the other pieces of Caller ID information. To select the type of  
Caller ID information you wish to view of transferred calls first:  
Press the STORE key. The system displays the speed dial bin in which the  
number was stored, OR  
Press the CID key and then press the SCROLL key.  
Press the STORE soft key.  
The system displays the speed dial bin in which the number was stored.  
NOTE: Your telephone system must have LCR correctly programmed to redial the  
saved number. If LCR is not being used on your system, you will not be allowed to  
STORE CID numbers.  
With the handset on-hook, press TRANSFER and then dial 119.  
Dial 0 for CID options, 1 for ANI options, or 2 for CLI options.  
Dial 0 if you do not wish to view CID information, 1 to view the NUMBER first  
or 2 to view the NAME first.  
Press TRANSFER to exit and store your selection.  
54  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
You can now CLEAR this entry, OR  
Use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
Press DIAL to call this person back, OR  
Press SCROLL and then press STORE to save this number in a personal speed  
INQUIRE CALLER ID PARK/HOLD INFO  
If you are informed that an incoming call is on hold or has been parked for you,  
you may view the Caller ID information before you retrieve the call.This may influ-  
ence how you choose to handle the call.  
dial bin.  
From an idle keyset:  
NOTES:  
1. Each keyset defaults with ten review bins. Please see your system administra-  
tor to determine the number of bins assigned to your keyset.  
2. Your system must have LCR correctly programmed to allow you to DIAL num-  
bers from the review list or to STORE entries from the review list.  
Press the INQUIRE key, OR  
Press the CID key and then the INQUIRE soft key.  
Dial the trunk number.  
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS key, OR  
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
If you are on a call:  
Press the INQUIRE key.Your existing call will go on hold, OR  
Press the CID key and then the INQUIRE soft key to place the first call on hold.  
Dial the trunk number.  
You may now answer the call by pressing the ANS key, OR  
You may use NND to view more information about this call, OR  
You can return to the idle condition by pressing IGNORE.  
NOTES:  
1. If you are on an intercom call or you have Automatic Hold turned off, you  
must finish the existing call or place it on hold before inquiring.  
2. If you inquire about an outgoing call, you will receive a [call no longer avail-  
able] display.  
REVIEWING PAST CALLER ID CALLS  
This feature allows you to review CID information for calls sent to your keyset.This  
list can contain 10–50 calls in a last-in,first-out basis.The list includes calls that you  
answered and calls that rang your keyset but that you did not answer (missed  
calls). When reviewing this list, you can press one button to dial the person back.  
The system must be using LCR to dial the stored number. To access the CID infor-  
mation stored in your REVIEW list:  
Press the REVIEW key, OR  
Press the CID key and then press the REVIEW soft key.  
If you have entries in your review list, the most recent call will be shown first.  
56  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
iDCS 64 BUTTON MODULE  
Samsung Voicemail  
This section describes how to setup and use the various features available to a  
Subscriber. A Subscriber is a person that has been authorized access to the vari-  
ous features and services available in the Samsung Voicemail. Please review this  
section carefully before you use your Authorized Features and Services, known as  
Subscriber Services.  
WITH KEYSET  
The 64 button module is used when you need more programmable keys added to  
your keyset. The 64 red LED’s provide visual indication of calls and features. The  
extra programmable keys are used exactly like the ones on your keyset. Make  
them DSS/BLF keys or feature keys. As a DSS/BLF the size of the 64 button module  
allows for greater call status and faster call processing.The 64 button module does  
not support executive off-hook voice announce (OHVA) and does not have a  
microphone. A maximum of two 64 button modules can be assigned to any key-  
set.  
Voicemail is one of the Subscriber Services available. Your voice mail box has the  
capability of storing private messages, and offers a number of options for sending  
or redirecting messages as well as provides several ways to notify you of new mes-  
sages.  
Another very common Subscriber Service is Access Manager.This allows you con-  
trol over when and where you receive your calls as well as what to speak to your  
callers in the event you are unable to speak to them directly. The ‘events’ are  
referred to as “Call Conditions. No-Answer, Busy, and Blocked are the most com-  
monly used Call Conditions.  
This guide can be used by Subscribers from within the office or from telephones  
outside the office. The basic operation is the same, but the access method will be  
different. See the Subscriber Services Menu Diagram for more details.  
Note that some features and prompts detailed here may not be available to all  
Subscribers. See your System Administrator if you have questions about feature  
availability.  
58  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Subscriber Services Menu  
Group New  
Messages  
Group Saved  
Messages  
Listen to New Review Saved  
Record & Send  
Messages  
Access  
Manager  
Personal  
Greetings  
Mailbox  
Administration  
Personal  
Services  
Pause, Resume  
Play Menu  
Options  
Exit  
Messages  
Messages  
11  
33  
1
3
2
4
5
6
#
8
0
*
Assign and/or Edit  
Change  
Review  
Group Messages Menu  
Listen Menu  
Record Menu  
Follow Me  
1
1
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
1
Primary Greeting  
Message Alert  
Workload  
Group  
Urgent Messages  
Play  
For a Directory  
Assign and/or Edit  
Busy Greeting  
Change  
Pager Notification  
Edit Stored  
Telephone Numbers  
Block All Calls  
Call forwarding  
Call Screening  
Find Me  
1
1
11  
2
#
3
4
5
6
7
8
#
0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0
2
3
5
7
8
Message  
of Subscribers  
Play Previous  
Message  
To Create a  
Reminder  
Group  
Callback Requests  
Assign and/or Edit  
Blocking Greeting  
Review Deleted  
Messages  
Change  
Change  
Password  
##  
2
3
4
5
8
9
#
0
1
2
Weekly Schedule  
Save  
Group  
Reminders  
Assign and/or Edit  
Night Greeting  
Review Undelivered  
Messages  
Place a  
Record  
Name  
"Enter the Recipient's Number"  
Message  
Direct Call  
Discard  
Message  
Review  
Recording  
3
Group  
Private Messages  
1
Assign and/or Edit  
Screened Greeting  
Auto Play  
New Messages  
Name  
Enter Directory  
3
3
Reply to Sender  
4
Stop, Append to  
Recording  
2
Group  
Fax Only Messages  
Edit Only  
Personal Greetings  
Auto Play Message  
Information  
Extended  
Prompting  
Personal  
4
8
0
Administration  
Place  
5
Discard Recording  
and Rerecord  
Call to Sender  
3
Auto Set  
Night Intercept  
Edit Only  
Mailbox Greeting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Deliver Copy  
of Fax Message  
55  
6
Set  
4
Delivery Options  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
R
e
c
o
r
d
d
S
e
nd  
Play  
Forward a  
Copy of Message  
Broadcast Message  
Menu Options  
Specify  
Future Delivery  
5
Pause, Resume  
Menu Prompting  
Play  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Record  
C
Cancel, Return  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
#
0
7
Access Coverage  
a Reminder  
t
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
r
i
be  
r
S
ervices  
SEND Message,  
Then Copy  
*
6
Change  
Playback Volume  
Group  
A Specific Sender  
Play  
Menu Options  
Cancel, Return  
Cancel, Return  
Play  
77  
8
t
o S cr r Services  
u
b
s
i
b
e
Menu Options  
to Subscriber Services  
Rewind  
5 Seconds  
*
*
7
Pause, Resume  
Message Playback  
Play  
Cancel, Return  
Cancel, Return  
sc
Sub riber Services  
Message Inventory  
t
o
S
u
b
s
c
ri  
b
e
r Services  
o
Change  
Playback Volume  
*
*
77  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
9
Play  
Menu Options  
Pause, Resume  
Record/Playback  
8
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
#
Cancel, Return  
Fast Forward  
5 Seconds  
to Subscriber Services  
9
Skip to  
Next Message  
*
Change  
Playback Speed  
99  
Scan Messages  
##  
0
SEND Message,  
Then Exit Record  
Play  
#
0
*
Menu Options  
Play  
Menu Options  
Play Message  
Information  
00  
C
a
n
ce  
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
Ca  
n
c
e
l
,
R
e
t
u
r
n
t
t
o
S
u
b
s
crib  
e
r Services  
t
sc
Sub riber Services  
*
*
NOTE: All options shown MAY NOT be authorized. If an option is not available  
please speak to your system administrator.  
60  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ACCESSING YOUR MAILBOX  
GETTING STARTED  
Using your new Samsung Voicemail Subscriber Services is as simple as following  
a few simple spoken instructions. First time users should read this section as a  
tutorial.You should start with the following steps:  
[Also known as Subscriber Services Menu]  
Inside Callers [Subscriber logging in from their Desk]  
Dial the voicemail access number or press the key assigned to ring  
the voicemail [VMMSG].  
Access your Subscriber Services Menu - You already know how to do this.  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
From the Subscriber Services Menu:  
0000).  
Record a Primary/No-Answer Personal Greeting. Dial [5][1].  
Record a Mailbox Greeting. Dial [5][7].  
Change your access code (Password). Dial [#][7][1].  
Record your name. Dial [#][7][2].  
Outside Callers [Subscribers calling from Cell Phones or outside of the  
office environment]  
Dial the phone number that will be answered by the voicemail. The main  
greeting will answer.  
At the main greeting dial [#] plus your Subscriber (or mailbox) number  
(Subscriber and Mailbox numbers will usually match your extension number).  
Enter your personal password when prompted (the default password is  
0000).  
Enter your directory name. Dial [#][7][3].  
After you have completed the steps above your Subscriber Services are set up and  
ready to use.  
LISTEN TO YOUR MESSAGES  
If there are new messages in your mailbox your [VMMSG] key will be lit. Call the  
Samsung Voicemail by pressing this key, and when prompted enter your pass-  
word.You will then be at the Subscriber Services Menu. Select [1] to listen to new  
messages or [3] to listen to saved messages.  
Access your Subscriber Services (or Mailbox) from a Station  
other than your Own (or checking a mailbox associated with a  
different station)  
Press the [VMMSG] key or dial the voicemail group number. You will be  
prompted to enter a password.  
Press [,]. This will take you to the Main Auto Attendant Menu.  
Press [#] plus the Subscriber number of your choice.You will be prompted to  
enter you password.  
Note:After you enter your password, ifAutoplay of New Messagesis enabled and  
you have new messages the Samsung Voicemail will begin to play them auto-  
matically.A subscriber can control this feature.From the Subscriber Services Menu  
[6] [5] toggles “Autoplay of New Messages” ON/OFF.  
At this point the inside and outside callers follow the same instructions. You will  
hear a message stating the number of messages left in your mailbox.You will then  
hear the Subscriber Services Menu with the following options:  
SUBSCRIBER SERVICES MENU  
The following is a list of all the options available in the Subscriber Main Menu.  
1
LISTENING TO NEW MESSAGES  
GROUP NEW MESSAGES  
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
LISTENING TO OLD MESSAGES  
GROUP OLD MESSAGES  
ACCESS MANAGER  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
,
Listen to New Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Record and Send Message - See Sending Messages.  
Review Saved Messages - See Listening to your Message.  
Access Manager - See Access Manager.  
11  
2
3
33  
4
Personal Greetings - See Personal Greetings.  
Mailbox Administration - See Mailbox Administration.  
Personal Services - See Personal Services.  
5
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
6
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
PAUSE / RESUME  
8
Return to Main Menu.  
62  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Change playback speed of the recording.  
Home Page  
0
,
#
PLAY MENU OPTIONS  
EXIT TO AUTO ATTENDANT  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
99  
0
There are two levels of speed during playback. Dialing this code will toggle  
between the two speeds.  
Play options.  
Pressing this key will play all the menu options available to you from this  
point.  
1 or 3  
00  
#
Hear the time and date, and sender's information of the message you just  
heard. Sender information is not available on outside calls.  
LISTENING TO OLD OR NEW MESSAGES  
Move to the next message. This does not Save or Discard the current mes-  
sage - it is retained as new.  
1
Play / replay the message you just heard.  
Play the previous message.  
11  
2
##  
Scan. Plays first 7 seconds of a message then skips to next message. This is  
similar to the scan button on a radio. It will allow you to find a specific mes-  
sage quickly. To stop scanning press [1].  
Save the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
Delete the message you just heard and listen to the next message.  
Reply to the message.  
3
,
Cancel and return to previous menu.  
4
This will allow you to leave a message in the mailbox of the sender (if the  
sender has a mailbox on this system).  
11 or 33  
5
Return the call directly to the telephone number that left the message.  
This will work for internal and external callers, but Caller ID service is need-  
ed to use this feature on an outside call.  
GROUP NEW OR OLD MESSAGES  
Messages can be grouped as either Reminders, press [3] or Messages from a spe-  
cific sender, press [9].  
55  
Deliver a fax copy.  
This will allow you to receive attached faxmail document(s). Faxmail docu-  
ments can be delivered to any fax machine of your choice as long as out  
calling is authorized. You can also have faxmail messages automatically  
delivered to the fax machine of your choice.  
Additionally you can press [#] and hear a summary of your mailbox contents:  
a) Number of messages  
b) Number of reminders  
6
Forward the message and saves a copy.  
c) Number of urgent messages  
d) Number of messages needing a callback  
e) Number of private messages  
f) Number of fax messages  
The subscriber can be selected by dialing their mailbox number (nnn),  
using the directory service (#) or you may also add comments and leave it  
as a memo to yourself (##).  
The Send and Copy Service (option 6) allows a user to send copies of a mes-  
sage to multiple recipients easily. A different introduction message may be  
left for each recipient.  
2
7
Rewind the message 5 seconds.  
RECORD AND SEND A MESSAGE  
77  
Change playback volume of the recording.  
There are two levels of volume during playback. Dialing this code will tog-  
gle between the two levels.  
This option is used to send a message to another subscriber.The steps are simple:  
8
9
Pause or resume during message playback.  
Fast forward the message 5 seconds.  
a) Enter the recipient’s mailbox number, or if this is not known enter [#] to use  
the system directory.  
64  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
b) Record your message at the tone. After recording the message, you will hear  
the Send Menu with the following functions:  
Note: ALL Access Manager options MUST be individually allowed by the System  
Administrator for each Subscriber. They are:  
1
2
3
4
5
6
#
Review  
Continue Recording  
Discard and Re-Record  
Set Message Attributes (Delivery Options)  
Schedule Future Delivery  
1
Follow Me  
Allows the subscriber to enter an alternate location and set how long the new  
destination (Designated Location) will be active. This number may be an  
internal or external number. This is useful if you are frequently traveling or  
changing the number where you can be reached.  
Save and Send then Send a Copy to Someone Else  
Save and Send the Recording  
When Follow Me is activated, the transfer will be supervised and confirmed.  
This means that if the call is not answered or if rejected by the Subscriber at  
the designated location it will be recalled to the Subscriber’s mailbox.  
Setting Message Attributes  
3
4
Call Blocking  
If after recording a message you select [4] you can set up any combination of the  
following delivery options:  
When this feature is active, callers will not be transferred to your extension,  
they will hear your 'blocked' greeting (if recorded) and will go directly to your  
mailbox if they do not select any or are not offered any other options.  
1
2
3
4
5
,
Urgent Delivery  
Return Receipt Requested  
Request a Call Back  
Private Delivery  
Reply Required  
Exit  
Call Forwarding  
Unlike Follow Me where the subscriber wants to take their calls at an alter-  
nate location this feature allows the subscriber to pass control of his calls to  
another Subscriber. The “Forwarded To” Subscriber will now be in control of  
the caller and the caller will NOT return to originating Subscriber’s Mailbox. If  
the “Forwarded To” Subscriber does not answer the caller it will now follow  
what ever the “Forwarded To” Subscriber has set up for their call conditions.  
The Caller will hearForwarding to”“{Subscriber Name}before actually being  
forwarded.  
Scheduling Future Delivery  
If after recording a message you select [5] to schedule future delivery, you will be  
able to set message attributes and set this message as:  
#
1
2
3
4
5
,
Immediate Delivery  
Next Few Hours  
End of Current Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
Beginning of Next Business Day (based on your Availability Schedule)  
A Coming Day of the Week  
Specific Day / Time  
Exit  
5
6
Call Screening  
If this is turned on, the caller will be asked their name and the Samsung  
Voicemail will play this name to you before the transfer, giving you an option  
to accept or reject the call.  
Find Me  
Find Me, when enabled, will attempt to locate the subscriber by calling a list  
of preprogrammed phone numbers. The stored phone numbers are entered  
in 'Personal Services' [#][2] (if allowed by the Administrator). The stored tele-  
phone number list can contain up to 9 preprogrammed telephone numbers.  
The Find Me feature only use the first five.  
4
ACCESS MANAGER  
7
Night Intercept  
The Access Manager allows the subscriber to set a number of options for when,  
where and how, and/or if the Samsung Voicemail contacts you when a caller dials  
your extension number. All of the options are toggled on/off based on their cur-  
rent status when you access them.  
This feature is dependent on your weekly availability schedule, which is  
entered in 'Personal Services' [#][3] (if allowed by the Administrator). When  
Night Intercept is active the Samsung Voicemail will first ring your extension  
0 then play your primary, No Answer greeting during the day (when you are  
66  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
available) and will NOT ring your extension but simply play your Night greet-  
ing during the night (when you are not available).  
Example:“Hi this is John Smith.I'm sorry I am not available to answer your call.  
If someone else can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to  
leave me a message, press 1.”  
Note: This does NOT use the Day and Night schedules of the phone system. It  
is solely controlled by the Subscriber’s Availability Schedule.  
2
Busy Greeting  
Played to a caller when you are already talking to someone on your extension  
or the telephone at your Designated Location.  
8
,
0
#
Pause / Resume  
Exit from Access Manager  
Play All Options  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Busy  
Greeting' feature.  
Play Access Coverage  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm on another line right now. If someone else  
can help you, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave a message,  
press 1.”  
This feature is useful for finding out how you current access settings are set.  
It will also tell you what greetings will play under each of the call conditions  
you have setup.  
3
Call Blocking Greeting  
Used while Call Blocking is enabled in your Access Manager or if your phone  
is forwarded ALL or DND.  
5
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Blocking' feature.  
PERSONAL GREETINGS  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Sorry I missed your call, but I'm going to be  
out of the office for the next few hours. If someone else can help you, please  
enter the extension number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
The options available in this menu will be determined by your System  
Administrator, and not all of them may be available to you. In the simplest sys-  
tems, only a mailbox greeting will be available, additional greetings may be acces-  
sible in more complex systems.  
4
Night Greeting  
Your Personal Greeting will be played every time someone dials your extension  
and you do not answer.  
Used during the time period you are scheduled UNAVAILABLE, usually after  
business hours during the evening and at night.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Scheduling' feature.  
You may record up to 9 Personal Greetings, and you may assign any one of them  
to be active. There are several different 'Call Coverage' conditions to which you  
may assign any of your 9 greetings.The Call Coverage Conditions are: No-Answer,  
Busy, and Do Not Disturb (or Forwarded All). This will allow different greetings to  
play depending on the type of call forward that you have set, or the condition of  
your telephone.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I've left the office for the evening. If you would  
like to try someone else, please enter the extension number now. Or, to leave  
me a message, press 1.”  
5
Call Screening Greeting  
The Call Coverage conditions that you can assign specific greetings to are select-  
ed by the following digits:  
Used while Call Screening is enabled, and you REJECT a caller after listening  
to the caller's record name.  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Call  
Screening' feature.  
1
Primary/No Answer Greeting  
Used when in your office, away from your desk or during the time period you  
are scheduled available. If this is the only Personal Greeting you record, it will  
play for all call coverage conditions.  
Example:“Hi, this is John Smith. I'm sorry, but I am not available to speak with  
you at this time. If someone else can help you, please enter the extension  
number now. Or, to leave me a message, press 1.”  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the 'Basic  
Greeting' feature.  
68  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Setting Up Message Alert:  
6
Edit Personal Greetings  
You may also edit/record each one of the greetings (1-9) at any time.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [1] for Message Alert.  
Select a greeting number to edit and follow the instructions to record your  
greeting. When you are done recording your greeting, you will be able to lis-  
ten to the greeting you recorded, save the greeting you recorded and return  
to the previous menu, record the greeting again, or exit without saving the  
greeting.  
There are 4 options available to you:  
Press [1] to toggle message alert on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be notified.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the destination phone number.  
Note: If you record only the greeting assigned to the No-Answer Call  
Coverage Condition,then that greeting will play to callers for all Call Coverage  
Conditions (No-Answer, Busy, Blocked, Night, and Rejected Caller). In this case,  
the salutation part of the greeting should be very general.  
2
Pager Notification  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call your beeper  
service and notify you after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
7
Edit Mailbox Greeting  
Used whenever a caller reaches your mailbox or if you have not recorded any  
of the Call Coverage greetings.The way a caller is transferred to your mailbox  
greeting directly, is by another subscriber transferring the caller to your mail-  
box using the VT (Voicemail Transfer) key.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [2] for pager notification.  
There are 4 options available to you:  
This option is available only if the Administrator has assigned you the  
'Mailbox Greeting Option' feature.  
Press [1] to toggle pager notification on and off.  
Press [2] to set the schedule when you would like to be paged.  
Press [3] to be notified on urgent messages only.  
Press [4] to set the pager phone number.  
Example:Hi, this is John Smith. Please leave me a message, I will call you as  
soon as I can.”  
Note: This greeting will only play if none of the 5 personal greetings has  
played to the caller. A common usage for this Greeting is when another  
Subscriber is talking with a caller and uses the VT key on their phone to trans-  
fer the caller directly to your Mailbox.  
3
Undelete  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to  
undelete any messages that you have recently deleted (up to the pro-  
grammed Daily Maintenance Time, which is set to 3 a.m. by Default the  
following morning).  
6
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [3] for Deleted Messages.  
MAILBOX ADMINISTRATION  
Deleted voice mail messages are temporarily stored in memory until 3 a.m.  
the following day. Select this option to recover ("undelete") previously delet-  
ed messages, during this period of time.  
The Mailbox Administration menu is used to turn on and off your pager notifica-  
tion, message alert options and other message control features.  
1
Message Alert  
4
Undelivered Retrieval  
When this function is activated, the Samsung Voicemail will call any outside  
or inside telephone number, after each message is left in your voice mailbox.  
When this function is activated,the Samsung Voicemail will allow you to recall  
any messages you have sent that have NOT yet been picked up by the recip-  
ient.  
To hear your message at the remote location when the Samsung Voicemail  
calls you, after you pick up the telephone and answer you will be instructed  
that there is a message and to enter your password. Simply enter your pass-  
word and you will now be logged in.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [4] for Undelivered Messages.  
70  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
This useful feature will allow you to cancel any messages that have NOT yet been  
picked up by the recipient.  
#
5
Auto Play New Messages  
PERSONAL SERVICES  
If this option is enabled, after you enter your password correctly any new  
messages will immediately begin to play.To enable (or if already enabled tog-  
gle and disable) this feature:  
The Personal Administration Menu is used to set your password and record your  
name. Many of these features must be allowed by the System Administrator.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
1
Workload Management  
Press [5] to Set Auto Play of New Messages.  
Allows you to access to all reminders, both Active and Pending. If authorized  
you can group your reminders as Commitments, Follow-Ups or Tasks for bet-  
ter organization. The system will flag each reminder as Active or Pending  
(pending means scheduled for future delivery).  
6
Auto Play Message Information  
If this option is enabled, the date, time and sender’s name will be played auto-  
matically before each message. If this is disabled, the information must be  
requested manually by pressing ‘00. To enable (or if already enabled toggle  
and disable) this feature:  
2
Stored Numbers  
Allows you to enter up to 9 stored phone numbers. The first five of these are  
used in the 'Find Me' feature, but any of them (1-9) can be easily dialed using  
only one digit followed by the pound key, to be used by many other features  
from within your subscriber space. (ie: “Follow Me, “Message Alert, “Pager  
Alert, and “Direct Call”).  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [6] to Set Auto Play of Message Information.  
9
3
5
Schedule Availability  
MESSAGE BROADCAST  
Allows you to enter a weekly availability schedule for use with Night Personal  
Greeting and the Auto Night Intercept feature. Follow the spoken directions  
to enter the days of the week and times you are generally available to talk to  
your callers. All other times you will be considered unavailable.  
This option will only be available if it has been allowed by the System  
Administrator.  
Broadcast to All Mailboxes  
Place a Direct Call  
If you have been designated as a Subscriber Administrator, you may send a  
message to ALL mailboxes in the system.  
Allows you to place a direct call out of the Samsung Voicemail from any-  
where. You may either dial the number or dial a single digit 1-5 that corre-  
sponds to a stored number (See Personal Services, 2 - Stored Numbers). This  
feature must be authorized by the System Administrator and can be limited  
or opened to internal, local, and long distance calls.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [6] for Mailbox Administration.  
Press [9] for Broadcast Messages.  
This option will only be available if your mailbox has been assigned  
Subscriber Administration privileges.  
7
Personal Administration  
This area is used during the initial set up of your Subscriber Settings (see next  
section).  
72  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Note: Remember if you know what digits to press, you can enter them at any  
time you do not have to wait to be prompted. This feature can be toggled  
on/off at anytime. Also if it is off you will be prompted within each subscriber  
menu to press zero for more options. This enables you to still be able to find  
out what to do if you were to get lost and extended prompting was disabled.  
PERSONAL ADMINISTRATION SETTINGS  
This menu allows you to make changes to basic setup settings, that are rarely  
changed. Use these when you initially set up your personal Subscriber settings.  
You probably will not need to change them after that.  
KEYSET USER FEATURES  
The following options are available if you have a display keyset.They require setup  
by the System Administrator.  
1
Setting your Password  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][1].  
The current password will be played and you will have the chance to  
change it.  
Message Waiting Lights  
2
Recording your Name  
When new messages are left in your mailbox,the voice mail message light on your  
keyset will flash. Press this flashing key [VMMSG] and follow the prompts to  
retrieve messages.This key may be pressed at any time to log into your Subscriber  
Main Menu.  
Use this option to record your name.Your recorded name is played in several  
different situations. It is important to record your name for proper operation  
of the Samsung Voicemail system.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][2].  
Answer Machine Emulation  
The current name will be played and you will have the chance to change  
it.  
If you have an Answer Machine Emulation key programmed on your keyset, you  
can use it to monitor calls going to your voice mail, and optionally answer them.  
The operation of this feature is similar to screening a call on a home answering  
machine.  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name and/or enter your  
Directory Name (described below), you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
Your keyset must be set to forward on no answer to voice mail. After ringing your  
station the caller will be connected to your voice mail and hear your personal  
greeting before leaving a message. During this time you will be monitoring the  
connection between the caller and your voice mail box. At this time you will only  
be monitoring the call, you can not talk to the other party until you answer. You  
may pick up the call at any time or ignore it.  
3
Entering your Directory Name  
Use this option to enter your Directory Name.Your Directory Name is used by  
callers to find you if they do not know your extension number.  
From the Subscriber Services Menu press [#][7][3].  
The current Directory Name will be played as a string of digits that are  
equal to your name spelled out on your telephone keypad. Follow the  
instructions to enter a new name.You will be prompted to enter your last  
name and then your first name.  
To activate this feature press the AME button. The associated indicator will be lit  
steady. Press again to turn off. If this key is pressed while a station is ringing  
(during forward no answer), the feature will be turned on for the current call only.  
This must be done in order for the directory feature to work correctly.  
While the caller is leaving a message or ringing you may:  
Note: It is possible that if you do not record your name (described above)  
and/or enter your Directory Name, you will not be included in the Dial by  
Name Directory.  
Press [#] to immediately put the caller in your voice mailbox and monitor it.  
Press [,] to immediately disconnect your station. The caller continues to  
leave a message normally.  
4
Extended Prompting  
Pick up the handset and monitor privately.  
Use this option to drastically reduce the number of prompts played in the  
subscriber interface (mailbox prompts). Change this setting only if you are  
very familiar with the user operation of the Samsung Voicemail.  
Press ANS / RLS to answer the call (using the handset or speaker).  
74  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
AME Password  
SHORTCUTS  
If your keyset has AME PASSWORD (MMC 110) set to YES, you must enter your  
station password to listen to messages being left. This will prevent unauthorized  
people from listening to messages being left for you.  
Calling  
Calling a station that is busy or does not answer you can press [#] to immediately  
send the call to the called parties mailbox.  
If the password option is turned on, while a message is being left, press the flash-  
ing AME indicator and enter your station password (not your Samsung Voicemail  
password).You will then hear the message being left.  
Call Divert to Voicemail  
While receiving an incoming (ringing) call, dial [,] to immediately send the caller  
to your personal voicemail box. This will override the call forward no answer set-  
ting.  
Call Record  
If you have a call record button assigned to your phone, you may press it at any  
time, to record the conversation in progress. If you have a display keyset, you will  
also have the soft key options to pause and time the message.  
Direct Messaging  
[#] + DSS To make it easy to leave messages for others in your office without hav-  
ing to dial their extension number first, keyset users may simply dial [#] plus a  
mailbox (extension) number and leave a message directly.If you dial a busy exten-  
sion press [#] to connect directly with the mailbox.  
Self Memo (Reminder)  
Pressing [##] will leave a message in your own mailbox. This is useful to remind  
yourself of things to do now or in the future. Messages can be sent with future  
delivery so you can have the system call you when items become due.  
INTERACTIVE DISPLAYS  
Display keyset users have the added advantage of using the soft keys and displays  
to play, save, delete, reply, call, forward, rewind, pause, fast forward, change the  
volume, get message information, or help.  
Viewing Mailbox Contents  
If you have new messages, in addition to the Terminal Status Indicator (TSI) you  
will be able to use the keyset displays and soft keys to communicate with the  
Samsung Voicemail.  
76  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
78  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
N O T E S  
N O T E S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
iDCS Keyset  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
N O T E S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home Page  
Table of Contents  
STD Telephone  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
ABOUT THIS BOOK ................................................................................1  
STANDARD TELEPHONE  
USER GUIDE  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW ..........................................2–3  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
Making an Outside Call......................................................................................4  
Answering an Outside Call ..............................................................................4  
Universal Answer ................................................................................................4  
Flash/Recall........................................................................................................4–5  
Busy Line Queuing with Callback ................................................................5  
for  
OfficeServ100, OfficeServ500  
and OfficeServ7000 Series  
INTERCOM CALLS  
Calling Other Stations ........................................................................................6  
Answering Intercom Calls ................................................................................6  
Busy Station Callback ........................................................................................6  
Busy Station Camp-on........................................................................................6  
Calling Your System Operator..........................................................................7  
April 2007  
CALL PROCESSING  
Holding Calls..........................................................................................................8  
Transferring Calls..................................................................................................9  
Transfer with Camp-On......................................................................................9  
Transfer Cancel......................................................................................................9  
Transfer Recall........................................................................................................9  
Call Waiting ..........................................................................................................10  
Setting Up a Conference ................................................................................10  
Forwarding Your Calls ..............................................................................10–12  
Call Pickup............................................................................................................12  
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in  
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior  
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing  
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from  
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
DIALING FEATURES  
Speed Dialing......................................................................................................13  
Programming Personal Speed Dial Numbers ........................................13  
Last Number Redial ..........................................................................................13  
Save Number with Redial ..............................................................................13  
Pulse to Tone Changeover..............................................................................14  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
Making an Internal Page ................................................................................15  
Making an External Page ................................................................................15  
All Page..................................................................................................................15  
Meet Me Page/Answer ....................................................................................15  
Call Park and Page ............................................................................................15  
Retrieving a Parked Call ..................................................................................16  
Setting a Message Indication........................................................................16  
Returning Messages ........................................................................................16  
Canceling a Message........................................................................................17  
Programmed Messages ..................................................................................17  
ABOUT THIS BOOK  
This booklet provides instructions for using an industry standard single line tele-  
phone set with the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 Series sys-  
tems. A variety of single line sets from many different manufacturers are available.  
Check with your service and installation company to ensure proper operation with  
the OfficeServ 100, the OfficeServ 500 and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems.  
Please take the time to study this guide and to become familiar with the operation  
of your standard telephone. Keep it handy. You may need to look up instructions  
for infrequently used features.  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
Do Not Disturb....................................................................................................18  
Door Phone Calls ..............................................................................................18  
Account Codes ............................................................................................18–19  
In/Out of Group..................................................................................................19  
Locking your Station ........................................................................................19  
Changing your Station Passcode ................................................................20  
Learning to use your telephone correctly will make everyday telephone commu-  
nications a breeze.  
This book is written based on the factory default settings for the feature access  
codes. Sometimes, due to programming requirements, these codes may be  
changed. If you find that a feature code does not work as described in this book,  
please contact your installation and service company to determine the correct  
code.  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL LIST ....................................21–22  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SYSTEM TONES  
The system provides several tones to assist you. Some of these tones are already  
THINGS YOU SHOULD KNOW  
familiar to you.  
USER ORIENTATION  
Intercom Dial Tone—A steady tone that indicates you can begin dialing.  
Lifting the handset on your telephone will provide the OfficeServ 100, the  
OfficeServ 500, and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems with dial tone. This is also  
referred to as internal or intercom dial tone. To get an outside line from the tele-  
phone company, dial an access code, usually the digit “9.” To call another station in  
your system, simply dial its extension number. See your system directory list for  
other access codes and extension numbers.  
DIAL TONE  
CONTINUOUS  
Ringback Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is ringing.  
RINGBACK TONE—1000 ms ON/3000 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
HOOKFLASH  
Throughout this guide, you will see references to “hookflash.” A hookflash is a  
momentary operation of the hookswitch required for a feature operation. Some  
telephones have a FLASH key. This key may be pressed instead of the hookswitch.  
Busy Tone—Indicates the station you dialed is busy.  
BUSY TONE—500 ms ON/500 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
C.O. LINES  
Lines from the telephone company are “C.O. lines.” Calls on these lines are referred  
to as “outside calls.” These C.O. lines are accessed by dialing an access code. For  
example, dial 9 to get a local outside line or dial 8008XX for other line groups.  
Each line in the system is numbered beginning with 701, and then 702, 703, etc. To  
get a specific line, dial its three digit line number. If Least Cost Routing (LCR) is pro-  
grammed into the system, you will only be required to dial 9.  
DND/No More Calls Tone—Fast busy tone indicates the station you dialed  
is in the Do Not Disturb mode or cannot receive any more calls.  
DND/NO MORE CALLS TONE—250 ms ON/250 ms OFF  
FOR TEN SECONDS  
Transfer/Conference Tone—Indicates your call is being held and you  
can dial another party.  
DISTINCTIVE RINGING  
The OfficeServ 100, the OfficeServ 500, and the OfficeServ 7000 Series systems  
provide distinctive ring patterns to your phone:  
TRANSFER/CONF TONE—100 ms ON/100 ms OFF  
CONTINUOUS  
Outside calls have a single ring tone repeated.  
Intercom calls have a double ring tone repeated.  
Door phone calls and alarm/appointment reminders have a triple ring tone  
repeated.  
Confirmation Tone—Very short beeps followed by dial tone indicate you  
have correctly set or canceled a system feature.  
CONFIRMATION TONE—50 ms ON/50 ms OFF  
FOR ONE SECOND  
(programmable)  
Error Tone—A distinctive two level beeping tone indicates you have done  
something incorrectly.Try again.  
ERROR TONE—50 ms of tone 1/50 ms of tone 2  
FOR THREE SECONDS  
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
RECALL DIAL TONE  
Hookflash and then dial 18 to disconnect your outside call and receive telephone  
OUTSIDE CALLS  
company dial tone for a new call.  
MAKING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
BUSY LINE QUEUING WITH  
CALLBACK  
Lift the handset and receive internal dial tone.  
Dial a C.O. line or line group access code.  
Receive outside dial tone and then dial the telephone number.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
If you receive a busy signal when you select an outside line:  
While on that call, hookflash, receive transfer tone and dial 44.  
When the line becomes free, the system will call you back.  
Lift the handset, receive dial tone and dial the telephone number or the  
speed dial number again.  
If your system is programmed to require an authorization code before making a  
call:  
Dial , and a valid code. You will hear confirmation tone, followed by dial  
tone.  
Select a C.O. line.  
NOTE: A callback will be canceled if it is not answered within 30 seconds.  
If your system is programmed to require an account code before making a call:  
Dial 47 and a valid code.  
Hookflash and receive transfer tone. Select a C.O. line.  
For more information see your system administrator.  
ANSWERING AN OUTSIDE CALL  
Lift the handset. You are automatically connected to the ringing call.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
UNIVERSAL ANSWER  
Outside lines may be programmed to ring a general alerting device. To answer  
calls ringing this device, dial 67. This device can operate in any system ring mode.  
SENDING A FLASH  
While you are on an outside call, hookflash, receive transfer tone and dial 49 to  
send a flash to the telephone company. This may be required for some custom call-  
ing features or CENTREX lines.  
Note: Flash is not available on an ISDN circuit.  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALLING YOUR SYSTEM OPERATOR  
INTERCOM CALLS  
Lift the handset and dial 0 to call your system operator or group of opera-  
tors.  
CALLING OTHER STATIONS  
If you want to call a specific operator, dial that person’s extension number.  
Lift the handset.  
Dial the extension number or group number.  
Wait for the party to answer.  
If you hear several brief tone bursts instead of ringback tone, the  
station you called is set for Voice Announce or Auto Answer.  
Begin speaking immediately after the tone.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
ANSWERING INTERCOM CALLS  
Lift the handset and you are automatically connected to the ringing call.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset.  
BUSY STATION CALLBACK  
When you call another station and you receive a busy signal:  
Hookflash, receive transfer tone, dial 44, receive transfer tone and hang up.  
When the busy station becomes free, your telephone will ring.  
Lift the handset to automatically call the now idle station.  
NOTE: You have 30 seconds to answer or the callback will be canceled.  
BUSY STATION CAMP-ON  
When you call another station and receive a busy signal but you do not want to  
wait for a callback:  
Hookflash, receive transfer tone and dial 45.  
The called station will receive off-hook ring or camp-on tone.  
You will hear ringback tone.  
Wait for the called party to answer.  
The called station must release its first call or put it on hold before answering your  
camp-on.  
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
TRANSFERRING CALLS  
Transfer is used to send any call to another extension in one of two ways. You can  
perform a screened transfer by informing the other extension who is calling or you  
can perform a blind transfer without notification.  
CALL PROCESSING  
HOLDING CALLS  
While you are speaking on a call, hookflash to receive transfer dial tone and  
then dial an extension number. Your call is automatically put on transfer  
hold.  
When you are connected to any call, hookflash, receive transfer tone and  
dial 11. The call will now be on hold. You may now make or receive a second  
call.  
To take the caller off hold, lift the handset and dial 11. You are now con-  
nected to the call. You may resume your conversation.  
Hang up when you hear ringing—OR—wait for the party to answer and  
advise the party of the call and then hang up. If the transfer is refused, you  
will be reconnected to the outside line when the station hangs up or you  
can hookflash to return to the outside party.  
NOTE: A standard telephone can put only one call on hold at a time.  
NOTE: After the inside party answers, you may alternate back and forth between  
the parties by hookflashing.  
HOLD RECALL  
If you leave a call on hold longer than the hold timer, the call will recall your sta-  
tion.  
TRANSFER WITH CAMP-ON  
When your phone rings, lift the handset to answer the recall.  
If you do not answer this recall within a pre-programmed period of time, it  
will go to the operator group.  
When you are transferring a call to another station and it is busy, you may camp  
the call on to this station:  
While you are speaking on a call, hookflash to receive transfer dial tone and  
then dial an extension number. Your call is automatically put on transfer  
hold.  
RETRIEVING CALLS ON HOLD AT  
ANOTHER STATION  
Hang up when you hear a busy signal. The called party will be alerted that  
a call is waiting.  
When a line is on hold at any other station:  
TRANSFER CANCEL  
Lift the handset and dial 12 plus the extension number of the station that  
placed the call on hold—OR—dial 12 plus the line number if you know  
what it is.  
If this feature has been activated on your system the Consultation Hold feature will  
not work. Instead, when you hookflash to return to the outside party after initiat-  
ing a transfer, the internal party will be dropped allowing you to transfer the call  
to another destination. This is especially useful if the party you originally tried to  
transfer to was busy or did not answer.  
CONSULTATION HOLD  
When you are speaking on an outside line and it is necessary to consult with an-  
other extension:  
TRANSFER RECALL  
All calls that you have transferred (screened, unscreened and camped-on) will  
automatically recall to your station if they are not answered in a pre-programmed  
period of time.  
Hookflash and receive transfer tone. Your call is placed on transfer hold.  
Dial an extension number.  
Consult with the internal party.  
Hookflash to return to the outside party or hang up to transfer the call.  
NOTE: Repeatedly pressing the hookflash will flip-flop between the outside and  
inside parties (except if the destination station is set for Auto Answer or Voice  
Announce, or the system has Transfer Cancel activated).  
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALL WAITING  
If an outside call has been camped-on to your phone or another station is  
FORWARD ALL CALLS  
To forward all of your calls to another station:  
camped-on to you:  
Lift the handset and dial 601 followed by the destination you want your  
calls to forward to. This can be an internal (within your system) or external  
(outside your system such as a cell phone) number.  
You will receive camp-on tone indicating another call is waiting.  
Hookflash and then dial 11 to put the first call on hold.  
Hang up and the waiting call will ring.  
Lift the handset to answer.  
Complete this call by transferring it or hanging up.  
Lift the handset and then dial 11 to return to your first call.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
To cancel Forward All Calls, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial another for-  
ward code, e.g., 604.  
FORWARD BUSY  
To forward calls to another station when you are on the phone:  
SETTING UP A CONFERENCE  
You may conference five parties (you and four other parties) in any combination of  
Lift the handset and dial 602 followed by the destination you want your  
calls to forward to. This can be an internal (within your system) or external  
(outside your system such as a cell phone) number.  
outside lines and internal stations in any order.  
While you are engaged in a conversation, hookflash, receive transfer tone  
and dial 46. You will receive conference tone.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
Make another call, either intercom or outside.  
After the called party answers, hookflash and receive conference tone.  
Make another call—OR—hookflash to join all parties.  
Repeat as necessary.  
To cancel Forward Busy, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial another forward  
code, e.g., 604.  
FORWARD NO ANSWER  
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer:  
To drop a party from your conference call:  
Hookflash, receive confirmation tone and dial the extension or line number  
that is to be dropped.  
Lift the handset and dial 603 followed by the destination you want your call  
to forward to. This can be an internal (within your system) or external (out-  
side your system such as a cell phone) number.  
Receive conference tone and dial 46 to rejoin the other parties.  
NOTES: To leave the conference, hang up. Control will be passed to the first inter-  
nal station that was added. If there are no internal stations and you wish to leave  
outside lines connected together in a trunk to trunk conference, follow the instruc-  
tions to drop a party and use your extension number. When the parties on the out-  
side lines hang up, the lines will release automatically, proceeding disconnect  
supervision is supplied by the telephone company.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
To cancel Forward No Answer, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial another  
forward code, e.g., 604.  
FORWARD NO ANSWER/BUSY  
To forward calls to another station when you do not answer or when you are on  
FORWARDING YOUR CALLS  
You may forward your calls to other stations or groups of stations. When they are  
programmed, Forward All Calls will have priority over Forward Busy and Forward  
No Answer conditions.  
the phone:  
Lift the handset and dial 604.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
To clear all call forward conditions set at your station, lift the handset and dial 600.  
NOTE: This option will only work if Forward No Answer and Forward Busy destina-  
tions are already programmed.  
NOTE: It is not necessary to clear call forwarding to change your selection; simply  
enter a new forward command.  
To cancel Forward No Answer/Busy, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial  
another forward code, e.g., 601.  
10  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
FORWARD FOLLOW ME  
When you want all calls to your extension forwarded to the extension where you  
DIALING FEATURES  
are now:  
SPEED DIALING  
You can dial a preprogrammed telephone number stored in the system-wide  
Dial 606 plus your extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
speed dial list of numbers 500–999 or from your personal list of numbers 00–49.  
If you want a specific extension’s calls forwarded to your phone (Remote Call  
Forward):  
Lift the handset and dial 16.  
Dial the desired speed dial number.  
The telephone number is automatically dialed for you.  
Dial 606 plus the desired extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: You system may be set for 950 system wide numbers. If so the system speed  
dial access codes are 050~999 and the station speed dial codes are 000~049.  
To cancel Forward Follow Me, lift the handset and dial 600—OR—dial another for-  
ward code, e.g., 601.  
PROGRAMMING PERSONAL  
SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
To program personal speed dial numbers:  
FORWARD DND  
To forward your phone when you activate DND.  
Dial 605 followed by the destination you want your calls to forward to. This  
can be an internal (within your system) or external (outside your system  
such as a cell phone) number.  
Lift handset to go offhook.  
Dial 15105 the next available speed dial bin number (e.g. 01), a trunk or  
trunk group number and your speed dial digits.  
Listen for system dial tone and replace handset.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
NOTE: It is much easier to have your System Administrator program these for you.  
STATION CALL PICKUP  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing at another station:  
LAST NUMBER REDIAL  
To redial the last telephone number you have dialed:  
Lift the handset and dial 65 plus the extension number of the ringing  
phone.  
Lift the handset and dial 19.  
GROUP CALL PICKUP  
NOTE: Redial does not apply to intercom calls.  
To pick up (answer) a call ringing in any pickup group:  
SAVE NUMBER WITH REDIAL  
Lift the handset and dial 66 plus the desired group number.  
To save the number you have just dialed for later use:  
GROUP NUMBERS  
Before hanging up, hookflash, receive confirmation tone and dial 17.  
01-20  
01-99  
01-99  
01-99  
OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100  
OfficeServ 500 M  
OfficeServ 500 L  
OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400  
To redial this saved number at any time:  
Lift the handset and dial 17. This step will select the same line and dial the  
number for you.  
This telephone number is stored in memory until you save another. When you do,  
the new number will be saved and the old number will be erased.  
NOTE: Station and group pickup features cannot be used to answer recalls to a sta-  
tion, only new ringing calls and operator recalls.  
NOTE: Save Number does not apply to intercom calls.  
12  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PULSE TO TONE CHANGEOVER  
When making an outside call on a dial pulse line, press #. All digits dialed after the  
PAGING AND MESSAGING  
# will be sent as tones.  
MAKING AN INTERNAL PAGE  
To make an announcement through the keyset speakers in the idle condition:  
Lift the handset.  
Dial 55 plus zone number 0, 1, 2, 3 or 4.  
After the brief attention tone, make the announcement.  
MAKING AN EXTERNAL PAGE  
To make an announcement through the external paging speakers:  
Lift the handset.  
Dial 55 plus zone number 5, 6, 7 or 8—OR—dial 55 plus 9 to page all exter-  
nal zones.  
After the brief attention tone, make the announcement.  
ALL PAGE  
To page all designated keysets in internal zone 0 and all external zones at the same  
time:  
Lift the handset and dial 55 plus ,.  
After the brief attention tone, make the announcement.  
MEET ME PAGE/ANSWER  
Make a page by dialing 54 plus any zone and instruct the paged person to  
dial 56.  
After completing the page, hookflash and remain off-hook until the paged  
person dials 56 from any phone. The paged person will be automatically  
connected with you.  
CALL PARK AND PAGE  
When you have an outside call for someone who is not at his/her desk, you can  
park the call and page the requested party:  
While in conversation, hookflash and dial 55. The call is automatically  
parked at your station.  
Dial the desired page zone and make the announcement. Be sure to  
include your station number, for example, “Mr. Smith, park 201.”  
14  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
RETRIEVING A PARKED CALL  
To retrieve a call that has been parked for you:  
CANCELING A MESSAGE  
You can cancel a message indication that you have left at another station.  
Lift the handset.  
Lift the handset.  
Dial 42 plus the extension number of that station.  
Dial 10 plus the station number that was announced. You will be connect-  
ed to the parked call.  
To cancel all message indications left at your phone:  
Lift the handset and dial 42 plus your extension number.  
Replace the handset.  
SETTING A MESSAGE INDICATION  
When you are calling another station and no one answers or you receive a busy  
signal, you can set a message indication at that station. The MESSAGE key on key-  
sets will flash and standard telephones will receive special dial tone and light their  
message lamp if their phone is equipped with one and they are on a 16DSL card.  
PROGRAMMED MESSAGES  
When you will be away from your phone for any length of time, you may leave a  
programmed station message. Display stations calling you will see this message  
and be informed of your status or follow your instructions.  
Hookflash and dial 43.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
Lift the handset and dial 48 plus any message code, 01–20 listed on the  
back of this user guide.  
Listen for confirmation tone and hang up.  
If the keyset you are calling is in the Auto Answer mode, you must use the follow-  
ing procedure:  
Hang up for at least two seconds.  
Lift the handset.  
Dial 41 plus the extension number.  
Receive confirmation tone and then hang up.  
To cancel this message, lift the handset and dial 48 plus 00.  
NOTE: A station can have up to and including five message indications. If you  
receive dial tone instead of confirmation tone, there are already five messages at  
this station. Try again later.  
RETURNING MESSAGES  
When you see your message indicating lamp flashing if your phone is equipped  
with one and your phone is connected to an 8MWSLI or  
a
16 MWSLI card or you lift the handset and receive special dial tone, another sta-  
tion has left a message for you. To return messages:  
Lift the handset.  
Dial 43. The first station that left you a message will be called automatical-  
ly. If it is not answered, your message indication will remain.  
Repeat the prior step until all messages have been returned in the order  
received.  
Dial tone will return to normal when all messages have been returned.  
16  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
To enter an account code after the outside party hangs up.  
Home Page  
After the outside party hangs up, hookflash, receive confirmation tone and  
then dial 47.  
Dial the account code (it may be a maximum of 12 characters including Q  
CONVENIENCE FEATURES  
DO NOT DISTURB  
and #).  
Use Do Not Disturb (DND) when you want to block calls to your keyset.  
NOTE: If you wait for the outside party to hang up, you must complete this proce-  
dure within ten seconds. You cannot repeat if you make a mistake.  
Lift the handset and then dial 401.  
To cancel DND, lift the handset and then dial 400.  
IN/OUT OF GROUP  
You are able to make calls while in the DND mode.  
If your station is assigned to a hunt group, this feature will allow you to dial an  
access code plus the group number, e.g., 501, plus 0 to temporarily prevent your  
station from receiving any group calls. You will still be able to receive calls that are  
dialed directly to your station. To reenter the group, dial an access code plus the  
group number, e.g., 501, plus 1.  
ANSWERING THE DOOR PHONE  
When your station is programmed to receive calls from the door phone:  
You will receive three short rings repeatedly.  
Lift the handset and you will be connected to the door phone.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, hookflash, receive confirmation  
tone and dial 13 to release the lock.  
LOCKING YOUR STATION  
1
2
0
LOCKED OUTGOING  
Hold Button LED Flashes  
LOCKED ALL CALLS  
Hold Button LED Solid  
UNLOCKED  
CALLING THE DOOR PHONE  
(ROOM MONITORING)  
You can call the door phone and listen to what is happening outside or in anoth-  
er room.  
Make outside calls  
YES  
YES  
YES  
YES  
NO (ACCESS DENIED)  
NO  
NO  
NO  
NO  
Receive outside calls  
Make intercom calls  
Receive intercom calls  
YES  
YES  
YES  
Lift the handset and then dial the extension number of the door box.  
You will be connected to the door phone. You can listen or have a conver-  
sation.  
If an electric door lock release is installed, hookflash, receive confirmation  
tone and dial 13 to release the lock.  
To lock your phone from making outgoing calls:  
Lift handset to go offhook and dial 15100 plus your station passcode  
(default 1234) then dial 1.  
Listen for system dial tone and replace handset. Your station is now locked  
from making outgoing calls.  
ACCOUNT CODES  
When it is equipped with optional equipment, your system allows calls to be  
charged to different accounts. You can enter an account code in two ways. To  
enter an account code by interrupting the conversation:  
While on an outside call, hookflash, receive confirmation tone and dial 47.  
Dial the account code (it may be a maximum of 12 characters including Q  
and #).  
Hookflash to return to the conversation.  
If you make an error, repeat the procedure with the correct code. Only the  
last account code dialed will be recorded.  
18  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
To lock your station from making both internal and outgoing calls:  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
Lift handset to go offhook and dial 15100 plus your station passcode  
(default 1234) then dial 2.  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
Listen for system dial tone and replace handset. Your station is now locked  
from making both internal and outgoing calls.  
00  
01  
02  
03  
04  
05  
06  
07  
08  
09  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
To unlock your phone:  
Lift handset to go offhook and dial 15100 plus your station passcode  
(default 1234) then dial 0.  
Listen for system dial tone and replace handset. Your station is now  
unlocked.  
CHANGING YOUR STATION  
PASSCODE  
To change your station user passcode:  
Lift handset to go offhook then dial 15101  
Then dial your existing station passcode  
Then dial a new passcode (must be four digits)  
Listen for confirmation tone then replace the handset  
20  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
N O T E S  
CODE  
NAME  
TELEPHONE NUMBER  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
_________________________  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
STD Telephone  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
N O T E S  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Home Page  
Table of Contents  
System Admin  
SYSTEM  
ADMINISTRATION  
AND  
SPECIAL FEATURES GUIDE  
for  
OfficeServ100, OfficeServ500  
OfficeServ7000 Series  
April 2007  
Samsung Telecommunications America reserves the right without prior notice to revise information in  
this guide for any reason. Samsung Telecommunications America also reserves the right without prior  
notice to make changes in design or components of equipment as engineering and manufacturing  
may warrant. Samsung Telecommunications America disclaims all liabilities for damages arising from  
the erroneous interpretation or use of information presented in this guide.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR PROGRAMMING  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
ABOUT THIS BOOK .................................................................................... 1  
SPECIAL FEATURES  
System Ring Plans .......................................................................................................... 2  
Manual Ring Plan Change ............................................................................................ 2  
Temporary Ring Plan Override ....................................................................................2  
Calling The System Operator ...................................................................................... 3  
Operator Recalls .............................................................................................................. 3  
Executive Barge-in .......................................................................................................... 3  
Walking Class of Service ................................................................................................4  
In/Out of Group ................................................................................................................4  
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) ........................................................................ 5  
DISA Security .................................................................................................................... 6  
Forced Account Codes ............................................................................................ 6–7  
Authorization Codes ...................................................................................................... 7  
Using the Tie Line ...................................................................................................... 7–8  
Customer Level Access .............................................................................................. 10  
Customer Level Access Using the PROG Key ......................................................10  
Change Feature Passcode ..........................................................................................11  
Set Date and Time Display ................................................................................ 11–12  
Reset Station Passcodes to Default ................................................................ 12–13  
Program Station Names........................................................................................13–15  
Program Trunk Names..................................................................................................16  
Program Station Group Names ................................................................................17  
Program System Speed Dial Numbers .......................................................... 18–20  
Program System Speed Dial Names........................................................................20  
Program Personal Speed Dial Numbers for Other Stations ....................21–23  
Program Personal Speed Dial Names for Other Stations ........................23–24  
Create Programmed Station Messages ........................................................ 24–25  
Set Alarm/Appointment Reminder with Message.................................... 25–26  
Managing Key Assignments ............................................................................ 27–28  
Programming Account Codes ..................................................................................29  
Station Timers ..........................................................................................................30–31  
Adding Names to the Translation Table ........................................................31–32  
Holiday ..............................................................................................................................33  
Customer Set Relocation......................................................................................34–35  
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ALARMS ......................................36  
CALLER ID SPECIAL FEATURES  
Abandon Call List ............................................................................................................ 9  
CID on SMDR .................................................................................................................... 9  
Number to Name Translation ......................................................................................9  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ABOUT THIS BOOK  
This book contains instructions for special features that every telephone user may  
not need to know.The owner can decide who the system administrator will be and  
who will have access to these features. Station users can be trained on only the  
items that apply to them. This procedure will help control costs and telephone  
abuse.  
Several of the features listed in this book are specific to the system operator or  
attendant position.You can have more than one operator or set your system up to  
be used without an operator.  
The designated system administrator can access specific programs and modify  
some functions to better manage the OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, OfficeServ  
7000 Series office telephone systems. Instructions are detailed and easy to follow.  
When assistance is needed, contact your installation and service company.  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALLING THE SYSTEM OPERATOR  
SPECIAL FEATURES  
Any station that dials 0 will ring its assigned operator. (If tenant service is used,  
each tenant may have a different operator or operator group.) Calls to the system  
or tenant operator are easily identified because the CALL key will have a fast flash-  
ing red light. Station users will never receive a busy signal when they dial 0 or the  
operator group number. The calls will continue ringing in queue until answered.  
SYSTEM RING PLANS  
Your system is designed to have a maximum of six different Ring Plans. Each ring  
plan can be programmed to allow different lines to ring different ring plans to ring  
different station and/or station groups. Examples of why different ring plans are  
required can include normal day operation, night operation, using different oper-  
ators during different lunch shifts and Saturday or evening hours of operation.  
While the system is in a ring plan, each station will be limited to its individual Ring  
Plan class of service dialing restrictions.You can place the system in one of any six  
of these ring plans at any time. Ring Plans are available on an individual tenant  
basis and may be set automatically or manually. Automatic Ring Plans have an  
individual start time and will remain in that mode until the beginning of the next  
defined ring plan. If no automatic timer is set, you must change ring plans manu-  
ally.  
NETWORKING: When 2 or more systems are networked a single station or  
operator group may receive all calls to a single operator. (Please consult with your  
service company if required).  
OPERATOR RECALLS  
Transferred calls that go unanswered will recall to the station that originated the  
transfer. Should the station that originated the transfer not answer the recall, the  
call will be sent to the operator as a transfer recall.  
A call left on hold will recall the station that put it on hold. If the hold recall is unan-  
swered at the station that originated the hold, the call is sent to the operator.  
Any of these ring plans can be switched from one plan to another at any time by  
manually pressing a ring plan button. There are two ways to override the auto-  
matic ring plans; one is a temporary override until the next programmed start  
time, and the other is a permanent override until manually changed.  
Both types of recalls will ring and have a slow flashing amber light on the LINE key  
or CALL key.  
MANUAL RING PLAN CHANGE  
NETWORKING: When 2 or more systems are networked a single station or  
operator group may receive all recalls to a single operator. (Please consult with  
your service company if required).  
Press the RTO button plus the ring plan passcode (four digits) and the ring plan (1-  
6) you wish to set. The system will override all the automatic time tables and will  
remain in the set ring plan until manually changed. To manually change or cancel  
the ring plan time override and return ring plan operation to the system clock:  
press the RTO plus the ring plan passcode (four digits) and a0to cancel the ring  
plan time override and return to normal operation.  
EXECUTIVE BARGE-IN  
If you want to break into another conversation, you must be allowed to barge-in  
and the other station and trunk must not be secure.  
TEMPORARY RING PLAN CHANGE  
Press the RP button plus the ring plan passcode (four digits) and the ring plan (1-  
6) you wish to set.The system will remain in that ring plan until the next automat-  
ic start time for the next ring plan goes into effect.  
Dial the desired extension or trunk number and listen for the busy signal.  
Press the BARGE button and begin speaking after the tone.  
Hang up when you are finished.  
The system can be set for one of the three following barge-in options:  
NOTE: This button may also be assigned an extender of one of the six ring plans.  
Example: An RP button is given an extender of 3 (RP3) and the operation of this  
button is a push on/push off type of operation with the system always returning  
to ring plan 1 when the key is turned off.When the system is operating in ring plan  
3, the RP3 button will light steady red, and when off the light will also turn off.  
No barge-in allowed  
Barge-in with intrusion tone  
Barge-in without intrusion tone (service observing)  
2
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
20 Groups  
When the second or third option is selected the barger will take priority over the  
line. This means unless you (barger) hang up first, the station or line you barged  
into will still be connected to you when the station you barged into hangs up.  
When the third option is selected, the station that barges-in can monitor the con-  
versation and no warning tone or display will be sent to the station being moni-  
tored.The handset transmitter and keyset microphone are disabled.The party that  
originated the barge-in may join the conversation by pressing the MUTE button  
on the keyset.Your service company must program these options for you.  
OfficeServ 100  
& OfficeServ 7100 (500 through 519) these can be changed to 4 digits if  
required.  
To create a backup or relief operator position, assign the main operator and one or  
more backup individuals to the operator group. All but the main operator should  
be out of the group.When it is necessary to use a backup operator, put the desired  
backup station in the group and remove the main operator. When incoming call  
traffic is heavy, you can have another station put itself in the operator group along  
with the main operator to handle the extra call load.  
WARNING  
If the station does not have an IN/OUT key:  
Barge-in without tone may violate state or federal laws concerning the  
right to privacy. Samsung Telecommunications America is in no way  
responsible for the possible misuse of this feature.  
Lift the handset and dial the feature access code _________________.  
Dial the group number.  
Dial 0 to be out of the group or dial 1 to be in the group.  
Receive confirmation tone and hang up.  
WALKING CLASS OF SERVICE  
You can change a restricted station’s class of service to the same class as your sta-  
tion, allowing you to make calls or use features that would otherwise be restricted  
from that station.  
If the station has an IN/OUT key:  
Press the IN/OUT key. It will light red when the station is in the group.  
Press the IN/OUT key again. The light is off when the station is out of the  
group.  
Lift the handset or press the SPK or the MONITOR key.  
Dial 59 and then your extension number.  
Dial your station passcode and receive internal dial tone.  
Dial an access code and then the telephone number—OR—use the desired  
feature as usual.  
NOTE: A station can be in more than one group.  
DIRECT INWARD SYSTEM ACCESS (DISA)  
Hang up. The station will be returned to its restricted status.  
From outside of the office, selected individuals can call into the OfficeServ 100 or  
OfficeServ 500 or OfficeServ 7000 Series system on special DISA line(s). A security  
code must be entered to gain access. Once these individuals are in the system,  
they can make outside calls using the office lines or call stations within the system.  
Individuals who will use DISA must have their stations assigned for DISA access  
and must change their station passcodes. The default passcode 1234 cannot be  
used.  
NOTE:The default station passcode 1234 cannot be used.  
IN/OUT OF GROUP  
Any station assigned to a station group can remove itself from that group and  
then reenter the group at a later time.When out of the group, a station can receive  
calls to its extension number but not to the group.  
Call in on the DISA line from any phone with tone dialing.  
You will hear a dial tone. Dial your security code (your extension number  
plus your station passcode).  
The number of groups available to choose from may vary depending on your  
OfficeServ 100 or OfficeServ 500 or OfficeServ 7000 Series system type:  
If you are allowed access, you will receive a dial tone.  
Dial any line access code, receive outside dial tone and then dial a tele-  
phone number OR dial any extension number to call a station in the sys-  
tem.  
To make another call, press Q, receive dial tone and dial another number.  
Press # and hang up when finished.  
OfficeServ 500  
40 Groups  
& OfficeServ 7200 (500 through 539) or (5000 through 5039 depending if your  
system is setup for 4 digits numbering plan)  
OfficeServ 500 L  
80 Groups  
& OfficeServ 7400 (500 through 579) or (5000 though 5079 depending if your  
system is setup for 4 digits numbering plan)  
4
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
NOTE: Outgoing DISA calls are controlled by the dialing class of the station identi-  
fied by the security code.The DISA line must have disconnect supervision from the  
central office. Insist that this service is verified by your installation/service company.  
NOT VERIFIED  
When set for this option the user must enter an account code for all outgoing calls,  
but the account code is not verified against the system list. Non verified account  
codes can contain the digits 0~9, * and #.  
DISA SECURITY  
USING FORCED ACCOUNT CODES  
A common practice among hackers is to repeatedly dial a known DISA access  
number (usually with a computer) and try a different passcode each time. The  
hacker hopes to eventually chance upon the correct passcode and thus gain  
access to your system. The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000  
Series security feature counts the number of sequential incorrect passcode  
attempts. If a certain number is reached, DISA is disabled and the system sends an  
alarm to designated display stations. The number of passcode attempts and the  
disable duration are both programmable. In addition, the OfficeServ 100,  
OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 systems will print an SMDR record (a cus-  
tomer-provided printer is required) each time an incorrect passcode is entered.  
Lift the handset and press the ACCT CODE key or dial 47.  
Enter the account code.  
Press the account code button again, press TRSF or hookflash (on an SLT).  
If a correct code is entered, you will hear a dial tone and you can make an  
outside call in the usual manner. If an incorrect code is entered, the station  
returns error tone.  
This code will always print on SMDR reports. For information on entering and  
changing forced account codes, see the system administrator programming sec-  
tion of this book.  
The DISA alarm will ring for a programmable time before canceling the ringing;  
however, the DISA alarm display will remain until the alarm is cleared. To clear the  
DISA alarm, follow the following procedure:  
AUTHORIZATION CODES  
Authorization codes are used to validate a station user and give permission to  
make a call. These four digit authorization codes can be either forced or optional,  
but if used, are always verified from a system list of 500 entries on the OfficeServ  
500 M or L version, the OfficeServ 7100, OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400,  
250 entries on the OfficeServ 100 and OfficeServ 7100. Each authorization code  
has an associated class of service. When the code is entered, the class of service is  
changed to that of the authorization code.  
Lift the handset and dial 58.  
Enter the DISA alarm passcode (see your service company).  
Replace the handset.  
WARNING  
As it is impossible to prevent unauthorized access to your telephone sys-  
tem by hackers, we suggest that you do not turn the DISA feature on unless  
you intend to use it. If you do use this feature, it is good practice to fre-  
quently change passcodes and periodically review your telephone records  
for unauthorized use.  
USING AUTHORIZATION CODES  
After going off-hook, the station user must dial Q followed by a four digit authori-  
zation code. If you enter a correct code, you will hear confirmation tone and then  
receive a dial tone and you can make an outside call in the usual manner.The sta-  
tion then follows the dialing class for that authorization code.If you enter an incor-  
rect code, the station returns error tone. This code may or may not print on SMDR  
reports depending on SMDR programming.  
FORCED ACCOUNT CODES  
VERIFIED  
When set for this option the user must enter an account code for all outgoing calls.  
The account code entered will be verified from a system list. Forced verified codes  
can contain the digits 0~9.  
USING THE TIE LINE  
OUTGOING  
OfficeServ 500 & 7100 999 entries  
Your office can be connected to another system with a tie line. Use this line to  
make calls to stations in the other system. If programming allows, you can access  
OfficeServ 100  
500 entries  
OfficeServ 7200 & 7400 999 entries  
6
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
lines in the other system to make outside calls. Tie line calls can be put on hold,  
transferred and conferenced in the same manner as are other outside calls.  
CALLER ID  
SPECIAL FEATURES  
NOTE: The Caller ID features below require optional software and/or hard-  
ware. Please ask your installation and service company for details.  
Lift the handset or press the SPK or MONITOR key.  
Dial the tie line access code or press the tie line key.  
When you receive dial tone from the other system, you can dial extension  
numbers or access outside lines. You must know the extension numbers  
and the line access codes for the other system.  
Finish the call by replacing the handset or pressing the ANS/RLS or the  
MONITOR key if you are using a 7 button phone.  
ABANDON CALL LIST  
The system has a system-wide abandoned calls list that stores CID information for  
the last 100 calls on the OfficeServ 7000 Series, OfficeServ 500 M and L ver-  
sion and 50 calls on the OfficeServ 100 that rang but were not answered and  
were accompanied with valid CID information. Calls with CID information consist-  
ing of OUT OF AREA, PAYPHONE or PRIVATE will not be stored in the list.The aban-  
doned calls list is accessed using the system administrator’s passcode. When re-  
viewing this list, you are provided options to CLEAR the entry or DIAL the num-  
ber. You can use the NND key to toggle between the CID name, CID number and  
the date and time the call came in.The system must be using LCR to dial numbers  
from the abandoned calls list.  
NOTE: Outgoing calls are controlled by the station’s dialing class.  
INCOMING  
Station users in the other system can access the tie line and make intercom calls  
to stations in your system.Answer tie line calls ringing at your station as you would  
any other outside call.They can be put on hold, transferred and conferenced in the  
same manner as are other outside calls.  
IN AND OUT ON TIE LINE [NOT SUPPORTED ON OS 7100]  
Users accessing the tie line from the other system can get a line in your system and  
make outgoing calls. These calls can be controlled by assigning a dialing class to  
the tie line. For further information, see your service company.  
To view the list of abandoned incoming calls for which CID information has been  
received:  
Dial 64 and dial the system administrator passcode.  
Scroll through the entries using the VOL keys.  
CID ON SMDR  
The Station Message Detail Records (SMDR) report can be set to include the CID  
name and number for incoming calls. This format expands the printout to 113  
characters.You must use a wide carriage printer or an 80 column printer set to the  
condensed print option.  
NUMBER TO NAME TRANSLATION  
The system provides a translation table of 1000 entries in the OfficeServ 7100,  
7200 and OfficeServ 500 M, and 2000 entries in the OfficeServ 500 L and in the  
OfficeServ 7400, and 500 entries on the OfficeServ 100 for use in areas that do  
not provide name and number (sometimes called “deluxe”) Caller ID or when ANI  
is received.When the CID or ANI number is received, the table is searched.When a  
match is found, the system will display the corresponding name from the table.  
This will allow users in areas that do not support“deluxe”Caller ID or have only ANI  
service to provide names for callers.  
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CALLER ID SPECIAL FEATURES  
INVESTIGATE  
Investigate allows selected stations with a special class of service to investi-  
gate any call in progress. If CID information is available for an incoming call,  
you will know to whom this station user is speaking. For outgoing calls, you  
can see the number that was dialed. After investigating, you may barge-in  
on the conversation, disconnect the call or hang up your phone to end the  
investigation.  
At your keyset, press the INVESTIGATE key.  
Enter your station passcode. (Default passcodes cannot be used.)  
Enter the station number to be investigated.  
You can now press BARGE to barge-in on the conversation.  
OR  
You can press NND to view more information about the call.  
OR  
You can press DROP to disconnect the call.  
NOTES:  
1. If the call is an outgoing call, the NND key will not appear.  
2. This feature requires optional software and/or hardware.Please ask your  
installation and service company for details.  
WARNING  
This feature may violate state or federal laws concerning the right  
to privacy. Samsung Telecommunications America is in no way re-  
sponsible for the possible misuse of this feature.  
NOTE: This information is NOT repeated in this user guide.  
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR  
PROGRAMMING  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SYSTEM ADMINISTRATOR  
PROGRAMMING  
CUSTOMER LEVEL ACCESS  
Before any customer programs can be accessed, you must first open system pro-  
gramming using the passcode you have been assigned. You must use a display  
keyset.Should it become necessary to change this passcode,see your service com-  
pany.  
While on-hook, press TRSF and then dial 200.  
Your display shows [ENABLE CUS. PROG. PASSCODE].  
Dial the four digit passcode.  
The display shows [ENABLE CUS. PROG. - DISABLE].  
Dial 1 to enable. The display shows [ENABLE CUS. PROG - ENABLE].  
Press TRSF. The keyset returns to its idle condition.  
Press TRSF and then dial the three digit program code you want to access.  
Follow the instructions for that program.  
NOTE:You must begin programming within 30 seconds. Once you are in program-  
ming, any delay of more than 30 seconds between key strokes will cause the sys-  
tem to automatically close programming.  
CUSTOMER LEVEL ACCESS USING THE  
PROG KEY  
A designated keyset may be programmed with a “PROG” key which allows access  
to the following areas of system programming.When pressed you must enter your  
station passcode followed by the MMC number. The default station passcode  
“1234” can not be used. The only MMCs that may entered from pressing the  
PROG” key are as follows:  
MMC 100 Station Lock for All Stations  
MMC 102 Station Forward for All Stations  
MMC 104 Station Name  
MMC 115 Program Message for all Stations  
MMC 116 Alarm and Message  
MMC 505 System Day and Time  
MMC 705 System Speed Dial  
MMC 706 System Speed Dial Name  
MMC 722 Station Key Programming  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
Failure to enter the time using the 24 hour clock will cause the date to change at  
12:00 P.M. Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
CHANGING FEATURE PASSCODE  
You can change individual feature passcodes. This program is used to change the  
passcodes for several features. These features are the following: RING PLAN SER-  
VICE, DISA ALARM, ALARM CLEAR, and AA RECORD. Note: Each passcode is four  
digits long. Each digit can be 0 to 9.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 505  
OLD:6010184:0047  
NEW:WMMDDYY:HHMM  
Display shows  
PROGRAM KEYS  
2. Enter the new time and date using  
the above format  
OLD:6010184:0047  
NEW:3020994:1445  
UP & DOWN - Select the extension number.  
HOLD - Press to reset the passcode to default settings.  
3. Verify the time and date and reenter  
them if necessary  
OLD:3020994:1445  
NEW:WMMDDYY:HHMM  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
4. Press TRSF to store and exit  
programming OR press SPK to store  
and advance to the next program  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 202  
CHANGE PASSCODE  
RING PLAN: 0000  
Display shows  
If you have entered invalid data, you will receive an [ INVALID ENTRY ] message for  
three seconds. Reenter the correct date and time. If the information you entered is  
incorrect, repeat the procedure.  
2. Use the UP and DOWN keys to scroll  
through the different options and press  
the right soft keys.  
CHANGE PASSCODE  
DISA ALARM:5678  
RESET STATION PASSCODES  
TO DEFAULT  
3. Press HOLD to reset the passcode  
CHANGE PASSCODE  
RING PLAN: 0000  
Individual keyset users can set or change their own individual passcodes. These  
passcodes are used to lock and unlock keysets, override toll restriction and access  
the DISA feature. At times, it may be necessary for the system administrator to  
reset a station’s passcode to default“1234.”This program cannot be used to display  
passcodes, only to reset them.  
4. Press TRSF to store and exit programming  
OR press SPK to store and advance to the  
next program  
SET DATE AND TIME DISPLAY  
Should it ever become necessary to correct the date and time displayed on all of  
the keysets, do so as soon as you notice that they are incorrect. Automatic  
Operating Mode will not work correctly and SMDR records will be of no value  
when the date and time are not correct.  
PROGRAM KEYS  
UP & DOWN - Select the extension number.  
HOLD - Press to reset the passcode.  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
The display format is the following:  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
W (Day of the week): Enter 0 for Sunday and 6 for Saturday.  
MM (Month): Enter 01 for January and 12 for December.  
DD (Day of the month): Enter a number in the range of 0131.  
YY (Year): Enter the last two digits of the year.  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 101  
[201] PASSCODE  
Display shows  
PASSCODE:,,,,  
HH (Hours): Use the 24 hour clock and enter a number in the range of 0024.  
MM (Minutes): Enter a number in the range of 0059.  
11  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
4. Press TRSF to store and exit  
2. Dial the station number OR use the  
UP and DOWN keys to scroll through  
the keyset numbers and press the  
right soft key to move the cursor right  
[205] PASSCODE  
programming OR press SPK to store  
and advance to the next program  
PASSCODE:,,,,  
NOTE: Directory information is always 11 characters.  
3. Press HOLD to reset the passcode  
[205] PASSCODE  
PASSCODE : 1234  
DEFAULT DATA: NONE  
Names are written using the keypad. Each press of a key will select a character.  
Pressing the dial pad key moves the cursor to the next position. For example, if the  
directory name is “SAM SMITH,” press the number “7” three times to get the letter  
“S.” Press the number “2” once to get the letter “A.” Continue selecting characters  
from the table below to complete your message. Press the “A” key to change the  
letter from upper case to lower case.  
4. Press the right soft key to return to  
step 2 OR press TRSF to store and exit  
programming OR press SPK to  
store and advance to the next program  
DEFAULT DATA: ALL STATION PASSCODES = 1234  
NOTE:When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as does the  
previous character, press the UP key to move the cursor to the right.  
PROGRAM STATION NAMES  
This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each exten-  
sion.You may assign a name of 11 characters long.  
DCS KEYSETS [NOT SUPPORTED ON THE OFFICESERV 7100]  
COUNT  
DIAL 0  
DIAL 1  
DIAL 2  
DIAL 3  
DIAL 4  
DIAL 5  
DIAL 6  
DIAL 7  
DIAL 8  
DIAL 9  
DIAL ,  
1
2
Z
?
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
,
PROGRAM KEYS  
Q
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll and move cursor.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter characters.  
HOLD - Press to clear entry.  
space  
,
!
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
&
Q
(
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
H
K
N
R
U
X
=
L
O
S
V
Y
[
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
M
P
T
1. Press TRSF and then dial 104  
[201] STN NAME  
Display shows  
2. Dial station number (e.g., 205)  
OR press UP or DOWN to select the  
station and press the right soft key to  
move the cursor  
[205] STN NAME  
W
:
]
The # key can be used for the following special characters: #, space, &, !, :, ?, ., %, $, -  
, /, =, [, ], @, ^, (, ), _, +, {, }, |, ;, \,“ and ~.  
3. Enter the station name using the  
procedure described on the next page  
and press the right soft key to return to  
step 2  
[205] STN NAME  
SAM SMITH  
13  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
iDCS / ITP / DS 5000 KEYSETS  
PROGRAM TRUNK NAMES  
This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each C.O. line.  
COUNT  
DIAL 0  
DIAL 1  
DIAL 2  
DIAL 3  
DIAL 4  
DIAL 5  
DIAL 6  
DIAL 7  
DIAL 8  
DIAL 9  
DIAL ,  
1
2
>
?
3
.
4
)
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
,
<
You may assign a name of 11 characters long.  
space  
,
!
PROGRAM KEYS  
A
D
G
J
B
E
C
F
I
@
#
$
%
^
S
,
Z
]
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll and move cursor.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter characters.  
HOLD - Press to clear entry.  
H
K
N
Q
U
X
=
L
O
R
V
Y
[
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
M
P
T
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 404  
[701] TRUNK NAME  
W
:
Display shows  
2. Dial trunk (e.g., 704) OR press UP or  
DOWN to select trunk and press the right  
soft key to move the cursor  
[704] TRUNK NAME  
1. When the character you want appears on the same dial pad key as the previ-  
ous character, press UP to move the cursor one space to the right.  
2. Other symbols are available for DIAL #.  
3. Enter the trunk name using the procedure  
in Program Station Names and press the  
right soft key to return to step 2  
[704] TRUNK NAME  
SAMSUNG  
4. Press TRSF to store and exit programming  
OR press SPK to store and advance to  
the next program  
15  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PROGRAM STATION GROUP NAMES  
This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each station  
group.You may assign a name 11 characters long.  
PROGRAM SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NUMBERS  
The system list starts with 200 numbers and can be increased in blocks of ten.The  
system may have either 500 or 950 maximum depending on the setting in MMC  
861. See your service company to increase or decrease the system list.  
PROGRAM KEYS  
The speed dial codes are 500999 or 050999. Each speed dial number consists of  
a line access code and the telephone number to be dialed.The access code can be  
any line group,individual line,station group or individual extension.The speed dial  
number can be up to 24 characters long including ,, #, FLASH and PAUSE.  
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll and move cursor.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter characters.  
HOLD - Press to clear entry.  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
NOTE: If Least Cost Routing (LCR) is being used, the LCR access code must be  
entered.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
When you are entering a speed dial number, there are some special keys that you  
will need to use. These are the bottom row of programmable keys on the keysets  
and are known as keys A, B, C, D, E and F.  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 602  
[501] SGR NAME  
Display shows the first group  
2. Dial the group number (e.g., 505) OR  
press the UP or DOWN key to make a  
selection and press the left or right  
soft key to move the cursor  
[505] SGR NAME  
PROGRAM KEYS  
UP & DOWN - Select the speed dial bin.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter number.  
HOLD - Press to clear entry.  
SPK/RLS - Save data and advance to next program.  
A - Does not have a function.  
3. Enter the name using the method  
[505] SGR NAME  
SAMSUNG  
in Program Station Names  
B - Inserts a FLASH.  
C - Inserts a PAUSE.  
D - Changes the dialing type from pulse to tone.  
E - Hides and displays digits.  
F - Changes display to speed dial name entry.  
4. Press the left or right soft key to return to  
step 2 OR press TRSF to store and exit  
programming OR press SPK to store and  
advance to the next program  
DCS KEYSETS [NOT SUPPORTED ON OFFICESERV 7100]  
24 BUTTON KEYSET  
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT  
12 BUTTON KEYSET  
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT  
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
17  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
iDCS KEYSETS  
4. Press the F key to toggle to Program  
System Speed Dial Names, step 3 to  
enter the name  
SYS SPEED NAME  
505:  
8D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE  
KEYS LAYOUT  
28D KEYSET, 18D KEYSET  
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT  
5. Press TRSF to store and exit  
programming OR press SPK to store  
and advance to the next program  
VOLUME  
A
C
E
B
D
F
Transfer  
Speaker  
C
E
F
A
B
DEFAULT DATA: NO SPEED NUMBERS ASSIGNED  
D
Transfer Speaker  
PROGRAM SYSTEM SPEED DIAL NAMES  
This program is used to assign a character name or identification for each system  
speed dial location.This name enables you to locate the speed dial number when  
you are using the directory dial feature.You may assign a name 11 characters long.  
DS 5000 SERIES KEYSETS  
7S KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE  
KEYS LAYOUT  
14D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE  
KEYS LAYOUT  
PROGRAM KEYS  
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through speed dial bins.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.  
F
F
B
A
B
C
D
A
C
D
E
E
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.  
SPK - Used to store data and advance to next program.  
HOLD - Used to clear previous entry.  
21D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE  
KEYS LAYOUT  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then 706  
SYS SPEED NAME  
500:  
F
B
A
C
D
E
Display shows the first name  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
2. Dial the system speed number (e.g., 505)  
OR press UP or DOWN to select the entry  
number and press the right soft key to  
move the cursor  
SYS SPEED NAME  
505:  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 705  
SYS SPEED DIAL  
500:  
Display shows the first number  
3. Enter the name as shown in Program  
Station Names and press the right soft  
key to return to step 2 OR press the  
F key to toggle to the speed dial number  
to return to Program System Speed Dial  
Numbers, step 4  
SYS SPEED NAME  
505:SAMSUNG  
2. Dial the speed bin desired (e.g., 505) OR  
press UP or DOWN to choose and  
SYS SPEED DIAL  
505:  
press the right soft key to move the cursor  
3. Enter the access code (e.g., 9—the system  
will automatically insert a dash) followed by  
the phone number (up to 24 digits long)  
and press the right soft key to return to  
step 2  
SYS SPEED DIAL  
505:9–121223456789  
4. Press the right soft key to return to step 2  
above OR press TRSF to store and exit  
programming OR press SPK to store and  
advance to the next program  
19  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
iDCS KEYSETS  
PROGRAM PERSONAL SPEED DIAL  
NUMBERS FOR OTHER STATIONS  
8D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE  
KEYS LAYOUT  
28D KEYSET, 18D KEYSET  
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT  
Individual station users can program their own numbers, but in cases where this is  
not practical, or for single line telephone users, this program allows a system  
administrator to view or change any station’s speed dial numbers. The station  
speed dial codes are 00–49 or 000–049. Each station begins with ten numbers  
(00–09) and can be assigned more in blocks of ten (up to a maximum of fifty num-  
bers).  
VOLUME  
A
C
E
B
D
F
Transfer  
Speaker  
C
E
F
A
B
D
Transfer Speaker  
Each speed dial number consists of a line access code and the telephone number  
to be dialed. The access code can be any line group, individual line, station group  
or individual extension. The speed dial number can be up to 24 characters long  
including ,, #, FLASH and PAUSE.  
DS 5000 SERIES KEYSETS  
7S KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE  
KEYS LAYOUT  
14D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE  
KEYS LAYOUT  
NOTE: If Least Cost Routing (LCR) is used, the LCR access code must be entered.  
When you are entering a speed dial number, there are some special keys that you  
will need to use.These are the bottom row of programmable keys on the LCD 12B  
and LCD 24B keysets and are known as keys A, B, C, D, E and F.  
F
F
B
A
B
C
D
A
C
D
E
E
21D KEYSET PROGRAMMABLE  
KEYS LAYOUT  
PROGRAM KEYS  
UP & DOWN - Scrolls through extension numbers and speed dial bins.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter number.  
HOLD - Press to clear entry.  
A - Does not have a function.  
B - Inserts a FLASH.  
F
B
A
C
D
E
C - Inserts a PAUSE.  
D - Changes the dialing type from pulse to tone.  
E - Hides and displays digits.  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
F - Changes display to speed dial name entry.  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 105  
[201] SPEED DIAL  
00 :  
Display shows  
DCS KEYSETS [NOT SUPPORTED ON OFFICESERV 7100]  
24 BUTTON KEYSET  
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT  
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR  
press UP or DOWN to select the station  
and press the right soft key to move the  
cursor OR press the left soft key to go  
to step 4  
[205] SPEED DIAL  
00 :  
12 BUTTON KEYSET  
PROGRAMMABLE KEYS LAYOUT  
3. If the selected station has no speed dial  
bins, this display will be shown and a new  
station may be selected  
[205] SPEED DIAL  
SPDBLK NOT EXIST  
A
B
C
D
E
F
A
B
C
D
E
F
21  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
4. Dial the location number (e.g., 05) OR  
press UP or DOWN to select the location  
and press the right soft key to move the  
cursor OR press the left soft key to return  
to step 2  
[205] SPEED DIAL  
05: _  
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR  
press UP or DOWN to select the station  
and press the right soft key to move the  
cursor  
[205] SPEED NAME  
00:  
3. If the selected station has no speed dial  
bins, this display will be shown and a new  
station may be selected  
[205] SPEED DIAL  
SPDBLK NOT EXIST  
5. Enter the trunk access code (e.g., 9)  
followed by the number to be dialed  
(e.g., 4264100) OR press the right  
[205] SPEED DIAL  
05 : 9-4264100_  
soft key to return to step 2 OR press the  
left soft key to return to step 3 OR press  
HOLD to clear an entry (if an error is made,  
use the DOWN key to step back)  
4. Dial the speed dial location (e.g., 05) OR  
use UP or DOWN to scroll through the  
location numbers and use the right soft  
key to move the cursor OR press the left  
soft key to return to step 2 above  
[205] SPEED NAME  
01:_  
6. Press the F key to access Program Station  
Speed Dial Names OR press TRSF to save  
and exit programming OR press SPK to save  
and advance to the next program  
5. Enter the name using the procedure in  
Program Station Names and press the  
right soft key to return to step 2 OR  
press the left soft key to return to step 3  
[205] SPEED NAME  
01:SAM SMITH  
DEFAULT DATA: NO SPEED DIAL NUMBERS PROGRAMMED  
6. Press the F key to access Program  
Personal Speed Dial Numbers for  
Other Stations OR press TRSF to  
store and exit programming OR press  
SPK to store and advance to the  
next program  
PROGRAM PERSONAL SPEED DIAL NAMES  
FOR OTHER STATIONS  
Each individual station user can program his/her own names but in cases where it  
is impractical or for single line telephone users, this program allows a system  
administrator to view or change any station’s speed dial names.The station speed  
dial codes are 00–49. Each station begins with ten numbers (00–09) and can be  
assigned more in blocks of ten up to a maximum of fifty numbers.  
CREATE PROGRAMMED STATION  
MESSAGES  
The programmed station message feature lets you set a message at your phone to  
notify users with Display Phones that you may be out of town. This way, when  
Display Phone users call their display will showOUT OF TOWNand they will know  
why you do not answer.  
PROGRAM KEYS  
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through extension numbers and speed dial bins.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.  
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.  
SPK - Used to store data and advance to next program.  
HOLD - Used to clear previous entry.  
ANS/RLS - Used to select ALL.  
The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 systems allow 15 mes-  
sages to be programmed in the system list in MMC 715 and each station can pro-  
gram 5 messages individually.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
PROGRAM KEYS  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 106  
[201] SPEED NAME  
00:  
UP & DOWN - Select the message number.  
Display shows  
23  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
KEYPAD - Used to enter characters.  
HOLD - Press to clear entry.  
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR  
press UP or DOWN to select the station  
and press the right soft key to move the  
cursor OR press ANS/RLS to select all  
stations  
[205]ALM REM(1)  
HHMM: NOTSET  
OR  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
[ALL]ALM REM(1)  
HHMM: NOTSET  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
3. Dial 13 to select the alarm (e.g., 2) OR  
[201]ALM REM(1)  
HHMM: NOTSET  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 715  
PGM.MESSAGE (01)  
GIVE ME THE CALL  
Display shows the first message  
press UP or DOWN to select the alarm  
and press the right soft key to move the  
cursor OR press the left soft key to  
return to step 2  
2. Dial in the message number (e.g., 11)  
OR press UP or DOWN to scroll through  
the messages and press the right soft  
key to move the cursor  
PGM.MESSAGE (16)  
EMPTY MESSAGE  
4. Enter the alarm time in 24 hour clock  
format (e.g., 1300) and the display will  
automatically advance to step 5  
[205]ALM REM (2)  
HHMM:1300NOTSET  
3. Enter in the message using the  
procedure in Program Station Names  
and press the right soft key to return  
to step 2 above  
PGM.MESSAGE (16)  
IN THE SHOWROOM  
5. Enter the alarm type from the list above  
OR press UP or DOWN to select the  
alarm type and press the right soft key  
to move the cursor  
[205]ALM REM (2)  
HHMM:1300DAILY  
4. Press TRSF to store and exit programming  
OR press SPK to store and advance to  
the next program  
6. Enter the messages using the procedure  
in Program Station Names and press the  
right soft key to return to step 2  
[205]ALM REM (2)  
TAKE MEDICATION  
SET ALARM/APPOINTMENT  
REMINDER WITH MESSAGE  
Keyset users can set their own alarms but standard telephone users cannot. The  
system administrator can set alarm/appointment reminders for other stations in  
the system.  
7. Press TRSF to store and exit pro-  
gramming OR press SPK to store  
and advance to the next program  
PROGRAM KEYS  
UP & DOWN - Scroll through extensions.  
HOLD - Press to clear data.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter data.  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 116  
[201]ALM REM(1)  
HHMM: NOTSET  
Display shows  
25  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PROGRAM KEYS  
MANAGING KEY ASSIGNMENTS  
You can view station key assignments and add extenders to some of the program-  
UP & DOWN - Select the extension number.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter extender codes.  
HOLD - Used to clear the displayed data.  
mable keys for easy one touch operation of frequently used features.  
An extender is a number that makes an otherwise general key very specific. Add-  
ing the digit “4” to a PAGE key defines this key for paging zone four. Adding “225”  
to a directed pickup key will define this key as pickup for extension 225 only. The  
key must already be assigned by the installing technician.  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 107  
[201] KEY EXTEND  
01:CALL1  
Display shows the first station  
Use this program to assign extenders to the following keys:  
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR use  
UP or DOWN to scroll through the station  
numbers and press the right soft key to  
move the cursor  
[205] KEY EXTEND  
01:CALL1  
KEY  
DESCRIPTION  
EXTENDER  
BOSS..............Boss/Secretary ..............................(1–4)  
DP ..................Direct Pickup ................................(Extension number or  
station group number)  
DS....................Direct Station ................................(Any extension number)  
FWRD ............Call Forwarding ............................(0–7)  
3. Enter the key number (e.g., 18) OR use  
UP and DOWN to scroll through the keys  
and use the right soft key to move the  
cursor OR press the key to be programmed  
[205] KEY EXTEND  
18:DS  
GPIK ..............Group Pick-Up ..............................(01–20)  
IG ....................In/Out of Group ..........................(Any group number you are part of)  
MMPG ..........Meet Me Page ..............................(0–9, ,)  
PAGE ..............Page ................................................(0–9, ,)  
PARK ..............Park (orbits) ....................................(0–9)  
RP....................Ring Plan ........................................(1–6), HOLD for none  
SPD ................Speed Dialing ................................(00–49, 500–999)  
PMSG ............Programmed Messages ............(01–30) [Only 20 on the OS7100]  
DIR..................Directory..........................................PERS (1), SYS (2) or STN (3)  
VT....................Voice Mail Transfer ......................Voice Mail Group Number  
SG....................Station Group ................................501–519 for the OfficeServ 100 & 7100  
501–539 for the OfficeServ 500 M  
4. Dial the extender according to the list  
above and the system will display your  
selection  
If there are no more entries, press  
the left soft key to return to step 2  
5. Press TRSF to store and exit programming  
OR press SPK to store and advance to the  
next program  
[205] KEY EXTEND  
18:DS207  
501–579 for the OfficeServ 500 L  
501–539 for the OfficeServ 7200  
501–579 for the OfficeServ 7400  
27  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
PROGRAMMING ACCOUNT CODES  
This program is used to add or change account code entries.  
STATION TIMERS  
Each station can have five timers customized for them to accommodate station  
users with individual work habits. These timers are as follows:  
PROGRAM KEYS  
NO ANS FWD No Answer Forward  
KEYPAD - Used to enter the account code (allowable digits 0–9).  
UP & DOWN - Used to select entry number.  
FLASH & TRSF - Used to view and change only the used entries.  
SPK/RLS - Used to clear data.  
This is the amount of time a call will ring at a station before it forwards to the  
Forward No Answer destination.The default is 15 seconds and the range is 000 to  
250 seconds. Make sure that this timer is not set to a greater value than the trans-  
fer recall timer or transferred calls will not forward.  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
DTMF DUR.  
DTMF Duration  
This is the duration of DTMF tones sent to an analog voice mail port. The default  
duration is 100 milliseconds and the range is 0100 to 9900 milliseconds.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 708  
ACCOUNT CODE  
(001)  
Display shows  
F-DGT DELY  
First Digit Delay  
This is the time the system will wait before sending DTMF digits to a voice mail  
port. The default time is 600 milliseconds and the range is from 100 to 9900 mil-  
liseconds.  
2. Dial the account code entry (e.g., 005)  
OR press UP or DOWN to select the  
entry number and press the right soft  
key to move the cursor  
ACCOUNT CODE  
(005)  
OFFHK SEL.  
Off Hook Select  
This timer controls the delay between going off hook (lifting the handset) and the  
off hook select destination being called.The default duration is 10 seconds and the  
range is from 000 to 250 seconds.  
3. Enter the account code via the dial pad,  
e.g., 1234 (maximum of 12 digits) and  
press the right soft key to move the  
cursor back to step 2  
ACCOUNT CODE  
(005)123456789012  
EFWD DELAY External Forward Delay  
4. Press TRSF to store and exit pro-  
gramming OR press SPK to store and  
advance to the next program  
This is the time that a station will ring before a call forwards to the external call for-  
ward destination. The default duration is 10 seconds and the range is 1 second to  
250 seconds.  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
PROGRAM KEYS  
KEYPAD - Used to set timer values.  
UP & DOWN - Used to select extension number.  
SPK/RLS - Save data and advance to next program.  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 502  
[201] NO ANS FWD  
010 SEC  
Display shows  
29  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
2. Dial the station number (e.g., 205) OR  
press UP or DOWN key to select the  
station and press the right soft key OR  
press ANS/RLS to select all stations  
and press the right soft key  
[205] NO ANS FWD  
010 SEC  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 728  
TRANSLATION:(001)  
DIGIT:  
OR  
Display shows first entry  
[ALL] NO ANS FWD  
010 SEC  
2. Dial entry number (e.g., 005 or 0005)  
OR use UP and DOWN to scroll  
through entries and press right  
soft key to select entry  
TRANSLATION:(005)  
DIGIT:_  
3. Press UP or DOWN key to select the  
[205] DTMF DUR.  
station timer and press the right soft key  
0100 MS  
4. Enter the new value via the dial pad,  
e.g., 0300 and the system will return  
to step 2  
[205] DTMF DUR.  
3. Enter telephone number and press  
right soft key to advance to name entry  
OR enter telephone number and press  
left soft key to return to step 2 above  
TRANSLATION:(005)  
DIGIT:3054264100  
0100 MS0300  
5. Press TRSF to store and exit  
programming OR press SPK to store  
and advance to the next program  
4. Enter the name using the method  
in Program Station Names  
TRANSLATION:(005)  
SAMSUNG TELECOM  
and press right or left soft key to  
return to step 2 above  
OR press SPK to save and advance  
to next MMC OR press TRSF to  
save and exit programming  
ADDING NAMES TO THE  
TRANSLATION TABLE  
This program allows the system administrator or technician to associate a CID or  
ANI number received from the Central Office with a name programmed in this  
translation table. If there is no match between a received number and a name in  
this table, [no CID name] or [no ANI name] will be displayed.  
DEFAULT DATA: NONE  
The translation table consists of 1000 entries in the OfficeServ 500 M and  
OfficeServ 7100, and OfficeServ 7200 and OfficeServ 7400 systems or 2000  
entries in the OfficeServ 500 L system or 500 entries in the OfficeServ 100 sys-  
tem with each entry comprised of a ten digit telephone number and a 16 digit  
name. See Program Station Names.  
Open customer programming and follow the instructions below.  
PROGRAM KEYS  
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through options.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.  
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.  
SPK - Used to store data and advance to next MMC.  
HOLD - Used to clear previous entry.  
31  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
CUSTOMER SET RELOCATION  
HOLIDAY  
This program is used to swap information associated with two stations. All assign-  
ments such as trunk ring, station group, station COS, station speed dial etc. will fol-  
low this program. 18 button keysets and 28 button keysets can be exchanged. If  
incompatible set types are selected the system will provide an ERROR: NO MATCH  
message. 18 button and 28 button key assignments should be taken in consider-  
ation when relocating these type of sets.The table below shows which phones can  
be switched with each other.  
This program provides the ability to set as many as 20 different holidays. Each hol-  
iday will override the System Operating Mode for that particular date with a pro-  
grammed ring plan.  
PROGRAM KEYS  
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through options.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.  
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.  
HOLD - Used to clear an entry.  
NOTE: In order to use this program it must first be activated by a technician. Please  
see your installing company to have this done if you wish to use this program.  
PROGRAM KEYS  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
1. Press TRSF and then dial 512  
RING PLAN  
FOLLOW1  
UP & DOWN - Used to scroll through options.  
KEYPAD - Used to enter selections.  
SOFT KEYS - Move cursor left and right.  
SPK - Used to store data and advance to next program.  
HOLD - Used to clear previous entry.  
Display shows  
2. Press the right soft key to move the  
cursor to bottom half of display  
RING PLAN  
FOLLOW1  
ANS/RLS - Used to select ALL.  
3. Enter the desired ring plan (e.g., 0-6)  
RING PLAN  
FOLLOW4  
Display will return to STEP 1  
ACTION  
DISPLAY  
4. Press UP or DOWN to change display  
ASSIGN HOLIDAY  
01:  
1. Press TRSF 315  
SET RELOCATION  
EXT _ EXT  
to holiday assignment  
Display shows  
5. Press the right soft key to move the  
cursor to bottom half of display  
ASSIGN HOLIDAY  
01:  
2. Enter first station number (e.g., 202)  
SET RELOCATION  
EXT 202 EXT _  
Press RIGHT soft key to move cursor  
6. Enter a desired holiday date  
ASSIGN HOLIDAY  
01:  
3. Enter second station number (e.g., 210)  
SET RELOCATION  
(e.g., 1225)  
Press RIGHT soft key to enter data  
EXT 202 EXT 210  
7. Press TRSF to store and exit  
programming OR press SPK to store  
and advance to the next program  
ASSIGN HOLIDAY  
01:1225  
4. Display will return to STEP 1  
Go to STEP 2  
SET RELOCATION  
EXT _ EXT  
OR press TRSF to store and exit  
programming.  
33  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Admin  
Table of Contents  
Home Page  
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE  
ALARMS  
The OfficeServ 100, OfficeServ 500, and OfficeServ 7000 systems provide a feature  
that self-checks for any failures. If a failure does occur in the software or hardware,  
a fault error will be generated and buffered to an alarm report. During an alarm  
state every phone with an assigned SYSTEM ALARM button will ring and cause  
the SYSTEM ALARM button to flash amber. A phone with a display should be  
used so that the alarm information can be viewed.When an alarm occurs, the user  
can press the SYSTEM ALARM button to view and scroll through the alarms.This  
will silence the audible part of the alarm, but the SYSTEM ALARM button will  
continue to flash until your Service Company views and clears the alarms in the  
alarm report located in the system software.  
[DCS Keysets and 32 button AOM not supported on the OS 7100].  
35  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Radio Shack Headphones 33 1180 User Guide
Renesas Network Card M3T DIRECT100S User Guide
ResMed Sleep Apnea Machine Swift FX User Guide
Ryobi Trimmer RY41002 User Guide
Samsung Camera Lens A12 User Guide
Samsung Radio WM 202 User Guide
Samsung Stereo System HT TQ85 User Guide
Sanus Systems Indoor Furnishings PFAV30 User Guide
Sanyo Battery Charger CR17335SE User Guide
Sanyo Universal Remote POA RCKIT02 User Guide